0% found this document useful (0 votes)

2K views

Tekla Structures - Drawing Guide

Uploaded by

Tranタオ

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

2K views

Tekla Structures - Drawing Guide

Uploaded by

Tranタオ

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 425

Tekla Structures

Drawing Guide

Product version 17.0

December 2010

© 2010 Tekla Corporation

© 2010 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.
This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this
Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain
warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines
permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All information
set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License
Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does not
guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to make
changes and additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and
criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xroad, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product
and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a
third-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party
and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2008 Siemens Industry Software Limited. All rights reserved.
EPM toolkit © 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved.
XML parser © 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Project Data Control Library © 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved.
DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries © 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights
reserved.
FlexNet Copyright © 2010 Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. All Rights Reserved. This product
contains proprietary and confidential technology, information and creative works owned by Flexera Software, Inc.
and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. and their respective licensors, if any. Any use, copying, publication, distribution, display,
modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the prior
express written permission of Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. is strictly prohibited. Except where
expressly provided by Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. in writing, possession of this technology
shall not be construed to confer any license or rights under any Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc.
intellectual property rights, whether by estoppel, implication, or otherwise.
The software is protected by U.S. Patent Nos. 7,302,368 and 7,617,076. Also elements of the software described in
this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries including
U.S. patent applications 2004267695, 2005285881, 20060004841, 20060136398, 20080189084, and 20090189887.
Conventions used in this guide
Typographical The following typographical conventions are used in this guide:
conventions

Font Usage
Bold Any text that you see in the user interface appears in bold. This font
is used, for example, for window and dialog box titles, box and
button names, and list items.
Italic bold New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current context
for the first time.
Monospace Extracts of program code, HTML, or other material that you would
normally edit in a text editor, appear in monospaced font.
This font is also used for file names and folder paths, and for any
text that you should type yourself.

Noteboxes The following types of noteboxes are used in this guide:

A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing

things.

A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It can
also point you to other information in this guide that you might find
useful.

You should always read very important notes and warnings, like this
one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting your
time.

This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that

is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 3
Contents

Conventions used in this guide ........................................................................................................................... 3

1 Introduction to drawings ........................................................................ 17

1.1 Main features in drawings..................................................................................................................... 17
1.2 Screen layout........................................................................................................................................ 18
1.3 Drawing contents .................................................................................................................................. 19
Drawing layout and views ................................................................................................................ 19
Drawing objects................................................................................................................................ 20
1.4 Basic principles of drawings ................................................................................................................. 21
Integrated drawings.......................................................................................................................... 22
How drawings are updated .............................................................................................................. 22
Drawing associativity........................................................................................................................ 23
Associativity symbol .................................................................................................................. 23
Three levels of modifying drawings.................................................................................................. 24

2 Creating drawings ................................................................................... 27

2.1 Drawing types ....................................................................................................................................... 27
General arrangement drawings........................................................................................................ 27
Example: Foundation plan ......................................................................................................... 28
Example: Slab plan ................................................................................................................... 28
Example: Framing plan ............................................................................................................. 29
Example: Deck plan .................................................................................................................. 30
Example: Erection elevation drawing ........................................................................................ 31
Example: 3D isometric drawing ................................................................................................. 32
Example: Anchor bolt plan ........................................................................................................ 33
Single-part drawings ........................................................................................................................ 34
Example: Anchor bolt ................................................................................................................ 34
Example: Embed ....................................................................................................................... 35
Example: Plate .......................................................................................................................... 36
Assembly drawings .......................................................................................................................... 40
Example: Beam ......................................................................................................................... 40
Example: Stairs ......................................................................................................................... 40
Example: Rail ............................................................................................................................ 41
Example: Nested assembly ....................................................................................................... 42
Cast unit drawings............................................................................................................................ 44
Example: Beam ......................................................................................................................... 44

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 4
Example: Column ...................................................................................................................... 45
Example: Stairs ......................................................................................................................... 46
Multidrawings ................................................................................................................................... 47
2.2 Before creating drawings ...................................................................................................................... 48
2.3 Master Drawing Catalog ....................................................................................................................... 49
Master drawing types ....................................................................................................................... 50
Cloning templates ...................................................................................................................... 50
Saved settings ........................................................................................................................... 50
Rule sets ................................................................................................................................... 51
Wizards ..................................................................................................................................... 52
Searching for master drawings ........................................................................................................ 52
2.4 Cloning drawings .................................................................................................................................. 53
Creating drawings using cloning templates...................................................................................... 54
Using cloning templates from other models .............................................................................. 54
Cloning from the Drawing List .......................................................................................................... 55
Example: Cloning a general arrangement drawing ................................................................... 55
View-specific dimension cloning ...................................................................................................... 57
Cloning using drawing templates in template library........................................................................ 58
Cloned objects ................................................................................................................................. 58
Checking and modifying cloned drawings........................................................................................ 59
Refreshing drawing associativity...................................................................................................... 60
2.5 Creating drawings using saved settings ............................................................................................... 60
Creating general arrangement drawings.......................................................................................... 60
Creating single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.................................................................... 61
2.6 Creating drawings using rule sets or wizards ....................................................................................... 62
2.7 Creating anchor bolt plans.................................................................................................................... 63
Objects included in the anchor bolt plan .......................................................................................... 64
Defining the included parts using drawing filters.............................................................................. 64
Including assemblies in anchor bolt plans........................................................................................ 65
2.8 Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands ............................................................. 65
Creating general arrangement drawings.......................................................................................... 66
Creating single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings...................................................................... 66
Creating multidrawings..................................................................................................................... 67
Creating empty multidrawings and linking or copying views ..................................................... 67
Creating multidrawings of selected drawings ............................................................................ 68
Creating multidrawings of selected parts ................................................................................... 68
2.9 Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part............................................................................... 69
Creating multiple drawing sheets using wizards .............................................................................. 69
Creating multiple drawing sheets using drawing properties............................................................. 69

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 5
3 Finding and opening drawings .............................................................. 71
3.1 Opening the Drawing List...................................................................................................................... 72
3.2 What is displayed in the Drawing List ................................................................................................... 72
3.3 Drawing status flags.............................................................................................................................. 73
How to read the drawing status information ..................................................................................... 74
3.4 Modifying Drawing List contents ........................................................................................................... 75
3.5 Searching drawings and saving the search results............................................................................... 76
3.6 Selecting drawings in the Drawing List ................................................................................................. 76
3.7 Checking whether parts have drawings ................................................................................................ 76
3.8 Opening drawings from the model ........................................................................................................ 77
3.9 Opening a new drawing when a drawing is already open..................................................................... 77

4 Editing drawings ..................................................................................... 79

4.1 Renaming drawings .............................................................................................................................. 79
4.2 Giving titles to drawings ........................................................................................................................ 80
4.3 Drawing views....................................................................................................................................... 80
Adding views in drawings ................................................................................................................. 81
Creating a detail view ................................................................................................................ 81
Creating a section view .............................................................................................................. 83
Creating a curved section view .................................................................................................. 84
Creating additional views of parts .............................................................................................. 85
Creating a view of an entire model view .................................................................................... 86
Creating a view of a selected area in a model view ................................................................... 87
Creating a view of a selected area in a drawing view ................................................................ 87
Creating a view for a reinforcement mesh ................................................................................. 88
Adding single-part views in assembly drawings ........................................................................ 89
Copying drawing views from another drawing.................................................................................. 89
Moving views to another drawing ..................................................................................................... 90
Linking views from another drawing ................................................................................................. 92
Changing drawing views .................................................................................................................. 92
Resizing drawing views ............................................................................................................. 92
Resizing the drawing view boundary ......................................................................................... 93
Moving drawing views ................................................................................................................ 94
Aligning views ............................................................................................................................ 95
Rotating drawing views .............................................................................................................. 96
Arranging drawing views ............................................................................................................ 96
Modifying drawing view properties ............................................................................................. 96
Modifying section properties ...................................................................................................... 97
Modifying detail properties ......................................................................................................... 98

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
4.4 Dimensions ........................................................................................................................................... 98
Adding dimensions........................................................................................................................... 99
Adding manual dimensions ....................................................................................................... 99
Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System .................................................... 103
Adding tags to dimensions ...................................................................................................... 104
Adding dual dimensions manually ........................................................................................... 107
Recreating dimensions for all parts ......................................................................................... 108
Adding predefined reinforcement dimensions ......................................................................... 109
Adding dimension (distribution) lines to reinforcing bars ......................................................... 110
Dimensioning spiral stirrup reinforcement groups ................................................................... 111
Dimensioning center of gravity ................................................................................................ 113
Semi-automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings .................................................. 115
Adding semi-automatic dimensions ......................................................................................... 115
Example: Combining dimensions ............................................................................................ 116
Editing dimensions ......................................................................................................................... 119
Moving the end of the dimension line ...................................................................................... 120
Combining dimension lines ..................................................................................................... 120
Linking perpendicular dimension lines ..................................................................................... 121
Adding dimension points ......................................................................................................... 122
Adding closing dimensions ...................................................................................................... 122
Setting new dimension start point ........................................................................................... 123
Placing dimension texts outside dimensions ........................................................................... 124
Showing plate side marks ....................................................................................................... 125
Adding dimension points in anchor bolt plans ......................................................................... 126
Modifying dimension properties ............................................................................................... 126
Checking dimension point validity .................................................................................................. 127
4.5 Associative annotation objects ........................................................................................................... 127
Adding part marks .......................................................................................................................... 128
Adding level marks......................................................................................................................... 128
Adding associative notes ............................................................................................................... 129
Modifying associative annotation object properties........................................................................ 130
Updating marks .............................................................................................................................. 130
Change symbols ............................................................................................................................ 131
Removing change symbols ..................................................................................................... 131
Showing change symbols in printed drawings ......................................................................... 132
Merging marks ............................................................................................................................... 132
Merging reinforcement marks .................................................................................................. 133
Moving the mark leader line base point ......................................................................................... 133
4.6 Independent annotation objects.......................................................................................................... 133
Adding text ..................................................................................................................................... 133
Using superscript in text .......................................................................................................... 134
Adding links to text files.................................................................................................................. 135

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 7
Adding links to other drawings ....................................................................................................... 135
Adding hyperlinks ........................................................................................................................... 136
Adding links to DWG and DXF files................................................................................................ 137
Adding revision marks .................................................................................................................... 137
Modifying the properties of independent annotation objects .......................................................... 138
4.7 Building objects................................................................................................................................... 138
Modifying building objects .............................................................................................................. 139
Shortening parts view by view........................................................................................................ 140
Hiding building object outlines using cover-up tools....................................................................... 141
Showing a single reinforcing bar in a group ................................................................................... 141
Adjusting the location of a single reinforcing bar ..................................................................... 142
Showing layer information on reinforcing bars ............................................................................... 142
4.8 Edge chamfers in drawings................................................................................................................. 143
Displaying edge chamfers in a drawing.......................................................................................... 143
Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers .................................................................. 144
Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually ................................................................... 145
Creating edge chamfer marks ........................................................................................................ 145
Example: Edge chamfers ............................................................................................................... 146
4.9 Welds in drawings............................................................................................................................... 147
Weld concepts................................................................................................................................ 147
Example: Model welds in drawings ................................................................................................ 148
Adding weld marks ......................................................................................................................... 151
Example: Weld mark added in a drawing....................................................................................... 152
Merging weld marks ....................................................................................................................... 153
4.10 Symbols in drawings ........................................................................................................................... 154
Symbol Files browser ..................................................................................................................... 155
Viewing and modifying the symbol file contents ...................................................................... 155
Creating a new symbol file ....................................................................................................... 156
Changing the symbol file in use ............................................................................................... 156
Adding symbols in drawings........................................................................................................... 156
Modifying symbol properties........................................................................................................... 157
4.11 Additional drawing objects .................................................................................................................. 157
Creating a shape ............................................................................................................................ 157
4.12 Changing drawing objects................................................................................................................... 158
Dragging, reshaping and resizing drawing objects......................................................................... 158
Arranging drawing objects.............................................................................................................. 160
Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views.......................................................... 160
Listing hidden parts in drawings .............................................................................................. 163
Trimming ........................................................................................................................................ 163
Splitting........................................................................................................................................... 165
Dividing........................................................................................................................................... 166

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Modifying the shape of leader lines................................................................................................ 166
4.13 Using drawing tools ............................................................................................................................ 167
Aligning drawing objects ................................................................................................................ 167
Creating fillets ................................................................................................................................ 168
Creating chamfers.......................................................................................................................... 169
Copying with offsets ....................................................................................................................... 170
Managing moment connection symbols......................................................................................... 171
Creating moment connection symbols .................................................................................... 171
Updating moment connection symbols .................................................................................... 172
Deleting moment connection symbols ..................................................................................... 172
Managing cut lines ......................................................................................................................... 173
Creating cut lines ..................................................................................................................... 173
Updating cut lines .................................................................................................................... 173
Deleting cut lines ..................................................................................................................... 174
4.14 Grids in drawings ................................................................................................................................ 174
Modifying grid and grid line properties ........................................................................................... 174
Moving grid labels .......................................................................................................................... 175
Hiding grids or grid lines................................................................................................................. 175
4.15 Colors in drawings .............................................................................................................................. 175
Changing drawing color ................................................................................................................. 176
Specifying and using special color ................................................................................................. 178
Pen numbers in Color Table .......................................................................................................... 179
Changing the pen numbers for colors ..................................................................................... 179
4.16 User coordinate system (UCS) ........................................................................................................... 180
Setting a new UCS......................................................................................................................... 181
Toggling between two user coordinate systems ............................................................................ 181
Resetting UCS ............................................................................................................................... 181
4.17 Saving drawings ................................................................................................................................. 181
4.18 Closing drawings ................................................................................................................................ 182

5 Working with drawings ......................................................................... 183

5.1 Updating drawings when the model changes ..................................................................................... 183
5.2 Locking and unlocking drawings......................................................................................................... 184
5.3 Freezing drawings .............................................................................................................................. 184
Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings............................................................... 185
Freezing and unfreezing single part, cast unit and assembly drawings......................................... 185
How freezing affects drawings ....................................................................................................... 185
5.4 Issuing drawings ................................................................................................................................. 186
5.5 Deleting drawings ............................................................................................................................... 186
5.6 Revising drawings............................................................................................................................... 186

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 9
Creating revisions........................................................................................................................... 187
Changing revisions......................................................................................................................... 187
Deleting revisions ........................................................................................................................... 188
5.7 Printing drawings................................................................................................................................. 188
Printing single drawings ................................................................................................................. 188
Example: Printing on A4 in landscape ..................................................................................... 189
Example: Printing on A3 in portrait .......................................................................................... 189
Printing multiple drawings with different sizes in one go ................................................................ 190
Printing to file.................................................................................................................................. 190
Customizing print file names .................................................................................................... 191
Switches for customizing print file names ................................................................................ 191
Creating PDF files .......................................................................................................................... 192
Printing settings.............................................................................................................................. 193
Printing to multiple sheets .............................................................................................................. 194
Drawing frames and foldmarks....................................................................................................... 195
Adding frames and foldmarks in printouts ............................................................................... 196
Using a DWG/DXF file as a frame ........................................................................................... 196
Setting up printer instances............................................................................................................ 197
Adding a printer instance ......................................................................................................... 197
Adding a print-to-file instance .................................................................................................. 197
Adding an Adobe postscript printer instance ........................................................................... 198
Paper size ................................................................................................................................ 199
Print area h*b ........................................................................................................................... 199
Colors and line weights in printing ........................................................................................... 199
Printing tips..................................................................................................................................... 200
5.8 Preview images of drawings ............................................................................................................... 200
Creating preview images................................................................................................................ 200
Adding preview images for master drawings.................................................................................. 201
Viewing preview images of drawing templates............................................................................... 201

6 Modifying automatic drawing settings................................................ 203

6.1 Updating project information ............................................................................................................... 204
6.2 Drawing properties.............................................................................................................................. 206
Modifying drawing properties on drawing level .............................................................................. 206
Modifying and saving drawing properties before creating drawings ........................................ 206
Modifying drawing properties of an existing drawing ............................................................... 207
Modifying drawing properties of several drawings ................................................................... 207
Modifying drawing properties on view level.................................................................................... 207
Modifying and saving properties on object level............................................................................. 208
Loading saved drawing object properties in an existing drawing ............................................. 208
Creating object level settings ......................................................................................................... 209
Applying object level settings on drawing level ........................................................................ 209

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Example: Applying object level settings on drawing level ....................................................... 210
Applying object level settings on view level ............................................................................. 212
How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties.......................................................................... 212
6.3 Drawing layout .................................................................................................................................... 213
Table layouts.................................................................................................................................. 214
Tables ............................................................................................................................................ 215
Creating a new layout .................................................................................................................... 215
Defining fixed sizes ................................................................................................................. 216
Defining calculated sizes ......................................................................................................... 216
Creating and adding a new table layout......................................................................................... 216
Setting margins and spaces for drawing views .............................................................................. 217
Adding tables in table layout .......................................................................................................... 217
If you replace a table in a table layout............................................................................................ 218
Setting the properties of tables in a table layout ............................................................................ 218
Key plans ....................................................................................................................................... 219
Adding a key plan in a table layout .......................................................................................... 220
Setting up a drawing view to be used as a key plan ............................................................... 220
Adding a DXG/DXF file in a table layout ........................................................................................ 220
Modifying tables in Template Editor ............................................................................................... 221
Selecting a new layout ................................................................................................................... 221
6.4 Drawing size and drawing view scale ................................................................................................. 222
Using exact drawing view scale and automatic drawing size......................................................... 222
Using exact drawing size and automatic drawing view scale......................................................... 223
Autoscaling and autosizing drawings ............................................................................................. 224
6.5 Automatic drawing views .................................................................................................................... 225
Selecting the views to create ......................................................................................................... 225
Selecting the view projection type.................................................................................................. 226
Setting the location of end views and section views ...................................................................... 228
Including single-part drawings in assembly drawings .................................................................... 230
Part orientation in drawing views ................................................................................................... 231
Coordinate system .................................................................................................................. 231
Changing the coordinate system ............................................................................................. 233
Rotating parts .......................................................................................................................... 233
Setting viewing direction for columns in assembly drawings ................................................... 235
Setting viewing direction for beams and bracings in assembly drawings ................................ 235
Showing neighbor parts in views.................................................................................................... 236
Shortening and lengthening parts .................................................................................................. 236
Shortening a part in the model ................................................................................................ 237
Lengthening a part in the model .............................................................................................. 237
Shortening parts in drawing views ........................................................................................... 237
Lengthening shortened parts in drawing views ....................................................................... 239
Unfolding polybeams...................................................................................................................... 239

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 11
Undeforming deformed parts.......................................................................................................... 240
Showing part openings and recesses ............................................................................................ 241
Additional ways for showing symbols in openings and recesses ............................................ 242
Combining section views................................................................................................................ 243
Setting section view depth.............................................................................................................. 244
Setting section and end view direction ........................................................................................... 244
Showing section and end view direction marks ....................................................................... 245
Adding view labels for main and section views .............................................................................. 246
Modifying view label marks ...................................................................................................... 246
Displaying main view names automatically ............................................................................. 247
Modifying section marks................................................................................................................. 247
Setting the section mark cutting line............................................................................................... 248
6.6 Placement settings.............................................................................................................................. 249
Protected areas .............................................................................................................................. 249
Protecting areas in drawings .......................................................................................................... 251
Defining placement settings for annotation objects........................................................................ 251
Defining placement settings for dimensions................................................................................... 252
Defining free or fixed placement of views....................................................................................... 253
6.7 Automatic dimensions......................................................................................................................... 253
Adding automatic dimensions ........................................................................................................ 253
Adding automatic dual dimensions................................................................................................. 254
Setting dimension appearance....................................................................................................... 255
Setting dimension text, line and arrow appearance ................................................................. 255
Selecting the dimension type ................................................................................................... 255
Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions .................................................................. 256
Selecting the dimension format, precision and units ............................................................... 256
Grouping large dimension values ............................................................................................ 257
Setting the dimension extension line length ............................................................................ 257
Creating exaggerated dimensions ........................................................................................... 259
Showing plate side marks automatically .................................................................................. 260
Changing the prefix in radial dimensions ................................................................................. 261
Example: Sloped dimension texts ............................................................................................ 261
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings................................................................................ 262
Object groups in dimensioning ................................................................................................ 262
Dimensioning object groups on different dimension lines ........................................................ 262
Example: Grid and overall dimensions .................................................................................... 263
Example: Using maximum leader line length options .............................................................. 264
Example: Dimensioning parts partly outside the view ............................................................. 265
Example: Limiting the number of outside dimensions ............................................................. 266
Example: Part dimension positioning ....................................................................................... 267
Example: Dimensions in anchor bolt plans .............................................................................. 275
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.......................................................... 278

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts ............................................. 279
Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line ........................................................... 279
Modifying dimensions for unfolded parts ................................................................................. 280
Creating elevation dimensions ................................................................................................ 281
Dimensioning plates ................................................................................................................ 282
Dimensioning profiles .............................................................................................................. 284
Check dimensions ................................................................................................................... 285
Creating check dimensions ..................................................................................................... 285
Example: Part dimensioning .................................................................................................... 287
Example: Bolt dimensioning .................................................................................................... 290
Example: Position dimensioning ............................................................................................. 290
Example: Closing dimension ................................................................................................... 295
Example: Combining dimensions ............................................................................................ 296
Example: Combining bolt group dimensions ........................................................................... 299
Example: Forward offset ......................................................................................................... 300
Example: Recognizable distance ........................................................................................... 300
Example: Preferred dimension side ........................................................................................ 301
Example: Reinforcement dimension ........................................................................................ 302
6.8 Automatic marks ................................................................................................................................. 302
Adding automatic marks................................................................................................................. 303
Adding symbols in marks ........................................................................................................ 304
Adding templates in marks ...................................................................................................... 304
Adding user-defined attributes and template attributes in marks ............................................ 307
Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options .................................... 308
Adding pull-out pictures in reinforcement marks ..................................................................... 310
Setting mark appearance ............................................................................................................... 311
Setting the visibility of marks ................................................................................................... 311
Setting the appearance of mark text, frames and leader line ................................................. 312
Showing mark frames and leader lines for hidden parts ......................................................... 314
Mark location ........................................................................................................................... 315
Unit settings for mark elements ............................................................................................... 318
Merging marks automatically ......................................................................................................... 319
Merged part marks .................................................................................................................. 319
Merged reinforcement marks ................................................................................................... 321
6.9 Grids in drawings ................................................................................................................................ 323
Defining grid settings...................................................................................................................... 324
6.10 Parts and neighbor parts .................................................................................................................... 325
Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance .............................................................. 325
Part orientation............................................................................................................................... 326
Using part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement drawings ............................. 326
Displaying compass direction ................................................................................................. 327
Displaying orientation marks (north marks) ............................................................................. 328

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 13
Displaying connecting side marks ........................................................................................... 329
Example: Part representations ....................................................................................................... 330
6.11 Bolts .................................................................................................................................................... 332
Setting bolt contents and appearance............................................................................................ 332
Creating user-defined bolt symbols................................................................................................ 333
Example: Bolts ............................................................................................................................... 333
6.12 Surface treatments.............................................................................................................................. 335
Setting surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance ....................................................... 335
6.13 Reinforcement and meshes ................................................................................................................ 336
Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance........................................................... 336
Example: Hiding reinforcing bar lines............................................................................................. 336
Example: Reinforcement representation options ........................................................................... 337
6.14 Hatch patterns..................................................................................................................................... 338
Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes................................................................................... 338
Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment .................................................................................. 340
Example: Insulation hatch patterns ................................................................................................ 341
6.15 Reference models............................................................................................................................... 342
Setting the visibility and appearance of reference models ............................................................. 342
Setting the visibility and line type of hidden lines using advanced options ................................... 342
6.16 User-defined attributes in drawings..................................................................................................... 344
Adding user-defined attributes ....................................................................................................... 344
6.17 Defining a firm folder for images and symbols .................................................................................... 345
6.18 Defining customized line types............................................................................................................ 345
6.19 Settings affecting the recreation of drawings ...................................................................................... 347
Preventing automatic drawing updates and recreation .................................................................. 348
6.20 Managing Master Drawing Catalog..................................................................................................... 348
Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog ..................................................................... 348
Adding saved settings .............................................................................................................. 348
Adding a rule set ...................................................................................................................... 349
Adding a cloning template ....................................................................................................... 350
Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog ...................................................... 350
Modifying master drawing properties ............................................................................................. 351
Modifying properties of saved settings .................................................................................... 351
Modifying rule set properties .................................................................................................... 351
Modifying properties and contents of wizard files .................................................................... 352
Wizard file contents ................................................................................................................. 352
Modifying cloning template properties ..................................................................................... 353
Managing folders............................................................................................................................ 354
Adding, renaming, and moving folders ................................................................................... 354
Copying master drawings to another folder ............................................................................. 354

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Removing master drawings from a folder ................................................................................ 355

7 Drawing settings.................................................................................... 357

7.1 View properties in drawings................................................................................................................ 357
7.2 Section view properties....................................................................................................................... 360
7.3 Dimension and dimensioning properties............................................................................................. 361
General dimension properties ........................................................................................................ 361
Dimension format, precision and unit properties............................................................................ 363
Dimension appearance properties ................................................................................................. 364
Advanced dimension properties..................................................................................................... 365
Dimension mark and dimension tag properties.............................................................................. 365
General dimensioning properties ................................................................................................... 366
Position dimensioning properties ................................................................................................... 368
Part dimensioning properties ......................................................................................................... 370
Bolt dimensioning properties.......................................................................................................... 371
Dimension grouping properties ...................................................................................................... 372
Sub-assembly dimensioning properties ......................................................................................... 373
Reinforcement dimensioning properties......................................................................................... 373
Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings)............................................................... 374
Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings) ................................................................................. 374
7.4 Mark properties................................................................................................................................... 376
Mark appearance properties .......................................................................................................... 376
Leader line types............................................................................................................................ 378
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks ....................................................... 378
Reinforcement mark merging properties........................................................................................ 379
Weld mark properties ..................................................................................................................... 380
Level mark properties..................................................................................................................... 381
7.5 Mark elements .................................................................................................................................... 382
Common elements in marks .......................................................................................................... 382
Part mark elements ........................................................................................................................ 383
Bolt mark elements ........................................................................................................................ 384
Reinforcement mark elements ....................................................................................................... 385
Reinforcement mesh mark elements ............................................................................................. 386
Elements in merged reinforcement marks ..................................................................................... 386
Connection mark elements ............................................................................................................ 387
Surface treatment mark elements .................................................................................................. 388
Section and detail mark elements .................................................................................................. 388
View, section view and detail view label mark elements................................................................ 389
7.6 Part and neighbor part properties ....................................................................................................... 389
Part and neighbor part content properties...................................................................................... 389
Part and neighbor part fill properties .............................................................................................. 391
Part and shape hatch pattern properties........................................................................................ 391

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 15
7.7 Bolt properties..................................................................................................................................... 393
Bolt content properties ................................................................................................................... 393
7.8 Surface treatment visibility and content properties ............................................................................. 394
Surface treatment hatch pattern properties.................................................................................... 395
7.9 Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties.................................................................. 396
7.10 Reinforcement settings for drawings................................................................................................... 398
7.11 Placement properties for annotation objects....................................................................................... 403
7.12 Building object appearance properties................................................................................................ 403
7.13 Model weld visibility options................................................................................................................ 404
7.14 Properties of additional drawing objects ............................................................................................. 405
7.15 DWG/DXF scaling options .................................................................................................................. 406
7.16 Grid properties .................................................................................................................................... 407
7.17 Orientation settings ............................................................................................................................. 407

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
1 Introduction to drawings

This section provides an overview of Tekla Structures drawing functionalities, and introduces
the main features. It also explains the various levels of editing drawings.
This section also explains the basic idea of integrating drawings to the model, and what it
means when we say that the drawings are associative and always up-to-date.
Furthermore, this section briefly introduces how the drawings may look like through some
examples of the contents.

Contents Main features in drawings (p. 17)

Screen layout (p. 18)
Drawing contents (p. 19)
Basic principles of drawings (p. 21)

1.1 Main features in drawings

Tekla Structures includes the following features for drawings:
• All information comes directly from the model, which minimizes the work you have to do.
In many cases all you need to do is to check the predefined settings or do some minor
editing.
• Up-to-date drawings. The drawings are actually part of the model. If you revise the model,
Tekla Structures also updates the drawings, so they are always up to date.
• Master Drawing Catalog, which is a fast, efficient and controlled way of creating
drawings in one centralized location using master drawings.
• Automatic workshop single-part and assembly drawings, and cast unit drawings of
selected parts with predefined settings for layout, views, dimensions, marks, and building
objects.
• Automatic general arrangement drawings and anchor bolt plans of selected views.
• Drawing cloning capabilities.
• Revision control for drawings.
• Interactive editing tools that you can use for adding dimensions, various shapes, texts,
additional annotations, symbols, and links in the drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 17
Introduction to drawings
• Standard and customized drawing layouts. Tekla Structures contains many ready-to-use
standard drawing layouts. You can also create your own.
• Export capabilities.

1.2 Screen layout

When you open a drawing, Tekla Structures activates the drawing mode. The menus and icons
for the modeling mode are replaced by those of the drawing mode. The model views remain on
the screen behind the drawing. The following illustration identifies the various areas of the
drawing window:

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Introduction to drawings
Menus contain all commands available in the drawing mode.

Basic tools for working with drawings.

Commands for creating dimensions and objects.

Select switches determine the selectable objects.

Snap settings control which points you can snap to and pick.

1.3 Drawing contents

The drawing is made up of three main types of elements: drawing layout, drawing views, and
drawing objects. In the following we will introduce these elements. You can select what to
include in the drawing before you create it, and also add objects in an existing drawing.

Drawing layout and views

A Tekla Structures drawing consists of two types of basic elements:
• The layout defines the drawing size and the included tables, such as revision tables, title
blocks, material lists, bills of material, general notes, key plans and DWG files. Tekla
Structures has a range of predefined layouts, and you can also create layouts of your own.
• Drawing views are views to the whole model, to a part of the model or to individual parts
in the model. Views can show building objects from different directions (top, front, back,
bottom). Drawing views act as containers for the building objects or areas in the model that
you have selected to be included in the drawing.
Below is an example of the drawing layout and views.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 19
Introduction to drawings
Top view to a part

Front view to a part

Material list

Drawing title block

Marks, associative notes

Building objects

1.4 Basic principles of drawings

There are a couple of basic principles in Tekla Structures that you need to understand before
you start creating or modifying drawings:
• The model is the single source of information for drawings. The drawing is just another
view to the model, usually a 2D view. This ensures that the information in drawings and
reports is always up-to-date.
• Tekla Structures integrates the drawings with the model.
• Drawing objects are associated with model objects, and updated when the model changes.
• Changing some of the properties requires the recreation of the drawings.
• You can modify drawing properties on three levels; drawing, view and object level,
depending on the desired result.

How drawings are updated

When a model changes, the related drawings need to be updated. Tekla Structures takes care of
updating and notifies you if updating is needed.

When you start using a newer version of Tekla Structures, updating

drawings created with the older version may cause problems. We
recommend that you complete any drawings you have started using the
older version, or recreate the drawings using your new version of Tekla
Structures.

Updating is necessary, when:

• The geometry of a model object changes.
• Some other model object properties, for example, material and class change.
• Model objects are added or deleted.
• The number of identical model objects changes.
Tekla Structures automatically updates drawings each time you number the model. If you have
not numbered the model, you are prompted to do so when you create a drawing. Furthermore, if
you have changed the model and go to the Drawing List to open drawings, Tekla Structures has
marked the outdated drawings, and you need to update them before you can open them.
General arrangement drawings are always updated when you open them if the model has
changed. You do not need to number general arrangement drawings.

Three levels of modifying drawings

In Tekla Structures, you can modify drawings on three levels, depending on how permanent
and extensive modifications are needed.
• On the highest level, you can change the drawing properties on the drawing level. This
way you can change the properties of all building objects, marks, dimensions, and views in
the drawing. For example, you can define that all parts are displayed in blue color in a
drawing. When you save the drawing property settings in drawing property files, you can
use the same settings later for other drawings of the same type. You can modify the
drawing properties of the selected drawing type in the model before you create the
drawing. You can also change the drawing properties in an existing drawing that you have
opened. Settings propagate to all views and objects in that drawing, except new views that
you create after the drawing is created.
• The second level is to modify the properties on the view level. The modifications apply
only to the view that you have selected in an open drawing. Settings propagate to all
objects in that one view.
• The third and lowest level is to modify the properties on the object level, where you
change the properties of the selected objects in an open drawing. Settings are for that one
object only; however, you can select and modify many objects at a time. The properties
modified on the object level are no longer affected by property changes on view or
drawing level.
• By saving the object property settings and combining them with drawing or view filters
and drawing object types into detailed object level settings, you can also apply the object
properties on the drawing and view level. When doing so, the object level settings override
the property settings made in the drawing property dialog boxes on the view and drawing
level. Object level settings applied on the drawing level are inherited to the view level
settings if there are no object level settings defined on the view level. If you apply object
level settings on the view level, they override the drawing level settings.
• The recommended way of working is to work from the top down, from drawing level to
object level. Once you change properties on the view level you should not go to the
drawing level properties and modify drawing properties there, otherwise you
modifications on the view level will be lost. The modifications made on the drawing level
also remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model change, for example.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Introduction to drawings
See also Basic principles of drawings (p. 21)
Modifying drawing properties on drawing level (p. 206)
Modifying drawing properties on view level (p. 207)
Modifying and saving properties on object level (p. 208)
Creating object level settings (p. 209)
Applying object level settings on drawing level (p. 209)
Applying object level settings on view level (p. 212)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 25
Introduction to drawings
26 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Introduction to drawings
2 Creating drawings

This section explains how to create different types of drawings, in different ways.
Once you complete a model, you can start creating drawings to issue.

Contents Drawing types (p. 27)

Before creating drawings (p. 48)
Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)
Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands (p. 65)
Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part (p. 69)
Cloning drawings (p. 53)

2.1 Drawing types

You can create many types of drawings in Tekla Structures according to your needs. This
section introduces the available types.

General arrangement drawings

Create general arrangement (GA) drawings when you need
• Several views in one drawing, including the entire model or a part of it
• Plan drawings (foundation, floor, deck layout, and anchor bolt plans)
• Erection elevation drawings
• Information from model views, including 3D views

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 27
Creating drawings
General arrangement drawings show the model from the most suitable direction. For example,
in plan drawings, you are looking from the top of a building or floor down towards the ground.
In elevation drawings you are looking from one of the sides of the building, like along a grid
line. GA drawings often contain enlarged views of complex areas or details, and other
additional information that helps in the approval process and during the installation phase.

Example: Foundation plan

See below for an example of a foundation plan.

Example: Slab plan

See below for an example of a slab plan.

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Example: Framing plan

See below for an example of a basement level framing plan.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 29
Creating drawings
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Example: Deck plan

See below for an example of a deck plan.

30 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Example: Erection elevation drawing

See below for an example of an elevation erection elevation drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 31
Creating drawings
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Example: 3D isometric drawing

See below for an example of an isometric drawing.

32 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Example: Anchor bolt plan

See below for an example of an anchor bolt plan.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 33
Creating drawings
See also General arrangement drawings (p. 27)

Single-part drawings
Single-part drawings are workshop drawings that show the fabrication information for one part
(usually without welds).
Single-part drawings usually use small sheet sizes, for example, A4 or imperial standard size
8.5" x 11.5".

Example: Anchor bolt

See below for an example of a single-part drawing presenting an anchor bolt.

34 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
See also Single-part drawings (p. 34)

Example: Embed
See below for an example of a single-part drawing presenting an embed.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 35
Creating drawings
See also Single-part drawings (p. 34)

Example: Plate
See below for examples of single-part drawings presenting plates.

36 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 37
Creating drawings
38 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
See also Single-part drawings (p. 34)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 39
Creating drawings
Assembly drawings
Assembly drawings are typically workshop drawings showing fabrication information for one
assembly. In most cases, an assembly consists of a main part and secondary parts. The
secondary parts are either welded or bolted to a main part.
Assembly drawings usually use larger sheet sizes than single-part drawings, for example, A3 or
imperial standard size 11" x 17".

Example: Nested assembly

You can also create assembly drawings of nested assemblies, see below.

42 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
Assembly drawing of a nested assembly representing a whole truss

Assembly drawing of a sub-assembly, a part of the same truss

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 43
Creating drawings
Assembly drawing of a nested assembly

Assembly drawing of one of the sub-assemblies in the nested assembly

Cast unit drawings

Cast unit drawings are dimensional, formwork, or reinforcement drawings used in concrete
design and construction. They show cast-in embeds, edge chamfers, and hard and soft
insulation.
You can only create cast unit drawings of concrete parts and cast-in embeds (steel parts or
assemblies added to a cast unit). Cast unit drawings also show the bolts and welds in steel parts.
Edge chamfers can also be shown. The volume and weight information of the cast unit remains
accurate even if there are cuts inside the cast unit.
Cast units have the cast unit type part property - they are set either Cast in place or Precast. It
is important to use the correct cast unit type, because some functionalities, for example
numbering, are based on the cast unit type. In the Reinforced Concrete Detailing configuration,
you can create cast unit drawings of cast-in-place cast units only.
Cast unit drawings that show cast-in-place concrete structures usually use large sheet sizes, for
example, A1 or imperial standard size 24" x 36". Drawings that show precast structures usually
use smaller sheet sizes, for example, A3 or imperial standard size 11" x 17".

2.2 Before creating drawings

The list below contains some things that you may need to do before you create or clone
drawings in Tekla Structures:
• The model needs to be numbered. If the model changes, the numbering needs to be
updated. This applies to assembly, single-part, cast unit and multidrawings only; general
arrangement drawings do not need to be numbered. Numbering ensures that Tekla
Structures connects the right objects to the right drawings. If you try to create drawings
without numbering the model, Tekla Structures prompts you to do so. You can also number
general arrangement drawings, because then parts and marks will have numbers instead of
question marks.
• Check that the piece is detailed correctly.
• You may want to create test drawings of different types of parts to see how well the
predefined drawing properties, layouts, rule sets (wizards) or cloning templates suit your
needs.
• You may want to modify drawing properties, layouts, or rule sets and save the modified
settings for future usage. If you are going to use a drawing as a cloning template, check
that it contains all the necessary elements for this purpose.

In the Master Drawing Catalog, the only way to create multidrawings is

to use the wizard files.

Searching for master drawings

In the Master Drawing Catalog search view, you can search for master drawings on the basis
of the text that has been entered in the name, description and keyword boxes in the Master
Drawing Properties dialog box and save your search results. In the folder view, you can copy
master drawings from a search results folder to another folder to make it easier for you to locate
the master drawings you need.

52 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it a
lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.

To search for master drawings and save the search results:

1. Enter the search criteria in the box next to the Search button.
Tekla Structures remembers search strings. When you start typing a string, it suggests
previous strings starting with the same characters.
2. Click Search. The results are listed.
3. To save the search results, click Store, type a name for the search, and click OK.
The search results are added in the category list in the search view.
The search results are also displayed as a folder in the folder view. There you can
rename the saved search results, and copy the found drawings to the folders of your
choice.

2.4 Cloning drawings

You should consider cloning drawings when:
• There are several similar parts, assemblies, or cast units in the model.
• You want to ease editing work when there are several similar parts that have different
position numbers. You may have separate drawings of these similar parts.
• The drawings need a lot of manual editing
If cloning does not produce a satisfactory result, you need to modify the cloned drawing
manually. For example, you can create a drawing for one truss, modify the drawing, and then
clone it for similar trusses. Sometimes you need to modify the cloned drawings where the
trusses differ.
The cloned drawing may contain more or less parts than the original drawing. Part properties,
marks, associative notes and related text objects are cloned from a similar part in the original
drawing.
You can clone drawings using the cloning templates in the Master Drawing Catalog, using a
drawing in the Drawing List, and using the cloning templates in the template library.

Selecting Create in the Dimensions and Other marks box is useful if

cloning the dimensions or other marks does not produce satisfactory
results. Using this option does not create any new views.

4. On the same tab, select which object types you want to clone.
5. If you want to create a drawing only for certain parts, select the parts from the model.
You can also use an appropriate selection filter and select the whole model. Activate
only the Select parts selection switch when you select objects, otherwise the selection
may take a long time.
6. Click Create drawings (Alt + C) or Create drawings for all parts (Alt + A).
7. Number the model if prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. In the
Drawing List, cloned drawings are marked with text Cloned in the Changes column.
Check the cloned drawing and modify it, if necessary.

Limitations • You cannot clone general arrangement drawings through the Master Drawing Catalog.
You can clone general arrangement drawings only by using the Clone command in the
Drawing List dialog box.
• You cannot clone multidrawings.
• The drawing properties of cloning templates cannot be modified through the Master
Drawing Catalog.

Using cloning templates from other models

You can show cloning templates in other models in the Master Drawing Catalog and create
drawings using them.
To use cloning templates from other models:

1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, click to open the Models Containing Master
Drawings dialog box.
2. To use cloning templates in other models, click Add model and browse to the desired
model.

54 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
3. Click OK.

Limitations You can use only cloning template type of master drawings from other models, not other types
of master drawings.

Cloning from the Drawing List

In addition to cloning drawings using cloning templates, you can clone single-part, cast unit,
assembly and general arrangement drawings from the Drawing List.

• When you clone drawings of assemblies or cast units, they must

have the same type of main part as the assembly or cast unit from
which the original drawing was created. For example, the upper
chords of the original and the cloned truss could be main parts.
• Section and detail views are not cloned in general arrangement
drawings, and only one view is cloned.

Before cloning, finalize, save, and close the drawing you want to use as a cloning template.
To clone a drawing from the Drawing List:
1. In the model, select what to include in the drawing:
• If you are cloning a single-part drawings, cast unit drawing or assembly drawing,
select parts, assemblies or cast units.
• If you are cloning a general arrangement drawing, select a model view.
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List.
3. In the Drawing List, select the drawing that you want to use as a cloning template.
4. Click Clone.
5. In the Clone Drawing dialog box, select the drawing object types you want to clone into
the new drawing, and the actions for each object type.
• For Dimensions and Other marks (all marks for model objects), select whether you
want to Clone them, recreate them automatically when you clone a drawing (Create)
or Ignore them in cloning.
Selecting Create in the Dimensions and Other marks box is useful if cloning the
dimensions or other marks does not produce satisfactory results. Using this option
does not create any new views.
• For other objects, select to Clone or Ignore them.
6. Click Clone selected.
Tekla Structures clones the drawing. In the Drawing List, cloned drawings are marked with text
Cloned in the Changes column.

Example: Cloning a general arrangement drawing

In this example, we first created a general arrangement drawing of the first floor of a building,
then edited the drawing and the cloned the general arrangement drawing of the second floor.
The first floor and second floor have some differences:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 55
Creating drawings
We edited the general arrangement drawing of the first floor slightly.

We selected the model view that represents the second floor and then cloned the drawing using
the general arrangement drawing of the first floor as a template.

56 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
In the cloned drawing:
• The drawing view plane has been moved to match the model view PLAN 2nd Floor plane.
• If there are parts in matching places, the marks have been cloned to the new location and
the content has been updated.
• Dimensions are cloned.
• All model object marks and notes are cloned.

View-specific dimension cloning

The dimension cloning options in the Clone Drawing dialog box affect all views, whereas with
Dimension creation method in this view in the View Properties dialog box you can set the
dimension creation method for the selected view only. With this feature you can create
automatic dimensions in the front view and clone the dimensions in section and end view, for
example.
To clone dimensions in the selected view:
1. Double-click the drawing view frame to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Select Dimension creation method in this view > Clone on the Attributes 2 tab.
3. Click Modify.
4. Save and close the drawing.
5. Open the Drawing List, select the drawing and click Clone.
6. In the Clone Drawing dialog box, select the objects to be cloned and the dimension
cloning option (Ignore, Clone, Create).
• If you select Dimension > Ignore, the dimensions will be cloned only for those
views that have Dimension creation method in this view set to Clone.
• If you select Dimension > Clone, the dimensions will be cloned for all views.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 57
Creating drawings
• If you select Dimension > Create, the dimensions will be created for all views
except for those that have Dimension creation method in this view set to Do not
create.
7. Click Clone selected.

Cloning using drawing templates in template library

You can create drawings using drawing templates located in the template library. The template
library is a model folder that contains the drawings to be used as drawing templates. You can
select a drawing in the current model folder or in another model folder.
To clone using a drawing template:
1. Create a drawing you want to use as a drawing template.
2. Save the model.
3. In the model, select the objects to be included in the new drawing.
4. To open the Clone Drawing dialog box, click Clone in the drawing list dialog box.
5. Use the Objects and actions in cloning options to define the drawing objects to be cloned
and the actions for each cloned object.
6. Select the current model or click Other model.
You can use Browse to browse to another model folder containing the drawing templates
that you want.
7. Click Select template.
8. In the Drawing Templates dialog box, select a drawing template indicated by an icon on
the left.

9. Leave the list open and clone the drawing by clicking Clone selected.
Tekla Structures clones the drawing. In the Drawing List, cloned drawings are marked with text
Cloned in the Changes column.

You can specify that a certain model folder is always used as a template
library using the advanced option XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY.

Checking and modifying cloned drawings

Always check the cloned drawing to make sure that the drawing contents meet your needs.

Object Check and modify

Marks • In general, mark contents are correct in cloned drawings, but
sometimes you may need to modify the location of the marks.
• Tekla Structures clones only marks that can be mapped to the
original drawing. No marks are created for new parts that you
have added in a cloned drawing. To create missing marks in a
cloned drawing that has more parts, set the advanced option
XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONIN
G to TRUE through Tools > Options > Advanced Options>
Marking: General.
Views • Ensure that the view sizes and view orientation are correct,
and that the views are placed correctly in the cloned drawing.
The size of the views is updated according to the parts
included in the views.
Dimensions • Depending on the settings in your environment, Tekla
Structures may automatically mark the dimensions for which
it cannot find a reference point on a part with a red dimension
point invalidity symbol. Drawings will open more slowly if
Tekla Structures has to has to check the dimensions every
time you open a drawing. You can prevent the checking of the
dimensions for all drawing types or for just for certain
drawing types. To do this, use the advanced option
XS_DO_NOT_CHECK_DIMENSION_POINTS.
• If the cloned drawing contains less parts than the original
drawing, the dimensions to the missing parts are
automatically removed.
• If the cloned drawing contains more parts than the original
drawing, Tekla Structures dimensions the additional parts
using automatic dimensioning, if you have set the advanced
option XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ADD_DIMENSIONS to
TRUE. Because Tekla Structures uses automatic dimensioning
for creating dimensions for new parts, you may have to check
and correct the created dimensions.
• Add missing dimensions and remove incorrect ones, and
remove the dimension point invalidity symbols. In order to do
this, you may have to adjust the drawing view size so that the
dimension points are inside the view.

Refreshing drawing associativity

Often improvements in cloning and associativity require that the associative rules have to be
recreated. This can be done by using the Refresh Associativity command. When you use this
command, you do not need to recreate the drawing.
This command is very useful if you, for example, have a cloning template you have created
using an older Tekla Structures version and want to utilize the better associativity of a newer
Tekla Structures version.
Refresh Associativity is available in the Customize dialog box, and you may want to add it in
one of the toolbars or in the User menu.
To add the command in the User menu and refresh the associativity:
1. Click Tools > Customize....
2. Enter a part of the command name in the Filter box, for example, refr.
The command is displayed in the list of commands.
3. Open the Menu tab.
4. Double-click the Refresh Associativity command to add it in the User menu.
5. If you have not added the User menu on the menu bar before, restart Tekla Structures to
activate the menu. The menu name is always User.
6. Open a cloning template the associativity of which you want to refresh.
7. Click User > Refresh Associativity.
8. Save the cloning template.

2.5 Creating drawings using saved settings

In Master Drawing Catalog, you can create single-part drawings, assembly drawings, cast unit
drawings and general arrangement drawings using saved settings (drawing property files).

See also Creating single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 61)
Creating general arrangement drawings (p. 60)
Adding saved settings (p. 348)

Creating general arrangement drawings

To create general arrangement drawings using saved settings:
1. In the model, click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings.
2. Select the set of saved settings (drawing property file) from the list.
3. Optional: Modify the drawing properties and, if necessary, apply object-level settings.
To do this, double-click the saved setting and click Edit drawing properties. Remember
to save your changes in the property file.
4. Click Create drawings (Alt + C).

60 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
5. In the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box, select the views that you
want the drawing to be produced from and select the desired option from the Options
list.
You also have a chance to modify the drawing properties at this point by clicking the
Drawing properties button.

By selecting Empty, you can create an empty drawing and add drawing
views in it afterwards.

6. Click Create to create the drawing(s).

Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. Click in the
Master Drawing Catalog toolbar to open the Drawing List.

Creating single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings

To create single-part, assembly or cast unit drawings using saved settings type of master
drawings:
1. In the model, click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings.
2. Select the desired set of saved settings (drawing property file) on the list.
For cast unit drawings, select a file that contains the desired Cast unit creation
method:
• By cast unit position: A drawing will be created from each cast unit. If there are
identical cast units, one of them will serve as the base cast unit for the drawing. This
is the most common method for creating cast unit drawings.
• By cast unit ID: Each part in the model includes a unique ID number. You can
create drawings by using cast unit ID numbers. The ID number determines the
marking of the drawing. You can create several drawings from identicat cast units.
3. Optional: Modify the drawing properties and, if necessary, apply object-level settings.

To do this, double-click the saved setting and click Edit drawing

properties. Remember to save your changes in the property file.

4. If you are creating a drawing only for selected objects, select the objects.
You can also use an appropriate selection filter and select the whole model. Activate
only the Select parts selection switch when you select objects, otherwise the selection
may take a long time.
5. Click Create drawings (Alt + C) or Create drawings for all parts (Alt + A).
6. Number the model if you are prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. Click the button in
the Master Drawing Catalog toolbar to open the Drawing List.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 61
Creating drawings
If you already have a drawing with the same type and mark, Tekla
Structures will not create a new one.

2.6 Creating drawings using rule sets or wizards

In the Master Drawing Catalog, you can create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings
using rule sets, and multidrawings using wizards. You can use the file-based wizards, use the
existing rule sets or create your own.
To create drawings using a rule set or wizard:
1. In the model, click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings.
2. Select a rule set or a wizard file from the list.
3. Optional: Double-click the rule set or wizard to modify rule set properties or wizard file
contents.
4. Optional: Edit the drawing properties of the master drawing connected to the rule set.
a Double-click the rule set, select the master drawing from the list and click
Properties > Edit drawing properties.
b Apply object level settings, if necessary.
c Save your changes.
5. Select the whole model or desired parts.
6. Do one of the following:
• If you selected parts, click. Create drawings (Alt + C).
• If you selected the whole model, click Create drawings for all parts (Alt + A).
7. Number the model if prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. Click the button in
the Master Drawing Catalog toolbar to open the Drawing List.

If you already have a drawing with the same type and mark, Tekla
Structures will not create a new one.

Limitations • In the Master Drawing Catalog, you can create multidrawings only by using the wizards.
You cannot create rule sets for multidrawings.
• You cannot create general arrangement drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using
rule sets or wizards.

Objects included in the anchor bolt plan

Tekla Structures selects the objects that are included in the anchor bolt plan based on the
following default rules:
• The part is a column or an almost vertical beam.
• The part is the main part of an assembly.
• A base plate is included in the assembly, and it is located lower than the main part. If there
is more than one part in the column assembly that fulfills the rules, the lowest part of them
is considered to be the base plate.
• Bolts are attached to the base plate.
• The assembly is cut by the view plane.
• The boundary box of the base plate in the xy-direction intersects the boundary box of the
column.

Defining the included parts using drawing filters

You can use general arrangement drawing filters and advanced options to define the parts to be
included in the anchor bolt plan.
To define the included parts using general arrangement drawing filters:
1. Create the necessary general arrangement drawing filters in the Filter Properties
subdialog box of the general arrangement drawing properties dialog box.
2. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
3. Enter the following values for the following advanced options:
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER: <the name of the drawing
filter for columns>
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER: <the name of the drawing filter
for bolts>
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER: <the name of the drawing
filter for base plates>
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER: <the name of the
drawing filter for additional parts>
If you do not use these advanced options, the default rules are used to determine columns,
baseplates, and anchor bolts to be included in the anchor bolt plan.

64 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
Using these advanced options only affect the creation of new anchor bolt
plan drawings, and do not affect already created ones.

Including assemblies in anchor bolt plans

You can specify how far an assembly can be from the view plane to be included in the anchor
bolt plan.
To specify the distance:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
2. Set a value for the advanced option XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE.
Define the distance in millimeters. The default value is 200 mm.

2.8 Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up

commands
In addition to creating drawings in Master Drawing Catalog, you can create all drawing types
using menu, toolbar or pop-up menu commands.

To automatically open any drawing after the drawing has been created,
hold down Ctrl + Shift while you create the drawing.

8. If you want to open the created drawing, select Open drawing.

9. Click Create.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List.

See also Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands (p. 65)
Drawing properties (p. 206)
General arrangement drawings (p. 27)
Creating general arrangement drawings (p. 60)
Creating a view

Creating single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings

To create single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up menu
commands:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings, and select a drawing type.
2. Use the drawing properties dialog box to select the appropriate predefined drawing
properties (saved settings), and then click Load.
Ensure that for cast unit drawings, you use a property file that contains the desired Cast
unit creation method:
• By cast unit position: A drawing will be created from each cast unit. If there are
identical cast units, one of them will serve as the base cast unit for the drawing. This
is the most common method for creating cast unit drawings.
• By cast unit ID: Each part in the model includes a unique ID number. You can
create drawings by using cast unit ID numbers. The ID number determines the
marking of the drawing. You can create several drawings from identicat cast units.
3. Optional: Modify the drawing properties and, if needed, apply object-level settings.
4. Click Apply or OK.

66 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
5. Select the objects, or use an appropriate selection filter to select the objects you want to
create drawings from and select the entire model.

Activate only Select parts on the Select switches toolbar when

selecting parts. Otherwise selection could take a long time in large
models.

6. Do one of the following:

• Click the desired drawing command on the Drawings & Reports menu.
• Click the corresponding toolbar command.
• If you selected individual objects, right-click and select the appropriate drawing
creation command from the pop-up menu.
If you press down Ctrl + Shift while you select the command from the pop-up menu,
Tekla Structures opens the created drawing.
7. Number the model if you are prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings. The created drawings are listed in the Drawing List.

If you already have a drawing with the same type and mark, Tekla
Structures will not create a new one.

See also Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands (p. 65)
Drawing properties (p. 206)
XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES

Creating multidrawings
You can create multidrawings of selected parts and of selected drawings. You can also create
empty multidrawings and link views in them from other drawings,
If you create multidrawings from existing drawings, you can choose to include their individual
drawing layouts. If you want to have separate lists, tables, and call-offs for each part or
assembly, you should include the individual drawing layouts. You can also include lists and
tables for all parts or assemblies in the multidrawing.
Before you start, you can set XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP to TRUE
through Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties to remove extra space
between drawing view labels and drawing views.

Creating empty multidrawings and linking or copying views

You can create empty multidrawings in which you can link or copy views in other drawings
with or without layout.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 67
Creating drawings
To create an empty multidrawing and link views:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Multidrawing > Empty Drawing.
2. Open the empty multidrawing from the Drawing List.
3. From the Drawing List, select the drawings that you want to link to the multidrawing.
4. Click Views > Add Views from Other Drawing and select one of the copying or linking
commands.
The views are placed in the multidrawing.
5. Arrange the views if they are on top of each other.

Creating multidrawings of selected drawings

You can create multidrawings of the drawings you select. You can also keep the layout of the
selected drawing in the new multidrawing.
To create a multidrawing of selected drawings:

To Do this
Create multidrawings of the 1. Select the drawings from the Drawing List.
selected drawings 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Multidrawing >
Selected Drawings.
Create multidrawings of the 1. Select the drawings from the Drawing List.
selected drawings, keeping the 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Multidrawing >
layout of each selected drawing Selected Drawings with Layout.

Creating multidrawings of selected parts

Create single-part and assembly drawings of the parts that you select and place the drawings in
a multidrawing. You can also keep the layout of the selected single-part or assembly drawings.
To create a multidrawing of selected parts:

To Do this
Create single-part drawings of the 1. Select the parts. Use appropriate selection filters.
selected parts and place the 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
drawings in a multidrawing Multidrawing > New Single-Part Drawings of
Selected Parts.
Create single-part drawings of the 1. Select the parts. Use appropriate selection filters.
selected part, keep the layout of 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
each drawing, and place the Multidrawing > New Single-Part Drawings of
drawings in a multidrawing Selected Parts with Layout.
Create assembly drawings of the 1. Select the parts. Use appropriate selection filters.
selected parts and place the 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
drawings in a multidrawing Multidrawing > New Assembly Drawings of
Selected Parts.
Create assembly drawings of the 1. Select the parts. Use appropriate selection filters.
selected parts, keep the layout of 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
each drawing, and place the Multidrawing > New Assembly Drawings of
drawings in a multidrawing. Selected Parts with Layout.

Creating multiple drawing sheets using wizards

Before you start, ensure that you have created drawing property files (saved settings) for
creating multiple sheets for the same part, each file containing the desired settings for a specific
purpose and individual sheet numbers.
To create several drawing sheets of the same part using drawing wizards in the Master
Drawing Catalog:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings to open the Create Drawings - Master
Drawing Catalog dialog box.
2. Double-click the desired wizard file in the list to open the Master Drawing Properties
dialog box.
3. Click Edit drawing properties to open the wizard file.
4. In the file, give the names of the drawing properties files that you want to use to create
the multiple drawing sheets.
Give the file names in parenthesis on the set_drawing_attributes row as shown
below:
set_drawing_type(cast_unit)
set_drawing_attributes(sheet1, sheet2, sheet3)
set_filter(column_filter)
create_drawings()
5. Save the wizard file with a new name.
6. In the model, select the parts you want to create the drawings from.
7. Click the newly created wizard file in the Master Drawing Catalog and click Create
Drawings. Tekla Structures creates the drawings.

See also Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part (p. 69)
Wizards (p. 52)
Wizard file contents (p. 352)

Creating multiple drawing sheets using drawing properties

To create multiple drawing sheets through the drawing properties dialog box:
1. Open the drawing properties dialog box.
2. Adjust the drawing properties and change the name so that it refers to the type of drawing
you want to create, for example, FRAME 3D.
Do not touch the Sheet number.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 69
Creating drawings
3. Click Apply to keep the changes and leave the dialog box open.
4. Create a drawing of the object by selecting the appropriate command from the Drawings &
Reports menu.
5. In the drawing properties dialog box, adjust the drawing properties again and change the
name to match the type of the new drawing, for example, FRAME FRONT.
6. Change the sheet number in the Sheet number box to get another drawing of the same
assembly with a different sheet number.
7. Click Apply and create a new drawing of the same object.
8. Continue making all the sheets you need in the same way as above.

Example An example how the Drawing List shows the multiple drawings:

See also Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part (p. 69)

70 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Creating drawings
3 Finding and opening
drawings

All drawings in a Tekla Structures model are displayed in the Drawing List dialog box. You can
search, sort, select, and display drawings according to different criteria, and open the drawings
displayed in the list. You can also use the Drawing List to locate the drawing parts in the
model, and to find out if a part is included in any of the drawings.

3.1 Opening the Drawing List

To open the Drawing List dialog box, do one of the following:

• Click the Open Drawing List icon

• In the model, select Drawings & Reports > Drawing List...
• In an open drawing, select Drawing File > Open....

• Shortcut for opening the Drawing List in the model: Ctrl + L

• Shortcut for opening the Drawing List when a drawing is open: Ctrl
+O

3.2 What is displayed in the Drawing List

The Drawing List contains the following columns.

Column Description
Issue, Lock, Freeze, Master, These columns contain flags that are graphical symbols
and Up to date indicating the drawing status.
Changes Textual information about the changes in the drawing.
Created The creation date of the drawing.
Modified The latest modification date of the drawing.
Revision The revision number or revision mark of the drawing.
By default, Tekla Structures shows revision numbers. To
show revision marks instead, set the variable
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST to TRUE.
Size The paper size the drawing uses.

72 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Finding and opening drawings
Column Description
Type The drawing types are identified by the following letters:
• W for single-part drawings.
• A for assembly drawings.
• C for cast unit drawings.
• G for general arrangement drawings.
• M for multidrawings.
U (unknown) means that an error has occurred, and you
need to delete the drawing.
Mark In a single-part drawing mark is the part position, and in an
assembly drawing the assembly position from which the
drawing was created. You cannot change drawing marks.
Mark contains the sheet number as well, if it is not zero (0).
You can choose to have Tekla Structures base the mark of
cast unit drawings on the position number or the ID of the
cast unit.
Name The name given for the drawing in the drawing properties
dialog box.
Title 1, Title 2, and Title 3 Extra drawing titles added in the drawing properties dialog
box.
User-defined attributes You can show up to 20 user-defined attributes in the
Drawing List. These user-defined attributes must be added
in the User-defined Attributes subdialog box in drawing
properties. To include a user-defined attribute in drawing
lists, the user-defined attribute must have the option
special_flag set to yes in the objects.inp file.

3.3 Drawing status flags

Tekla Structures uses certain symbols called flags, to indicate the status of the drawings. The
columns Issue, Lock, Freeze, Master and Up to date contain the flags, and the potential
additional information is displayed in the Changes column. If a drawing does not have any
flag symbol, it is up to date.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 73
Finding and opening drawings
See also Working with drawings (p. 183)
How to read the drawing status information (p. 74)
Finding and opening drawings (p. 71)

How to read the drawing status information

The table below explains the meaning of the status flags and information about the status of a
drawing in the Drawing List.

Column Information in
where the Changes
Flag shown column Description
Up to date Parts modified The parts in the drawing have changed, for
example, parts have been added or deleted,
or part properties have changed.
Quantity The actual drawing is up to date, but the
increased or number of identical parts has changed.
Quantity
decreased
Up to date All parts deleted All the parts related to the drawing have
been deleted.
Lock The drawing is locked and you cannot open
it for editing.
Freeze The drawing is frozen. Changes made to
the model objects, which have drawing
objects associated with them, are no longer
available in the drawing.
Master The drawing has been added as a master
drawing in the Master Drawing Catalog.
Up to date Linked drawing You have a linked drawing in this drawing
changed and the linked drawing has been modified.
Up to date Copied view A copied drawing has been modified.
changed
Drawing updated A frozen drawing has been updated.

74 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Finding and opening drawings
Column Information in
where the Changes
Flag shown column Description
Up to date Cloned The drawing is a cloned drawing.
The flag disappears when you save and
close the drawing.
Issue The drawing has been issued. For example,
you might re-issue drawings that have been
sent to site.
Issue Issued drawing The issued drawing has been edited or
changed otherwise changed.

3.4 Modifying Drawing List contents

In addition to using search, you can select which drawings you want to see in the list and in
which order.
To filter the Drawing List contents, do any of the following:

To Do this
Display a predefined set of drawings Select a set of drawings from the select
drawing set list.
Saved search results are also displayed
in this list.
List all drawings Click Show all.
Invert the contents of the current list Click Invert.
This feature allows you to list the
opposite of the current content.
For example, if you had selected to
display Locked drawings, clicking
Invert shows all drawings except the
locked ones.
List selected drawings only Select the drawings and click Selected.
List up-to-date drawings only Click Up to date.
List drawings that need to be updated 1. Click Up to date.
2. Click Invert.
Lists only drawings associated with the 1. Select objects in the model.
objects you have selected in the model. 2. Click By parts.
This is an easy way to identify the
drawings associated with a specific
part, assembly or cast unit.
Sort the list according to Column name Click the column name.

3.6 Selecting drawings in the Drawing List

The Drawing List allows you to select one or several drawings at a time. Selecting several
drawings is useful, for example, if you want to lock or freeze several drawings at a time.
To select drawings in the Drawing List:

To Do this
Select one drawing Click the drawing in the list.
Select several consecutive Click the first drawing, then hold down the
drawings Shift key and click the last drawing.
Select several non-consecutive Click the first drawing, then hold down the Ctrl
drawings key and click the other drawings you want to
select.
Select all drawings in the list Press Ctrl+A.

3.7 Checking whether parts have drawings

You can use the Drawing List to identify parts in the model that have associated drawings.

76 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Finding and opening drawings
Before you start, ensure that you have only the Select parts select
switch active on the Selection toolbar. Otherwise selecting objects can
take a long time in large models.

1. Open a model view where all parts are clearly visible.

2. In the Drawing List, press Ctrl + A to select all drawings.
3. To highlight the parts that have drawings, click Select objects.
4. After completing the previous step you can highlight the parts that do not have
drawings by holding down the Ctrl key and selecting the entire model (hold down the
left mouse button and drag all the way from left to right).

3.8 Opening drawings from the model

You can open drawings from the Drawing List. You can only have one drawing open at a time.
To open a drawing:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List... or the icon on the toolbar.
2. Double-click the drawing to open it.

Shortcut for opening the Drawing List: Ctrl + L.

3.9 Opening a new drawing when a drawing is

already open
You can also open another drawing when you already have a drawing open. If you have made
some changes in the open drawing, Tekla Structures asks you if you want to save the changes
before opening another drawing.
Do one of the following:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 77
Finding and opening drawings
To Do this
Open a drawing using the Drawing
List. 1. Click Drawing File > Open... or the icon
on the toolbar.
2. Double-click the drawing in the list.
Open the next drawing in the Press Ctrl + Page Down.
Drawing List.
Open the previous drawing in the Press Ctrl + Page Up.
Drawing List.

Shortcut for opening the Drawing List when a drawing is open: Ctrl + O.

Contents Renaming drawings (p. 79)

Giving titles to drawings (p. 80)
Drawing views (p. 80)
Building objects (p. 138)
Associative annotation objects (p. 127)
Dimensions (p. 98)
Independent annotation objects (p. 133)
Welds in drawings (p. 147)
Symbols in drawings (p. 154)
Additional drawing objects (p. 157)
Changing drawing objects (p. 158)
Using drawing tools (p. 167)
Grids in drawings (p. 174)
Colors in drawings (p. 175)
User coordinate system (UCS) (p. 180)

4.1 Renaming drawings

Tekla Structures names the drawings according to the name given in the drawing properties.
The drawing name is displayed in the Drawing List and in drawing templates.
To rename a drawing:
1. In the Drawing List, right-click the drawing and select Properties.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 79
Editing drawings
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch at
the bottom of the dialog box.
3. Select the check box next to the Name box.
4. Enter the new name in the Name box.
5. Click Modify.

4.2 Giving titles to drawings

You can define titles for your drawing.Tekla Structures shows the title in the Drawing List and
drawing and report templates. You can define up to three additional titles to use in drawing
templates.
To give a title to a drawing:
1. In the Drawing List, right-click the drawing and select Properties.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch at
the bottom of the dialog box.
Select the check boxes next to the Title boxes you want to use.
3. Enter the titles.
4. Click Modify.

4.3 Drawing views

Drawing views include the selected parts of the Tekla Structures model and objects that you
may manually add in the open drawing. The drawing view is another way of looking at the
model. Drawings may include several views.
You can have different types of views in Tekla Structures drawings:
• Main views: front, top, back and bottom views
• Section views
• End views
• Single-part views
• 3D views
• Detail views
• Key plan views
• Views along grid lines
• Elevation views
• Plan views
In addition to the views Tekla Structures creates automatically in a drawing based on the
drawing properties, you can also add new ones in the open drawing.This section explains how
to add views, change the size and location of the views in drawings, and how to copy and link
between drawings.

80 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Editing drawings
See also Editing drawings (p. 79)
Adding views in drawings (p. 81)
Copying drawing views from another drawing (p. 89)
Linking views from another drawing (p. 92)
Moving views to another drawing (p. 90)
Changing drawing views (p. 92)
Automatic drawing views (p. 225)
View properties in drawings (p. 357)
Section view properties (p. 360)
Key plans (p. 219)

Adding views in drawings

Once you have created drawings, you can still add views to them manually. You can create
drawing views of:
• Entire model
• Selected areas in a model
• Views in the same drawing
• Single parts in an assembly
• Objects in 3D
• Sections in a drawing
• Details in a drawing
• Reinforcement meshes

Creating a detail view

You can create a detail view from a selected area in an existing drawing view in another scaled-
up view. The direction of the detail view is the same as that of the original view.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Annotating > Properties > Detail Mark.
3. Enter a name for the detail, and modify the detail mark, detail boundary and detail view
label properties in the Detail Symbol Properties dialog box.
The shape of the detail boundary you select affects the way you select the area for your
detail.
4. Click OK or Apply.
5. Click View > Create Drawing View > Detail View.
6. Depending on the selected detail boundary shape, do one of the following:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 81
Editing drawings
• If the shape is Circle, pick the center point of the circle and then pick a point on the
circle.
• If the shape is Rectangle, pick corner points for the rectangle.
7. Pick a position for the detail mark.
8. Pick a position for the detail view.
Tekla Structures creates the detail view using the view properties of the original view (the view
where you select the detail) and the properties in the Detail Symbol Properties dialog box.
You can change the properties after creating the view.

Detail boundary is set to Circle

Detail mark

Detail view

Detail view label

Creating a section view

You can create a section views of the parts in a drawing view.
1. Open a drawing. The drawing must contain at least one view.
2. Click Annotating > Properties > Section Mark.
3. Modify the cutting line, section mark, and section view label properties.
4. Click OK or Apply.
5. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Section View.
6. Modify the view properties as required.
7. Click OK or Apply.
8. Pick two points to define the position and the direction of the section.

It is easier to pick the points if you activate orthogonal snapping by

clicking Tools > Ortho or pressing O.

9. Pick two points to indicate the cut box.

10. Select a position for the section view.
A view symbol follows the cursor allowing you to see where you are about to place the
section view.
Tekla Structures creates the section view using the current properties in the View
Properties and Section Symbol Properties dialog boxes and adds a section mark in the
original view. You can change the properties after creating the view.

Change the view scale of the section views, if necessary: Double-click

the view frame, unselect all other selection and select only the Scale
option, and adjust the scale.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 83
Editing drawings
Tekla Structures shows the cut box while you select it
A view symbol follows the mouse pointer while you are placing the
section view
Section mark

Section view and section view label

Creating a curved section view

You can create a curved section view of an existing drawing view. This tool is useful when you
want to visualize an unfolded face of a building or to manage cladding.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Annotating > Properties > Section Mark.
3. Modify the cutting line, section mark, and section view label properties.
4. Click OK or Apply.
5. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Curved Section View.
6. Modify the view properties as required.

84 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Editing drawings
7. Click OK or Apply.
8. Pick three points on the cut plane.
9. Pick two points to indicate the cut box.
10. Pick a point to indicate the location of the curved section view.
A symbol follows the cursor allowing you to see where you are about to place the curved
section view.

Tekla Structures creates the curved section view using the current properties in the View
Properties and Section Symbol Properties dialog boxes and adds a section mark in the
original view. You can change the properties after creating the view.

Creating additional views of parts

You can create additional views of a part within a single-part, cast unit or assembly drawing.
You can select the part plane (front, top, back, bottom) to use or create a 3 D view.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click View > Create Drawing View > Of Parts in Drawing and select one of the
commands Front, Top, Back, Bottom, 3D.
Tekla Structures creates the view using the current properties in the View Properties
dialog box.
Tekla Structures will not create views on planes that already have a view in the drawing.
3. Double-click the view frame to open the View Properties dialog box and modify the
properties as required.

For 3D views, you may want to modify the view angle.

4. Click Modify.

Example In the example below, the drawing originally contained only the front view. A 3D view and a
top view were added. The angle of the 3D view was modified in the View Properties dialog
box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 85
Editing drawings
See also Adding views in drawings (p. 81)
Modifying drawing view properties (p. 96)
View properties in drawings (p. 357)

Creating a view of an entire model view

You can create a drawing view of an entire model view and add it in the drawing.
To create a view of the entire model view:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open a model view list by clicking Views > Model Views > Model View List....
3. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Of Entire Model View.
4. Modify the view properties, for example the view scale, and click OK or Apply
5. Open a model view from the model view list.
6. Click the open model view.
Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the current properties in the View Properties
dialog box. It calculates the boundaries of the view to fit the entire model view into the drawing
view, and places the view in the lower left corner of the drawing.

86 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Editing drawings
Change the view scale in the view properties if the view is too big.

Creating a view of a selected area in a model view

You can create a drawing view of a selected area in the model and add it in the drawing.
To create a drawing view of a selected area in the model and add it in your drawing:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open a model view list by clicking Views > Model Views > Model View List....
3. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in Model.
4. Modify the view properties as required and click OK or Apply.
5. Open a model view from the model view list.
6. Pick two corners in the model to define the x and y dimensions of the drawing view. The
x and y directions use the coordinate system of the model view. The view depth of the
drawing view is the same as the depth of the model view.
Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the current properties in the View Properties
dialog box. Tekla Structures places the view in the lower left corner of the drawing.

Creating a view of a selected area in a drawing view

You can create a new drawing view of an area in an existing drawing view.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 87
Editing drawings
To create a new drawing view of an area in the existing drawing view:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in
Drawing View.
3. Modify the view label color.
Other view properties are inherited from the original drawing view.
4. Click OK or Apply.
5. Select the area in the drawing view of which you want to make a new view.
6. Select a position for the new view.
A symbol representing the view that you are about to place follows the mouse pointer, so
it is easier for you to see where to place the view.

Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the view properties of the original view.

Creating a view for a reinforcement mesh

You can create drawing views each containing one reinforcement mesh by using the macro
RebarMeshViewCreator. You can create mesh views in general arrangement and cast unit
drawings.
The mesh view contains the overall mesh length and width dimensions, and dimension lines for
wire spacing in horizontal and vertical directions. Also the wire sizes are displayed.
To create a reinforcement mesh view:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Select the meshes.
If you want to create views for all meshes in the drawing, you do not need to select them.
3. Click Tools > Options to go to the Macros dialog box.
4. Start the macro by selecting RebarMeshViewCreator and clicking Run.
5. You have the following choices in creating mesh views:

• If you want to create a mesh view for each separate mesh in the current drawing,
select Create mesh view for all meshes in the drawing.
• If you want to create a view for the selected meshes only, select Create view for
selected meshes. Here you must select the meshes before running the macro.
• If you have already created the mesh views and just want to add dimension lines and
diameters in the views, select Create annotations for selected meshes. Here you
must select the meshes before running the macro.
6. Click Create.

88 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Editing drawings
Tekla Structures creates the views based on the property files RebarMeshDim,
RebarMeshMark, and RebarMeshView for the dimensions, marks, and views
respectively.

Example Below is an example of a mesh view.

Adding single-part views in assembly drawings

In addition to automatically including single-part views in assembly drawings, you can also add
single-part drawing views in a final assembly drawing.
1. Open the assembly drawing.
2. In the drawing view, select the parts of which you want to create a single-part view.
3. Right-click and select Create single-part views.
Tekla Structures adds the single-part views to the assembly drawing using the current
properties in the Assembly Drawing Properties dialog box (Assembly Drawing Properties >
Layout > Other > Single-part attributes).

Copying drawing views from another drawing

You can copy drawing views from other drawings.
To copy a drawing view from another drawing:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open the Drawing List by pressing Ctrl + O.
3. Select the drawing containing the view you want to copy. You can select several
drawings.
4. Click View > Add Views from Other Drawing and select Copy or Copy with Layout:
• Copy copies the views from the selected drawings as such to the open drawing.
Tekla Structures does not copy the drawing layout.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 89
Editing drawings
• Copy with Layout copies the views and layout from the selected drawings as such
to the open drawing.

Copied drawing views do not update when the original views change.

Moving views to another drawing

You can move section and detail views to another drawing through the drawing list. When you
move views to another drawing, the source drawing and the target drawing will contain
references to each other.

General arrangement drawings are often quite full of information. You

may want to create empty general arrangement drawings and move
detail or section views from the original general arrangement drawings
to an empty drawing.

To move a drawing view to another drawing:

1. In an open drawing, select the frame of the drawing view you want to move.
2. Right-click and select Move to drawing from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the target drawing from the Drawing List.
4. Click Move in the Move view to drawing dialog box.
5. Close and save the source drawing.
Tekla Structures moves the selected view to the target drawing and creates references
between the source and target drawings.
6. Open the target drawing from the Drawing List.
The Drawing List indicates that the drawing has been updated.
7. Arrange the drawing views, if necessary.
8. Save the target drawing.

Example In this example, we have two drawings on the Drawing List: BEAM1 and BEAM2.

We move section view C-C from drawing BEAM1 to BEAM2. Below is the original section view
in the source drawing BEAM1.

90 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Editing drawings
We move this view to drawing BEAM2 according to the instructions above. Below is the moved
section view in the target drawing BEAM2. The view label name contains the name of the
source drawing BEAM1.

In the source drawing BEAM1, the section mark of the moved section view contains a reference
to the target drawing BEAM2.

Linking views from another drawing

You can link drawing views from other drawings.
To link drawing views:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open the Drawing List by pressing Ctrl + O.
3. Select the drawing containing the view you want to link. You can select several
drawings.
4. Click View > Add Views from Other Drawing and select Link or Link with Layout:
• Link displays the views of the selected drawings in the open drawing. Tekla
Structures does not copy the drawing layout.
• Link with Layout displays the views and the layout of the selected drawings in the
open drawing.

Linked drawing views update when the original views change.

Changing drawing views

Once you have added the necessary views in your drawing, you may want to modify the view
contents, appearance, size, location and rotation.

Resizing drawing views

You can resize the views using the view frame handles.
1. Click the view frame.
2. Click a view frame handle.
3. Drag the handle to the desired location.

92 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Editing drawings
View frame

View frame handle

Click View > Fit Drawing Views to resize drawing views so that there is
no unnecessary space in the views. You can resize the Selected views,
or All views.

Resizing the drawing view boundary

The view boundary is the dashed frame around the contents of a drawing view. You can resize
the view boundary, for example, to show just a specific part of the view contents.
The view boundaries are not visible in the views that you create in the final drawing.
To resize the view boundary:
1. Click the view frame.
2. Click one of the handles on the view boundary.
3. Drag the handles along the x or y axis of the view.
4. Make the view smaller by clicking the view frame and dragging the view frame handles.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 93
Editing drawings
View boundary handle

View boundary

View frame

View frame handle

The result after resizing the view boundary and the view frame

Limitations You cannot use the drag technique to modify drawing view depth. You must modify the depth+
and depth- properties in the View Properties dialog box.

Moving drawing views

You can move drawing views by dragging and dropping.
1. Click the view frame.

94 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Editing drawings
2. Drag the view to a new location.
The view follows the cursor while you drag the view, so you know what the end result
will be.

When you drag a view, its placing setting may change to fixed
depending on what is set for the advanced option
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED.

Arranging drawing views

You can fit the drawing views so that they include all the connected objects, and rearrange the
drawing views using the current properties in the Layout Properties properties dialog box.
To fit and arrange drawing views:
• Click View > Arrange Drawing Views.

• Arrange Drawing Views only affects views where the Place is set
to Free in the view properties. Fixed views are not moved.
• If you have set XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED to TRUE
(default) and drag a view in a drawing, the view becomes fixed, and
the Arrange Drawing Views command does not work
• Arrange Drawing Views may change the drawing size if you have
used automatic scaling of drawing views.

Modifying drawing view properties

You can modify view properties in the final drawing view by view or in selected views.
To modify view properties:
1. Do one of the following:
• If you want to modify the properties in several views, hold down Ctrl and click the
view frames of the views you want to modify and click View > Drawing View
Properties.
• To modify the properties of one view, double-click the view frame.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch

at the bottom of the dialog box.

3. Select the check boxes next to the properties you want to modify.
4. Modify the view properties as required.
For example, change the view Scale.
5. Click Modify in each of the subdialog boxes where you change the properties.
6. Optional: If there are some object level settings that you want to apply, click the Edit
settings button and load the object settings that you want to use. Click Modify.

at the bottom of the dialog box.

3. Select only the check boxes next to the properties you want to modify.
4. On the Cutting line tab, set the section mark line length and offset (distance between the
mark and the section).
5. On the Section mark tab, click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents
dialog box and select the elements to be included in the section mark.
6. Optional: Select an element from the list, click Add frame and select the frame Type and
Color. You can set these individually for each element.
7. Optional: Select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font and Height. You
can set these individually for each element.
8. On the Position tab, set the side to show the text, the text position, the horizontal and
vertical offset, and the text rotation. Text positioning depends on whether you use a
symbol or not.
9. Click Modify.
10. In the Symbol area, define the section mark symbols. You can select from a list of
predefined arrow symbols or use your own custom symbol. The symbol properties can
be given separately for both the left and the right section mark symbols. Also set the
color, size and position of section mark symbols.
11. On the View label tab, click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents
dialog box, and select the elements to be included in the section view label.
12. Modify the element appearance and mark position as described above.
13. Click Modify.
14. Select the view label Symbol to be used in the label. You can also set the color, size, and
the line length of the section view label line and symbol.
15. Click Modify.

See also View, section view and detail view label mark elements (p. 389)
Section and detail mark elements (p. 388)
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks (p. 378)
Changing drawing views (p. 92)
Modifying section marks (p. 247)
Section view properties (p. 360)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 97
Editing drawings
Modifying detail properties
You can modify the properties of detail marks, detail view labels and detail mark boundaries in
an open drawing.
To modify detail properties:
1. Double-click a detail mark to display the Detail Symbol Properties dialog box.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch

at the bottom of the dialog box.

3. Select only the check boxes next to the properties you want to modify.
4. On the View label tab, modify the name of the detail.
5. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box, and select the
elements to be included in the detail view label mark.
6. Optional: Select an element from the list, click Add frame and select the frame Type and
Color. You can set these individually for each element.
7. Optional: Select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font and Height. You
can set these individually for each element.
8. On the Position tab, set the text position, horizontal and vertical offset, and the text
alignment. Text positioning depends on whether you use a symbol or not.
9. Click Modify.
10. Select the view label Symbol to be used in the label. You can also set the color, size, and
the line length of the view label line and symbol.
11. Select the Vertical (Above or Below) and Horizontal (Center by view frame or Center
by view restriction box) position of the view label.
12. Go to the Detail boundary tab and define the shape of the boundary and the color and
type of the bounding line.
Use the advanced option XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS for setting a fixed size for
the detail boundary.
13. On to the Detail mark tab, click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents
dialog box and select the elements to be included in the detail view label mark.
14. Modify the element appearance and mark position as in steps 3, 4 and 5 above.
15. Click Modify.
16. Select the detail mark Symbol to be used in the mark. You can also change the color and
size of the symbol.
17. Click modify in the Detail Symbol Properties dialog box.

Adding manual dimensions

To add dimensions:
1. Hold down Shift, click Dimensioning and select one of the dimensioning commands
depending on the type of dimension you want to create.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
2. Modify the dimension and dimension mark properties, and add dimension tag marks as
required.
The available dimension mark and dimension tag mark elements are the same as those
for the part, bolt, reinforcement and surface treatment marks.
3. Click OK or Apply.
4. Create the dimension by following the instructions on the status bar.

It is very important to use correct snap switches to get the dimensions

correct. Change the switch by rigth-clicking and selecting the switch that
suits the best for your purpose. You can also select the snap switch from
the toolbar.

In dimension types where you click the middle mouse button to place the
dimension line, the placement setting affects the result. If you have set
Placing to fixed, the position you click will be the location of the
dimension line. If you have set Placing to free, the middle mouse button
click defines which side of the object the dimension line is located on,
and Tekla Structures places the dimension line.

Example: Manual dimensions

Here are some examples of manual dimensions.

Command Example
Add Parallel Dimension

Shows the edge points

picked for defining the direction
for the parallel dimension line.

Shows the dimension

points picked.

Same part as before, now

dimensioned with Add
Perpendicular Dimension

Shows the edge points

picked for defining the direction
for the perpendicular dimension
line.

Shows the dimension

points picked.

100 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Command Example
Add Curved Dimension > With
Orthogonal Reference Lines
The dimension text on the line is
a distance value.

If the ends of a curved beam or

polybeam have been cut or
fitted, the points at the ends of
the beam do not necessarily lie
on the true curve of the beam.
This is because curved beams
are created with straight
segments. The points are

indicated with
To avoid creating incorrect
curved dimensions, pick the
three points defining the arc
using three of the points

indicated with
Use end point snap.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 101

Editing drawings
Command Example
Add Curved Dimension > With
Radial Reference Lines
Curved set to Distance.
The dimension text on the line is
a distance value.

Add Curved Dimension > With

Radial Reference Lines
Curved set to Angle.
The dimension text on the line is
an angle value.

Add Angular Dimension

Angle set to Degrees at angle
vertex

Add Angular Dimension

Angle set to Degrees on side

102 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Command Example
Add Angular Dimension
Angle set to Triangle.

Triangle base length set to 100

Add Radial Dimension

Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System

You can pick UCS (user coordinate system) points to define the current coordinate system in
the drawing view. If you do this, the dimensioning commands Add Horizontal Dimension,
Add Vertical Dimension and Add Orthogonal Dimension follow the defined coordinate
system.
To create dimensions in the horizontal direction using UCS:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Right-click the desired view, select Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) > Set by
Two Points.
3. Pick the UCS origin and the UCS X direction.

4. Click Dimensioning > Add Horizontal Dimension.

5. Pick the start and end point for the dimension.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 103

Editing drawings
6. Point to the location where you want to add the dimension line and click the middle
mouse button.

When you use the Add Orthogonal Dimension command, it

automatically finds out whether the dimension line is in the X or Y
direction depending on which one is the closest.

Adding tags to dimensions

You can add dimension tags to dimensions in an open drawing. You can add dimension tags to
single and combined dimensions.
To add dimension tags to a dimension:
1. Double-click the dimension.
2. Go to the Tags tab and select the locations where you want to add dimension tags.
You can add dimension tags above and below the dimension line to the left and right end
of the line, to the dimension line ends, and in the middle of the dimension line below the
line.

104 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
3. Click the ... buttons to go to the Tag Mark Properties dialog box.
You can also enter text directly in the A - G boxes.
4. Select the tag rotation. Each tag has an independent rotation setting, so you can rotate
some tags and leave others unrotated.
• Parallel to dimension line does not rotate the tag. This is the default value.
• Perpendicular to dimension line rotates the tag.
5. Include the elements that you want in the dimension tag.
The available elements are the same as those of the part, bolt, reinforcement and surface
treatment marks.
6. Select the element frame type and color and the text color, font, and height.
7. Click OK.
8. If you want to show the part count in the tag, set Include part count in the tag to Yes.
9. Use Exclude parts according to filter and select a predefined filter to remove some of
the automatically created tag content.
In addition to the user-selectable elements, some of the dimension tag content is
automatically created based on the dimension end point locations. If you want to exclude
unnecessary tag content for parts that are located in the same location as the
dimensioning point, create suitable drawing view filter.
10. Click Modify.

Limitations • Rotation is not available for the middle dimension tags.

• The dimension tags are automatically updated according to model changes, when you
update the drawing. If you want to disable the automatic update, you can freeze the
drawing or set the advanced option XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED to FALSE.
This advanced option affects all drawings.

Example Below is an example of dimension tags.

Below is an example of an unrotated and rotated dimension tags.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 105

Editing drawings
See also Part mark elements (p. 383)
Bolt mark elements (p. 384)
Reinforcement mark elements (p. 385)
Surface treatment mark elements (p. 388)
Using superscript in text (p. 134)
Dimensions (p. 98)
Modifying dimension properties (p. 126)
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED
Dimension and dimensioning properties (p. 361)
Creating view filters in drawings
Example: Removing dimension tag content (p. 106)

Example: Removing dimension tag content

In this example, you will remove from a dimension tag some content that is added in the tag
automatically based on the dimension end point locations. First you will create a drawing view
filter that you will use for removing the content.
The example below shows a tag that automatically contains the text "CORBEL". You will
remove this text.

To create the filter and remove the desired content:

1. Open a drawing.

106 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
2. Double-click the view frame to open the View Properties dialog box.
3. Double-click Filter... to open the View Filter Properties dialog box.
4. Click Add row and create a filter according to the example below.

5. Enter concrete as the name of the filter in the box next to the Save as button and
click the button to save the filter.
6. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
7. In the drawing, double-click the dimension that contains the content that you want to
remove.
The Dimension Properties dialog box is displayed.
8. Go to the Tags page.
9. In Exclude parts according to filter, select the concrete filter.
10. Click Modify.
Tekla Structures removes the text "CORBEL" from the dimension tag. The material type
of corbel is concrete, and the concrete filter removes all concrete parts from the tag.

Adding dual dimensions manually

You can add dual dimensions manually in an existing drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 107

Editing drawings
To add dual dimensions manually:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Options... > Drawing dimensions > Dimensions in tags, set
the unit, formats and precision, and activate the dual dimensions for the drawing types
you want.
2. Click OK.
3. Double-click a dimension in your drawing.
4. Go to the Tags tab, and enter the text DIMENSION in the middle dimension tag.

5. Click Modify.
6. Optional: If you do not want to show dual dimensions in all dimensions, you can
manually delete the text DIMENSION from the tag.

Example Below is an example of dual dimensions that use the unit mm and format ###.

Recreating dimensions for all parts

You can recreate the same dimensions that were originally created for the parts in the drawing.
To recreate dimensions for all parts:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Click Dimensioning > Recreate Dimensions for All Parts.
Tekla Structures re-dimensions all views except linked, 3D and key plan views, and
removes all manually created dimensions.
Tekla Structures dimensions parts only in views where Dimension creation method in
this view is set to Automatically in the view properties dialog box.

108 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
See also Adding dimensions (p. 99)
View properties in drawings (p. 357)

Adding predefined reinforcement dimensions

You can add dimensions to reinforcing bar groups in an open cast unit drawing.
Each reinforcing bar group with identical spacing has a mark and dimension line. You can
define the contents of the marks yourself or use predefined dimension settings files. You can
add dimension tags on dimension lines.
To add reinforcement dimensions using predefined dimension settings files, do one of the
following:

To Do this
Create dimensions 1. Right-click the reinforcing bar group and select Add Mark >
including dimension Dimension Mark from the pop-up menu.
marks 2. Double-click the created dimension to display the Dimension
Properties dialog box.
3. Load the standard file dimension_mark.
4. Modify properties as required. For example, you can adjust
contents of the dimension mark.
5. If you want to save the settings in the standard file
dimension_mark, click Save.
6. Click Modify.
Create dimensions 1. Right-click the reinforcing bar group and select Add Mark >
including dimension Tagged Dimension Mark from the pop-up menu.
marks and dimension 2. Double-click the created dimension to display the Dimension
tags Properties dialog box.
3. Load the standard file tagged_dimension_mark and go
to the Tags tab.
4. Click the ... button next to <<Mark>> to adjust the contents
of the dimension tag.
5. In the Dimension Right Upper Corner Tag Mark Properties
dialog box, select the elements to include.
6. Modify other tag mark properties, for example, the rotation
and the appearance of the tag mark.
7. Click OK
8. Modify other tag properties as required. For example, you can
include part count in the tag, and filter out tag content using
Exlude parts according to filter.
9. If you want to save the settings in the standard file
tagged_dimension_mark, click Save.
10. Click Modify.

Example Below is an example of a reinforcement dimension with dimension mark.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 109

Editing drawings
Below is an example of a reinforcement dimension with additional dimension tag.

Adding dimension (distribution) lines to reinforcing bars

You can add dimension lines, or distribution lines, to reinforcing bar groups. They show the
distribution of the reinforcing bars in the group.
To create a dimension line:
1. Open a cast unit drawing.
2. Right-click a reinforcing bar group and select Create dimension line from the pop-up
menu. Tekla Structures creates the dimension line.
3. Optional: Double-click the dimension line to display the Dimension Properties dialog
box.
Modify the properties as required. Click Modify to apply the changes.
4. Optional: You can drag a reinforcement dimension line out of the reinforcement bar
group.

110 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
When you do this, Tekla Structures draws a dashed line from the reinforcing bar to the
dimension line. If the new location is in the reinforcement area, the reinforcing bar mark
follows the intersection of the reinforcement bar and reinforcement dimension line.

Example Below is an example of the dimension line.

Below is an example of the dimension line when it has been dragged outside the reinforcing bar
group.

Dimensioning spiral stirrup reinforcement groups

You can add dimensions to a spiral stirrup reinforcement group using the Create
StirrupDimPlugin application.
Creating the dimensions successfully with this application requires that you model the
reinforcing bar group using the creation method By exact spacings and reinforcing bar group
type Spiral in the Reinforcing Bar Properties dialog box.
Before you can use this feature, add the Create StirrupDimPlugin command to a toolbar or to
the User menu through Tools > Customize.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 111

Editing drawings
To add dimensions to a spiral stirrup reinforcement group, modify the dimension properties and
add a text to the stirrup group:
1. Select the reinforcement.
2. Click the command Create StirrupDimPlugin that you added on a toolbar.
3. Click the location where you want to place the dimension.
The application creates the dimensions. Clicking the upper side of the reinforcement
creates dimensions above the cast unit, and clicking the bottom side of the reinforcement
creates dimensions below the cast unit.
4. To change the Center-to-center distance letter, double-click the dimension to open the
Stirrup dimensioning plug-in dialog box.

5. Change the letter and click Modify.

6. Optional: You can modify the dimension properties of the created stirrup dimension in
the following way:
a Open the Dimension Properties dialog box.
b Load the StirrupDim properties.
c Modify and save the properties as StirrupDim.
d Double-click the stirrup dimension.
e Click Modify.
7. Optional: You can add a text to the stirrup:
a Open the Text Properties dialog box.
b Load the StirrupDim properties.
c Change the settings as required.
d Save the properties with the name StirrupDim.
e Click OK and add the text.

Example

112 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
See also Creating a user-defined menu
Managing toolbars
Adding dimensions (p. 99)

Dimensioning center of gravity

You can indicate the location of the center of gravity (COG) in single-part, assembly, and cast
unit drawings by creating COG dimensions and a COG symbol at the center of gravity. You can
also create COG dimensions in section views. COG dimensions will be automatically updated
if the single part, assembly, or cast-unit changes. The COG dimensions can also be cloned.
To create COG dimensions:

1. Double-click the Create COG Dimensioning toolbar command .

2. Modify the creation, dimensioning and symbol options as required:

• You can create dimensions or symbol, or both.

• You can create horizontal or vertical dimensions, or both.
• You can specify which dimension property file to use.
• You can change the symbol file and the used symbol, and specify the symbol
property file to use.
3. Click OK.
4. Pick the first point to specify the origin of the dimensions. The origin is the point from
which you want to measure the location of the center of gravity. This point must be
located within the view frame.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 113

Editing drawings
5. Pick the second point to place the dimensions. This point may fall outside the view
frame.

The example below shows the created dimensions.

6. When the dimension is selected, handles are shown at the dimension origin and the
dimension location. You can drag these handles to adjust the origin or the location, or
move them using the standard editing commands.

114 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Limitations • If you copy or link a drawing containing COG dimensions to another drawing, such as a
multidrawing, the COG dimensions will not be copied.
• You cannot create COG dimensions in general arrangement drawings or multidrawings.

Semi-automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings

The semi-automatic dimensioning of general arrangement drawings is a special dimensioning
type you use only for general arrangement drawings. It contains several dimensioning options:
• Which points and parts Tekla Structures dimensions
• How Tekla Structures combines dimensions
• Whether to use the reference line or the center line of the part as a dimension point

Adding semi-automatic dimensions

To add semi-automatic dimension in a general arrangement drawing:
1. Open a general arrangement drawing.
2. Click Dimensioning > GA Dimensioning Settings to display the Semi-automating GA
dimensioning dialog box.
3. In Dimension, select which points to use for dimensioning: Intersection points or
Intersection and reference points.
Intersection points creates dimensions only for points where two parts intersect.
Intersection and reference points creates dimensions for points where two parts
intersect, and to the reference points of the selected parts.
4. In Parts, select whether to dimension Main parts or All selected parts.
5. In Combine, select how to combine the dimensions: All, By grid lines, By grid
squares, by Main parts, or By selected parts.
6. In Use, select whether to use Reference lines or Center lines as dimension point.
If you select Reference lines, Tekla Structures generates the dimensions on the basis of
the Position settings the of the object in the model, and the points you pick in the model
when placing the object. If you select Center lines, Tekla Structures dimensions the
center line of the profiles regardless of the position setting in the object's properties
dialog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 115

Editing drawings
7. Click Apply.
8. Select the objects you want to dimension.
9. Click Dimensioning > Add GA Drawing Dimensions, and select Along Grid Lines,
Along Part X Axis, Along Part Y Axis, or Along Part X and Y Axis.

Example: Combining dimensions

Below are examples of what general arrangement drawings dimensions look like with different
combining settings

116 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Setting Example
Combine is set to All.Tekla Structures
combines all dimensions for the
selected parts on one dimension line.

Combine is set to By grid lines. Tekla

Structures combines points to be
dimensioned depending on how close
they are to the grid lines. In this
example, intersection points of the
upper beams are dimensioned close to
the upper grid line and the lower beams
close to the lower grid line.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 117

Editing drawings
Setting Example
Combine is set to By grid squares.
Tekla Structures combines points to be
dimensioned depending on how close
they are to the box formed by the grid
lines.

118 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Setting Example
Combine is set to By main parts. Tekla
Structures combines dimensions so that
all intersections of one main part are
shown with a single dimension line.

Combine is set to By selected

parts.Tekla Structures combines all
intersections of the selected parts with
separate dimension lines.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 119

Editing drawings
Adding closing dimensions (p. 122)
Setting new dimension start point (p. 123)
Placing dimension texts outside dimensions (p. 124)
Showing plate side marks (p. 125)
Adding dimension points in anchor bolt plans (p. 126)
Modifying dimension properties (p. 126)
Adding automatic dimensions (p. 253)
Adding manual dimensions (p. 99)
Dimension and dimensioning properties (p. 361)

Moving the end of the dimension line

You can move the end of the dimension line orthogonal to itself outside the part. The dimension
tags are moved together with the end of the line. This is useful when the tags would otherwise
cover part geometry or other objects, such as dimensions or marks.
To move the end of the dimension line:
1. In an open drawing, click the dimension.
The dimension line handle becomes visible.
2. Select the handle and drag the end of the line to the desired position.
It is easier to select the handle when your hold down Alt and then click the handle.
If the dimension contains dimension tags, the tags are visible while you drag.

Limitations You can move the end of the dimension line in all straight dimensions, except elevation
dimensions.

Combining dimension lines

You can manually combine a group of two or more parallel dimension lines into one line.
To combine parallel dimension lines:
1. Hold down Ctrl and click the dimension lines you want to combine.
2. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Combine Dimension Lines.

120 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
You can also select Combine Dimension Lines from the pop-up menu.

Linking perpendicular dimension lines

You can connect two perpendicular dimension lines. Connecting dimension lines makes your
drawings clearer and easier to read. For example, you might want to link dimension lines of
embedded objects in a cast unit, floor beams in a floor plan, or anchor bolts in an anchor bolt
plan.
To connect two dimension lines:
1. Hold down Ctrl and select two perpendicular dimension lines to connect.
2. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Link Dimension Lines.
3. Optional: If you want to unlink the dimension lines you linked, select the linked
dimension line and click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Unlink Dimension Lines.

Example Below is an example of linked dimension lines.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 121

Editing drawings
The commands Link Dimension Lines and Unlink Dimension Lines
are also available in the pop-up menu for dimensions.

Adding dimension points

To add dimension points on a dimension line:
1. Select the dimension line.
You can only add points to one dimension line at a time.
2. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Add Dimension Point.
3. Click a position on the part where you want to add the dimension point.
You can add several points.
4. Optional: You can remove a point by clicking Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions >
Remove Dimension Point and clicking the point you want to remove.
You can remove several points in a row.

The Add Dimension Point and Remove Dimension Point commands

are also available in the pop-up menu for dimensions.

Adding closing dimensions

In a drawing containing a reinforcing bar group, you can manually add closing dimensions to
the edge of the part using the Add Dimension Point command.
To add closing dimensions:
1. Open a cast unit drawing.
2. Select the reinforcing bar group dimension line.
3. Click Dimensioning > Add Dimension Point.
4. Select the points where you want to add the closing dimensions.

122 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Tekla Structures creates the closing dimensions.

Setting new dimension start point

You can select a new start point for running dimensions (dimensions that start from a common
start point).
To select a new start point:
1. Select an existing dimension in the drawing.
2. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Set Dimension Start Point.
3. Select the new start point. Tekla Structures automatically updates the dimensions.

Example You can use this command to swap the running dimensions start point to the opposite end of the
member. This is useful when running dimensions start from the opposite end of a member.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 123

Editing drawings
When you use the US absolute dimension type, Tekla Structures draws a new RD symbol
(Running Dimension) at the new zero point and updates the dimensions according to the new
start point.

Placing dimension texts outside dimensions

If you have selected to place texts of short dimensions outside the dimensions by setting Short
dimensions to Outside on the General tab of the Dimension Properties, you can select on
which side of the extension line the dimension text is placed.
To select the dimension text to place outside dimensions:
1. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Flip Outside Dimension.
2. Click the dimension text you want to place outside the dimensions.

124 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
You can place the dimension text outside the dimensions if there is
enough space for the dimension text.

Limitations You can flip only start or end dimensions in a dimension set.

Showing plate side marks

You can show plate side marks on dimension leader lines. The plate side marks indicate
whether the dimension point is to the face or center of the part, for example, a plate, web, or
flange.
To create plate side marks:
1. Select Dimensioning > Dimension Properties.
2. In the Dimension Properties dialog box, go to the Marks tab, set Type in Plate side
marks to Specified to manually control the symbol and insert plate side mark symbols
in the drawing.
3. Modify the other properties of the plate side marks as required:
• You can select the left and right plate side mark.
• You can set the mark size.
• You can adjust the mark color.
• You can set the offset of the mark from the dimension line.
4. Click Modify.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 125

Editing drawings
See also Showing plate side marks automatically (p. 260)
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT
Editing dimensions (p. 119)

Adding dimension points in anchor bolt plans

You can add dimension points to dimensions inside the enlarged views in an open anchor bolt
plan.
To add dimension points to the dimensions inside the enlarged views:
1. Select the enlarged view frame.
2. Select the dimension to modify.
3. Right-click and select Add dimension point.

You cannot create new dimension lines that have dimension points inside
both the enlarged views and the plan view.

Modifying dimension properties

You can modify the properties of the dimensions in an open drawing.
To modify dimensions:
1. Double-click a dimension.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch

at the bottom of the dialog box.

3. Select only the check boxes next to the properties that you want to modify.
4. On the General tab, modify the dimension type, format, and placing settings.
5. On the Appearance tab, modify the text, line and arrow settings.
6. On the Marks tab, modify the dimension mark contents and exaggeration settings.
Here you can also select whether you want to show plate side marks.
7. On the Tags tab, add dimension tags as required, and set the dimension tag rotation.
Here you can also select to include part count to dimension tags and select a filter that
removes the desired default content from the tag.
8. Click Modify.

126 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Checking dimension point validity
By default, Tekla Structures always checks dimensions when you open a drawing. This
command re-checks the dimensions and marks the invalid ones with a dimension point
invalidity symbol.
To check the validity of the dimensions:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Click Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Check Dimension Point Validity.
3. Do one of the following:
• To check all dimensions, select All.
• To check single dimensions, select Single and select the dimensions you want to
check.

4. You can delete the invalidity symbols without deleting the dimension line by clicking
Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove Dimension Point Invalidity Symbol
and selecting Single or All.

4.5 Associative annotation objects

Marks, dimensions, and associative notes are all associative annotation objects. An
associative annotation object updates according to the changes made in a model object in the
model.
In addition to the annotation objects Tekla Structures creates in a drawing based on the drawing
properties when the drawing is created, you can also add new ones in the final drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 127

Editing drawings
Moving the mark leader line base point (p. 133)
Using superscript in text (p. 134)

Adding part marks

In an open drawing, you can add part marks for all parts, bolts, reinforcing bars, surface
treatments and connections or for selected ones only. For each view, Tekla Structures creates
the marks according to the mark properties in the view mark properties dialog box.
To add part marks, do one of the following:

To Do this
Add part marks for all parts Click Annotating > Add Part Marks > For All Parts.
If you have deleted marks manually from the drawing,
this command will not create the marks, and you will
have to create them manually part by part.
Add part marks for selected 1. Select the parts.
parts 2. Click Annotating > Add Part Marks > For
Selected Parts
3. If the part mark does not contain any elements in
the drawing view properties, the Part Mark
Properties dialog box is displayed, and you can
select the elements to be included in the part mark.
Add elements and click Modify.

You can also right-click the parts and select the appropriate mark
creation command from the pop-up menu.

Adding level marks

A level mark is an associative annotation object that represents the elevation of a point. In
addition to the automatic elevation dimensions that you can define in the drawing properties
before creating the drawing, and the elevation information in the grid labels added in the
model, you can also add level marks in your drawing to ensure that the dimensions are correct.
To add level marks:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Add Level Mark to open the Level Mark
Properties dialog box.
3. Enter or modify the content and the appearance of the level mark.
4. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
5. Pick a start point for the leader line and a position for the mark.

128 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Elevation dimension in the grid label

Elevation dimension created with Add Level Mark in the drawing

Shortening value added in the user-defined properties of a part also

affects level marks.

Adding associative notes

An associative note is an extra mark that can include any additional information. You can add
associative notes to parts, bolts, reinforcing bars, surface treatments, and edge chamfers. You
can add multiple notes to one object, and place the notes anywhere.
To add an associative note:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Associative Note and select With Leader
Line, Without Leader Line, or Along Line.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
3. Enter or modify the content and the appearance of the note.
Associative notes may contain the same elements as part, bolt, reinforcing bar, and
surface treatment marks. Notes connected to edge chamfers may contain name, length,
DX and DY.
Associative note appearance properties are the same as the ones for part marks.
Additionally, you can adjust the leader line arrow height and length.

To place the note exactly in the position you pick and keep it there, click
the Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list.

4. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.

5. Select the object.
See below for some examples of leader lines. The one on the left is With Leader Line, the one
in the middle Without Leader Line and the one on the right Along Line.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 129

Editing drawings
For edge chamfers and other hard-to-see items, it is easier to use the pop-
up menu command Add Associative Note, as you do not have to select
the object again after selecting the command from the pop-up.

Modifying associative annotation object properties

You can modify the properties of the associative annotation objects in an open drawing. By
associative annotation objects we mean associative notes and marks for parts, bolts,
reinforcement, surface treatments, welds, levels, and connections.
To modify the properties of associative annotation objects:
1. Double-click a mark.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch

at the bottom of the dialog box.

3. Select only the check boxes next to the properties that you want to modify.
4. To exactly place the mark in the position you pick and keep it there, click the Place...
button and select fixed in the Placing list.
5. Leave the dialog box open, select all the marks that you want to change, and click
Modify to apply the changes in all the selected marks.

To modify the properties of the weld marks of welds that you added in
the model, you need to modify the weld in the model. When you perform
numbering, the weld marks are updated in the drawings.

130 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
To Do this
Update all part marks Click Annotating > Update Marks > All Part
Marks.
Update selected part marks 1. Select the part marks you want to update.
2. Click Annotating > Update Marks > Selected
Part Marks.
Update all weld marks Click Annotating > Update Marks > All Weld
Marks.

Tekla Structures updates the marks according to your selection.

Removing change symbols

After you have checked all the change symbols that Tekla Structures has created, you can
remove all of them or just the selected ones.
To remove change symbols, do one of the following:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 131

Editing drawings
To Do this
Remove all dimension change symbols Click Dimensioning > Review
Dimensions > Remove Dimension
Change Symbol > All.
Remove the selected dimension change 1. Select the change symbols you want
symbols to remove.
2. Click Dimensioning > Review
Dimensions > Remove Dimension
Change Symbol > Single.
Remove all mark change symbols Click Annotating > Review Marks >
Remove Mark Change Symbol > All.
Remove the selected mark change 1. Select the change symbols you want
symbols to remove.
2. Click Annotating > Review Marks >
Remove Mark Change Symbol >
Single.
Remove all associative note change Click Annotating > Review Marks >
symbols Remove Associative Note Change
Symbol > All.
Remove the selected associative note 1. Select the change symbols you want
change symbols to remove.
2. Click Annotating > Review Marks >
Remove Associative Note Change
Symbol > Single.

Showing change symbols in printed drawings

The color you select for the change symbols determines if the symbols are shown in the printed
drawings.
To define the color:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... and go to the Drawing Properties page.
2. For the advanced option XS_DRAWING_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_COLOR, enter RED, DARK
RED, ORANGE, DARK YELLOW, GREEN, DARK GREEN, BLUE, DARK BLUE,
BLACK, GREY, DARK GREY, CYAN, DARK CYAN or MAGENTA.
If you enter the default color190, the symbols are shown on the screen but not in the
printed drawings. For all other color options, the symbols are shown both on the screen
and in the printout.

132 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Merging reinforcement marks
To manually merge marks in a drawing:
1. Click Annotating > Properties > Merged Reinforcement Mark....
2. Modify mark properties as required.
3. Select the marks to merge in the drawing.
4. Right-click and select Merge marks from the pop-up menu.
5. Optional: You can split the merged marks by selecting the marks to split, right-clicking
and selecting Split marks.

Moving the mark leader line base point

You can change the place of the leader line base point.
To change the place of the leader line base point:
1. Click the leader line near its end.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the base point to a new location.

Limitations You can drag the base point with the following limitations:
• If the base point is originally on a line, you can drag it along that line.
• If the base point is originally inside a part, you can drag the base point inside that part.

4.6 Independent annotation objects

Independent annotation objects are not linked or connected to the Tekla Structures model in
any way. Texts, text files, DWG/DXF files, symbols, revision marks, links and hyperlinks are
all independent annotation objects.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 133

Editing drawings
1. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Add Text and then Text; Text with Leader
Line; Text along Line; Along Line, Arrow at End Point; or Along Line, Arrow at Start
Point.
2. Enter the text in the Text box.
Press Enter to make a line break.
3. Modify the text color, height, font, angle and alignment as required.
Text is aligned to left by default. Line spacing is automatically adjusted by the font size
you select.
4. Select a frame type, leader line and color.
5. Select the leader line arrow type and size.
6. To exactly place the text in the position you pick, and keep it there, click the Place...
button and select fixed in the Placing list.
7. Click OK or Apply.
8. Add the text.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

See below for examples of the different text options. From left: Text; Text with Leader Line;
Text along Line; Along Line, Arrow at End Point; and Along Line, Arrow at Start Point.

Using superscript in text

You can use superscript in texts in all your text objects, dimension marks, other marks and
associative notes.
Before you can use superscript, set the advanced option
XS_SUPERSCRIPT_USED_IN_DRAWING_TEXTS to TRUE.
To use superscript text:
1. Open the properties dialog box of the text object, mark or associative note.
2. Do one of the following:
• For text objects, enter the desired text in the Text box.
• For marks and associative notes, open the Mark Content - text dialog box by
double-clicking Text in the Available elements list and enter the desired text in the
Text box.
3. Enter circumflexes (^) around the characters that you want to have in superscript.
4. Click Modify or OK and Modify as required.

Example This example shows how the superscript is entered in the Text box and what it looks like in the
text.

134 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
See also Adding text (p. 133)
Associative annotation objects (p. 127)
Dimensions (p. 98)
XS_SUPERSCRIPT_USED_IN_DRAWING_TEXTS

Adding links to text files

You can insert a text file inside a frame in a drawing. Tekla Structures adds the text file using
the properties in the Text File Properties dialog box.Tekla Structures creates a link to the text
file. If you change the text in the file, it will change in all drawings containing a link to the text
file.
To add a link to a text file:
1. Open the drawing where you want to add the text file.
2. Click Annotating > Add Text > From Text File.
3. Set the text color, height, and font.
4. Set the frame line type and color.
5. Select if you want to scale the text.
If you select No scaling, you only need to pick the upper left corner of the frame. Tekla
Structures inserts the object in its original size. If you select Scale to fit, you need to
pick two points to define the frame. Tekla Structures adjusts the object size to fit the
frame.
6. Browse for the file.
7. Click OK or Apply.
8. Pick one or two points in the drawing to indicate the corners of the text file frame.

• To edit a text file, double-click the text inside the frame. Tekla
Structures opens the original text file.
• To modify the text file properties, double-click the frame around the
text.

Adding links to other drawings

You can insert a link to a drawing in a frame in a drawing. Tekla Structures adds the link to the
drawing using the properties in the Drawing Link Properties dialog box.
To add a link to another drawing:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Click Annotating > Add Link > To Other Drawing....
3. Modify the text color, height, font and effect.
4. Modify the frame line type and color.
5. Select if you want to scale the link. If you select No scaling, Tekla Structures inserts the
link in its original size.
If you select Scale to fit, Tekla Structures adjusts the object size to fit the frame.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 135

Editing drawings
6. In the Drawing list, select the drawing to link to.
The drawings in the list are the drawings in the current model.
7. If you want to display text for the link instead of the drawing name, enter the text in the
Text box.
8. Pick two points to define the frame and add the link.
9. Click OK or Apply.

You can open the linked drawing by double-clicking the link.

Example In the example below, Scale to fit has been selected, and the link contains the name of the
drawing.

136 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
9. Pick one or two points in the drawing to indicate the corners of the hyperlink frame.

Example In the example below, Scale to fit has been selected. The Internet address for the hyperlink is
shown.

Double-click the hyperlink text in the drawing to jump to the Internet

address.

Adding links to DWG and DXF files

You can insert a DWG or DXF file inside a frame in a drawing. Tekla Structures adds the DWG
or DXF file using the properties in the DWG/DXF Properties dialog box. Tekla Structures
creates a link to the selected DWG or DXF file. When you modify the file, Tekla Structures
also modifies all the links in the drawing.
To add a link to a DWG or DXF file:
1. Open the drawing where you want to insert a link to a DWG/DXF file.
2. Click View > Add DWG / DXF File....
3. Select the scaling options.
4. Select the link frame line type and color.
5. In Name, browse for the DWG or DXF file you want to use.
6. Pick one or two points in the drawing to place the frame.
7. Click OK or Apply.
Tekla Structures adds the DWG or DXF drawing inside a frame in the drawing.

Adding revision marks

Revision marks are symbols that you can add in the drawing indicating a change in the Tekla
Structures model or drawing, containing information about the change.Tekla Structures creates
the revision mark using the properties in the Revision Mark Properties dialog box. If you
create revisions through the Drawing List, Tekla Structures will not create any marks inside the
drawing. Using revision marks you can indicate the places that have changed in your drawing.
To add revision marks:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Click Annotating > Add Revision Mark and select Arrow on Left..., Arrow on Right...,
Along Line, Arrow on Left... or Along Line, Arrow on Right....
3. Enter the mark, date, and information on the changes. Tekla Structures shows these in
the revision table of the drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 137

Editing drawings
4. To place the revision mark exactly in the position you pick and keep it there, click the
Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list.
5. Go to the Appearance tab and set the text color, height, font and angle, the frame color,
leader line and type, and the leader line arrow type and size.
6. Click OK or Apply.
7. Pick a point or points to place the mark.
Tekla Structures creates the revisions and revision marks. You can also see the new
revisions on the Drawing List.

See below for some examples of the revision marks.

Modifying the properties of independent annotation objects

You can modify the properties of texts, symbols, links, hyperlinks, links to DWG and DXF
files, and revision marks in an open drawing.
To modify the properties of the independent annotation objects:
1. Double-click the object.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch

at the bottom of the dialog box.

3. Select only the check boxes next to the properties that you want to modify.
4. Modify the properties.
5. Click Modify.

4.7 Building objects

Building objects are 2D representations of the the 3D parts that you have created in the model.
After making the drawing, you can change the appearance and representation of the building
objects in an open drawing.

138 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
If you want to change the model weld properties, go back to the model,
and make the changes there. In the drawing, you can only change the
properties of a manually added weld mark.

Modifying building objects

You can modify the drawing properties of the building objects (parts, bolts, reinforcement,
surface treatment) in an open drawing.
To modify the properties of a building object:
1. Double-click a part, reinforcement, surface treatment, or bolt.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch

at the bottom of the dialog box.

3. Select the check boxes of only those properties that you want to modify.
4. On the Contents tab, select the part representation, whether to show hidden lines, center
lines and reference lines, and which additional markings to show.
5. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of the lines.
6. On the Fill tab, set the part and section fill options.
7. Click Modify.

It is easier to adjust the center line color, if you hide the hidden lines on
the Contents tab first.

Limitations The color of the center lines can be changed only on the drawing and view level, not on the
object level. For center lines, you can adjust only the color in the properties dialog box, not the
type. You can adjust the line type of part center lines with the advanced option
XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 139

Editing drawings
XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE
Example: Part representations (p. 330)
Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes (p. 338)

Shortening parts view by view

You can shorten parts in the selected view in an open drawing.
To shorten parts view by view:
1. Double-click the view frame.
2. In the View Properties dialog box, go to the Attributes2 tab.
3. In Cut parts, select Yes.
4. In Cut skew parts, select if you want to cut skewed parts.
5. In Minimum cut part length, set the minimum length of the shortened part.
6. In Space between cut parts, enter the distance between the cut parts.
7. Click Modify.

To use a view shortening symbol instead of the empty area, set the
advanced options
XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS and
XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS to
TRUE. You can control the appearance of the view shortening symbol
with the advanced options XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR,
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE, and
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG.

Example Below is an example of how the view shortening symbol is displayed.

140 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS
XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR
Shortening and lengthening parts (p. 236)
Shortening parts in drawing views (p. 237)

Hiding building object outlines using cover-up tools

Use cover-up line and cover-up area tools for quickly hiding building object outlines in
drawings:

1. Click Shapes > Draw Cover-up Area or Draw Cover-up Line .

2. Draw a non-transparent rectangular area or line over the model object outline that you
want to hide. You can drag the cover-up objects to another location, and resize the
objects by dragging the handles.

Showing a single reinforcing bar in a group

To have Tekla Structures show only a single reinforcing bar from a group or mesh:
1. Select the reinforcing bar group or mesh.
2. Click Edit > Adjust Reinforcing Bars.
3. Click the bar you want to remain visible.
4. Optional: To change the number of visible bars again, double-click the bar and change
the Visibility of reinforcing bars setting.

Example

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 141

Editing drawings
When you use the Adjust Reinforcing Bars command to select the
visible reinforcing bar, also the customized setting becomes available
for the Visibility of reinforcing bars option in the Drawing
Reinforcement Properties dialog box. You can use this setting only
after you have used the Adjust Reinforcing Bars command and not, for
example, when you create the drawing.

See also Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties (p. 396)
Building objects (p. 138)
Adjusting the location of a single reinforcing bar (p. 142)

Adjusting the location of a single reinforcing bar

To adjust a location of a single visible bar in a reinforcing bar group:

1. Right-click the reinforcing bar.
2. Select Adjust location from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the location where you want to place the bar.

If you have the whole reinforcing bar group visible, Tekla Structures
deletes all bars except one from the group when you select the command.

Showing layer information on reinforcing bars

You can show reinforcing bar layer information in a drawing.
Before you can show layer information in a drawing, you must run the RebarClassificator
macro in the model. The RebarClassificator classifies the meshes and reinforcing bars in
the selected walls or slabs by their position. All reinforcing bars and meshes get an attribute
indicating the layer where they are placed inside the concrete element.
To show reinforcing bar layer information:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Click Tools > Macros.
3. Select RebarLayerMarker from the list and click Run.
The Rebar Layer Marker dialog box is displayed.
4. On the Marking style tab, select the marking style you want to use (symbol style or level
prefix style).
5. On the Marking settings tab, select the marker line type.
6. On the Marking settings tab, do one of the following depending on the selected marking
style:
• For symbol style markers, select the symbol you want to use, and the symbol height.
• For level prefix style markers, select the level prefix.
7. Click All objects to show layer markers on all reinforcing bars, or select the individual
reinforcing bars and click Selected objects to show the markers on the selected bars
only.

142 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Symbol style layer marker. The number, for example number 1 in T1, indicates
the layer number. The letter, for example T in T1, indicates whether the
reinforcing bar is on the top, bottom, near side or far side layer.
Level prefix style layer marker. The number of triangles indicates the layer
number from the face. Triangle orientation indicates whether the reinforcing bar
is on the top, bottom, near side or far side layer. For example for top bars, the
triangle head points downwards, and for bottom bars upwards.

4.8 Edge chamfers in drawings

You can show edge chamfers in drawings, and control the way they are shown by modifying
the part properties and the edge chamfer properties. You can also add chamfer marks as
associative notes.

Displaying edge chamfers in a drawing

You can select whether you show edge chamfers in your drawing and the way they are shown.
To select whether the edge chamfers are shown and how:
1. Open a drawing containing edge chamfers.
2. Depending on the level where you want to make the changes, do one of the following:
• Double-click the drawing and click Part...
• Double-click a view frame and click Part...
• Double-click the part containing edge chamfers

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 143

Editing drawings
3. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch

at the bottom of the dialog box.

4. Select the check boxes next to only the properties that you want to modify.
5. In the part properties dialog box, select Edge chamfers on in Additional marks.
6. Select Outline or Exact in Part representation list depending on the desired result.

Exact Outline

7. Click Modify.
8. Optional: In the drawing, double-click an edge chamfer and modify the line color and
type.

If you know that you are going to use the same part representation
settings for several drawings, save your settings in a properties file for
later use.

See also Part and neighbor part content properties (p. 389)
Edge chamfers in drawings (p. 143)

Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers

You can define a default color and line type for edge chamfers.
1. Click Tools > Options > Options... and select Drawing objects.
2. Define the default line color.
3. Define the default line type.
4. Click OK to save and close the dialog box.

144 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
You can override the default settings manually in a drawing by changing
the edge chamfer line color and type in the Edge Chamfer Properties
dialog box.

Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually

You can manually modify the line type and color of the edge chamfers in drawings. This
overrides the default color and type defined in the Options dialog box.
1. In the drawing, double-click an edge chamfer to display the Edge Chamfer Properties
dialog box.
2. Select the desired color and line type.
Background color is often used for edge chamfer lines for the reason that you
may not want to print edge chamfers, or see them in small scale drawings, but you want
to be able select them, for example, to add chamfer marks.

Example The following examples show how the edge chamfers are displayed with different part
representation settings:

Part representation Exact.

Part representation Outline, edge

chamfer not selected.

Part representation Outline, edge

chamfer selected.

See also Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers (p. 144)
Edge chamfers in drawings (p. 143)

Creating edge chamfer marks

You can add associative notes to edge chamfers and use them as part marks.
To add a chamfer mark:
1. Modify the part properties and edge chamfer properties so that edge chamfers are visible
and you can easily select them.
2. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Add Associative Note and select the type of
note you want to create.
3. In the Associative Note Properties dialog box, modify the note properties as required.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 145

Editing drawings
4. Select Edge chamfer from the Content list.
5. Add the elements that you want to have in the edge chamfer mark.
6. Click the edge chamfer.
If you use a leader line, you need to pick a position for the note.

Example: Edge chamfers

See below for typical examples of the ways showing edge chamfers.
In this example, Part representation is Exact and Edge chamfers are on. Background color is
used in edge chamfer lines, because you usually do not want to show edge chamfers in
printouts, but may want to see and select them in the drawing, for example, to add associative
notes.

In this second example, Part representation is Outline and Edge chamfers are on.
Background color is used in edge chamfer lines, because you may want to see and select
chamfers in the drawing, for example, to add associative notes.This representation is often used
when the scale is small and you do not need to see the small chamfers clearly. The edge
chamfer presented in the bottom right corner of the image shows what the edge chamfer looks
like when it is selected.

146 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
See also Edge chamfers in drawings (p. 143)
Displaying edge chamfers in a drawing (p. 143)

4.9 Welds in drawings

Tekla Structures shows the properties of a weld you have added in a model in a weld mark in a
drawing. You can also add welds in final drawings.

To modify the properties of the weld marks of welds that you added in
the model, you need to modify the weld in the model. When you perform
numbering, the weld marks are updated in the drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 147

Editing drawings
Above line

Below line

Arrow side for weld

Other side for weld

The weld mark contains a reference line and an arrow. The arrow connects the reference line to
the arrow side of a connection.
When parts are welded together, you can place welds on:
• The arrow sides only
• The other sides only
• Both the arrow and other sides
The welds on the arrow and other sides of a part can have different weld properties.

Example: Model welds in drawings

Example 1 In this example, the first image below is the Weld Properties dialog box in the model. The
weld properties are indicated by numbers in the dialog box. The second image shows how the
properties are displayed in a weld mark in a drawing. The same numbers are used in the weld
mark to indicate the position and appearance of the corresponding property information in the
weld. Under the images the meaning of different numbers is explained.

148 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 149
Editing drawings
Weld prefix

Weld size

Weld type

Weld angle

Weld contour symbol

Weld finishing symbol

Effective throat

Root opening

Reference text. Model welds show the weld number as well.

Edge/Around, here a weld around symbol

Workshop/Site, here a site weld symbol

Example 2 The example below shows a staggered, intermittent weld. The option Stitch weld is set to Yes,
and the length is set to 50 and the pitch to 100.

Length of weld segment

150 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Pitch (center-to-center spacing) of weld segments

Staggered, intermittent weld

The example below shows a non-staggered, intermittent weld. The option Stitch weld is set to
No, and the length is set to 50 and the pitch to 100. The pitch is shown in the weld mark, if the
pitch value is greater than 0.0.

Example 3

Adding weld marks

A weld mark is an associative annotation object that contains a set of weld properties. You can
define automatic weld marks when you create the drawing, and also add additional weld marks
in the drawing. Tekla Structures creates manual weld marks using the properties in the Weld
Mark Properties dialog box.
To add weld marks:
1. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Add Weld Mark to open the Weld Mark
Properties dialog box.
2. Enter or modify the content and the appearance of the weld mark.
To exactly place the weld mark in the position you pick and keep it there, click the
Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list.
3. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
4. Pick a position for the weld mark.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 151

Editing drawings
Example: Weld mark added in a drawing
In this example, the first image below is the Weld Mark Properties dialog box in a drawing.
The weld mark properties are indicated by numbers in the dialog box. The second image shows
how the weld mark properties are displayed in a weld mark in a drawing. The same numbers
are used in the weld mark to indicate the position and appearance of the corresponding property
information in the weld. Under the images the meaning of different numbers is explained.

152 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Weld prefix

Weld size

Weld type

Weld angle

Weld contour symbol

Weld finishing symbol

Effective throat

Root opening

Reference text. A weld mark added in a drawing does not have a weld number.

Edge/Around, here a weld around symbol

Workshop/Site, here a site weld symbol

Merging weld marks

You can force Tekla Structures to use the same mark and symbol for identical welds in a
drawing.
To merge weld marks:
1. Open a drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 153

Editing drawings
2. Hold down Ctrl and select the weld marks to merge.
3. Right-click and select Merge from the pop-up menu.
Tekla Structures combines the marks.
4. Optional: You can split merged weld marks by right-clicking the mark and selecting
Split from the pop-up menu.

Description Example
Original drawing

Merged weld marks.

4.10 Symbols in drawings

You can use symbols in drawings in various places, for example, in marks, object
representation, arrows etc. We recommended you get familiar with the Symbol Editor, so that
you can create new symbols and modify the existing ones. The Symbol Editor help is available
in PDF format on the Tekla Structures installation DVD and on the Extranet in Tekla
Structures > Self learning > Manuals & instructions.

154 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Tekla Structures searches the symbol files from folders listed in DXK_SYMBOLPATH (defined in
the environment initialization file <your_environment>.ini and in the Tekla Structures
initialization file teklastructures.ini). Alternatively, you can add your own
DXK_SYMBOLPATH in your user.ini and define your own symbol folder paths there. Note,
that also the path settings in the <your_environment>.ini file need to be added there.
The last read .ini file settings are used. At startup of Tekla Structures, the reading order of
the .ini files containing DXK_SYMBOLPATH is:
• teklastructures.ini
• <your_environment>.ini
• user.ini
All symbol files that are found are available to be used in Tekla Structures. If there are symbol
files with the same name, the one that is read last is used.
You can add symbols inside all kinds of drawing marks as elements and also in the drawings as
separate objects. With the Symbol Files browser you can easily change the symbol file in use.
Symbols can be represented in three different ways: symbols without leader lines, symbols with
leader lines and symbols along lines. Tekla Structures adds the symbol using the properties in
the Symbol properties dialog box.

Symbol Files browser

The Symbol Files browser allows you to change the symbol file in use. It also provides access
to Symbol Editor, where you can create new symbol files, and create and modify symbols.

We strongly recommend that you do not modify the original symbol files
delivered with your Tekla Structures application. If you need to modify
any symbols, copy the original symbol file and work on the copy,
keeping the original symbol file intact.

Viewing and modifying the symbol file contents

You can view and modify the contents of a symbol file.
To view or modify the contents of a symbol file:
1. Open the Mark content - symbol dialog box by selecting Symbol from the available
mark elements list in the mark properties dialog box or the Symbol properties dialog
box by selecting Annotating > Properties > Symbol.
2. Click Select... next to the File box.
3. Select a file from the Symbol Files list and click Edit. This opens the Symbol Editor.
4. If you modify the file in the Symbol Editor, save the file by clicking File and Save or
Save As.
5. Click OK.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 155

Editing drawings
In Symbol Editor, you can copy symbols between symbol files (*.sym).
Press Ctrl + C and select the symbol you would like to copy, then open
the symbol file you want to copy to (or a new symbol file), select the
location for the symbol and press Ctrl + V.

Creating a new symbol file

You can create new symbol files to be used in marks and drawings.
To create a new symbol file:
1. Open the Mark content - symbol dialog box by selecting Symbol from the available
mark elements list in the mark properties dialog box or the Symbol properties dialog
box by selecting Annotating > Properties > Symbol.
2. Click Select... next to the File box.
3. In the Symbol Files dialog box, click Create new....
4. Create the symbol in the Symbol Editor.
5. Click File > Save and save the symbol file in the folder that you use for keeping the
symbols.
6. Click Refresh in the Symbol Files browser.

Changing the symbol file in use

You can change the currently used symbol file.
To change the symbol file in use:
1. Open the Mark content - symbol dialog box by selecting Symbol from the available
mark elements list in the mark properties dialog box, or the Symbol properties dialog
box by selecting Annotating > Properties > Symbol.
2. Click Select... next to the File box.
3. Select a new file from the Symbol Files list and click OK or double-click the file.

Adding symbols in drawings

Tekla Structures adds symbols using the properties defined in the Symbol Properties dialog
box.
To add a symbol in a drawing:
1. In the drawing, hold down Shift and select Annotating > Add Symbol and one of the
three symbol commands Symbol, Symbol along Line or Symbol with Leader Line to
display the Symbol Properties dialog box.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
2. Modify the symbol properties.
3. Click OK.
4. Pick one to three points in the drawing to place the symbol. The symbol command you
selected affects the number of points to pick.

156 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Modifying symbol properties
You can modify the properties of symbols in an open drawing.
To modify the symbol properties:
1. Double-click a symbol.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch

at the bottom of the dialog box.

3. Select only the check boxes next to the properties that you want to modify.
4. If necessary, change the symbol file in use and select the symbol to use.
5. Go to the Appearance tab and set the symbol color, height and angle, and the frame
type, leader line and color.
6. Click Modify.

4.11 Additional drawing objects

Additional drawing objects are drawing objects you draw in a drawing in order to add
information to the information existing in the Tekla Structures model.
In Tekla Structures drawings, the additional drawing objects can be clouds, lines, circles,
rectangles, arcs, polylines, and polygons.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 157

Editing drawings
Defining customized line types (p. 345)

4.12 Changing drawing objects

You can move, copy, reshape, resize, trim, split and divide drawing objects added in the
drawing. For objects that have leader lines, you can modify the shape of the leader line. What
you can do to an object depends on the object type.

Dragging, reshaping and resizing drawing objects

Many drawing objects, such as lines, arcs, circles, polylines, polygons, rectangles, clouds, text
file frames, link frames, DWG/DXF file frames, and dimension lines have handles. You use
these handles to reshape, and resize objects. You can also drag the objects.
Before you start, click a drawing object or and object frame to activate it and show the handles.
Do any of the following:

158 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
To Do this
Drag the object Point the object or object frame, hold down the left mouse button
and drag the object to a new location.
The object follows the cursor while you drag the object, and you
can all the time see what the end result will be.
With circles, you can also use the middle handle for dragging.
Resize the object 1. Click one of the objects or object frame handles.
2. Drag the handle to resize the object or object frame.
To enlarge the rectangle in all directions, drag from a corner
handle.

Reshape the object 1. Click the middle handle of a line or a handle on the cloud,
polyline or polygon.
2. Drag the handle to reshape the object.

If you drag an annotation object, its placing setting may be set to fixed
depending what its set for the advanced options
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED,
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_MARKS_TO_FIXED,
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_NOTES_TO_FIXED, and
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_TEXTS_TO_FIXED.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 159

Editing drawings
Arranging drawing objects
You can use the Arrange Drawing Objects (Freeplace) command to position drawing objects.
Tekla Structures positions the objects using the protection properties set for the drawing and the
placing properties of each object type.
To arrange drawing objects:
1. Double-click the open drawing, click Protection..., check the drawing protection
properties and modify them as required.
2. Click Modify.
3. Double-click drawing objects, and then click Place... to check and modify the placing
settings.
If the object is set to Fixed, the Arrange Drawing Objects command has no effect.
4. Click Modify.
5. In the drawing, select the drawing objects you want to arrange.
6. Do one of the following:
• Click View > Arrange Drawing Objects (Freeplace) > Near Current Locations.
Tekla Structures positions the selected drawing objects so that they do not overlap
other objects. Objects located in a free location are not moved, and overlapping
objects are moved as close to the current location as possible.
• Click View > Arrange Drawing Objects (Freeplace) > Ignore Current Locations.
Tekla Structures positions the selected drawing objects so that they do not overlap
with other objects without checking the current location of the objects.

Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views

You can hide selected drawing objects in drawings and drawing views. When you hide a part,
Tekla Structures will hide all its related objects.

If an object is hidden in drawing views it will not be printed.

To hide drawing objects:

1. Check that the ghost outline selection is the one that you need in Tools > Options >
Ghost Outline. In colored drawings, hidden objects are shown as ghost outlines, if this
setting is selected. In grayscale and black and white drawings, hidden objects are not
shown even if Ghost Outline is selected.
2. Select the desired color mode by pressing B.
3. Select the objects you want to hide.
4. Click View > Hide/Show Object and one of the following options:
• Hide from Drawing View. Tekla Structures hides the selected object in the view you
select it.
• Hide from Drawing. Tekla Structures hides the selected object in all views.
Example Below are some examples of the results with different combinations of selections.

160 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Setting Example
Color mode is set to Color. No objects are
hidden. Part marks are shown.

Color mode is set to Color. Ghost Outline is

not selected. Parts are hidden and related part
marks are not shown.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 161

Editing drawings
Setting Example
Color mode is set to Color. Ghost Outline is
selected. Hidden parts are shown as ghost
outlines and related part marks are not shown.

Color mode is set to Black and White. Ghost

Outline is selected, but it has no effect on black
and white drawings. Parts are hidden and related
part marks are not shown.

162 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Listing hidden parts in drawings
You can select whether to list the hidden parts in drawings, for example, in the material list.
1. Open a drawing containing hidden parts.
2. Double-click the drawing to open the drawing properties dialog box.
3. Click Layout....
4. On the Drawing size tab, select whether you want to list the hidden parts in List hidden
objects in templates. No removes all information about the hidden parts, also from the
total weight.
5. Click Modify.
In the example below, the hidden reinforcing bars are listed.

In the example below, the hidden reinforcing bars are not listed.

Limitations Listing hidden objects does not work in all templates. It works in templates containing PART
rows, but not in hierarchical templates. For example, if the template is of type ASSEMBLY -
PART, and the Assembly is included in the drawing, all of its parts will also be included.

See also Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views (p. 160)

Trimming
You can shorten or extend a line relative to the boundary you select in an open drawing. The
boundary can be a line, part, arc, or rectangle, for example.
To trim a line:
1. Click Edit > Trim.
2. Select the object to be used as a boundary.
3. Click the middle mouse button.
4. Do one of the following:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 163

Editing drawings
To Do this
Extend the line Click the end of the line to extend it to the boundary line.
Original lines:

The extended line:

Shorten the line from Click the line at the end from which you want to shorten it.
the left end
Original line:

164 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
To Do this
Shorten the line from Line clicked at the left end:
the right end

Line clicked at the right end:

2. Click Edit > Split.

3. Pick a point on the line to indicate the location for splitting.

4. Tekla Structures splits the line into two.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 165

Editing drawings
Dividing
You can divide an object into a number of segments that you specify in an open drawing. You
can divide lines and arcs.
To divide a single line into four lines of equal length:
1. Select the line.

2. Click Edit > Divide.

3. In the displayed Segments dialog box, enter the number of segments, for example 4,
and click OK.
Tekla Structures divides the line into four lines.

Modifying the shape of leader lines

You can modify the shape of the leader line for any independent and associative annotation
objects that have leader lines.
To modify the leader line shape:
1. Select the leader line you want to modify
2. Drag from the middle point of the line.
3. Drag further from the created handle points and new middle points.

See also Modifying part mark leader line with advanced options (p. 312)
Moving the mark leader line base point (p. 133)
Changing drawing objects (p. 158)
Placing the base point of the reinforcement mark leader line automatically (p. 313)
Changing drawing objects (p. 158)

166 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
4.13 Using drawing tools
You can use drawings tools to edit and finalize drawings.
With the drawing tools you can:
• Align drawing objects
• Create fillets
• Create straight and round chamfers
• Copy with offsets
• Create, delete and update moment connection symbols
• Create, delete and update cut lines
To start using the drawing tools:
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.

If your environment does not contain this macro, you can start it by
double-clicking the file Drawingtools.exe in the folder
..\Program
Files\TeklaStructures\<version>\nt\bin\applicati
ons\tekla\Drawings.

Contents Aligning drawing objects (p. 167)

Creating fillets (p. 168)
Creating chamfers (p. 169)
Copying with offsets (p. 170)
Managing moment connection symbols (p. 171)
Managing cut lines (p. 173)

Aligning drawing objects

You can align objects to the bottom, to the vertical center, to the left, to the horizontal center, to
the right, and to the top. You can also position objects horizontally or vertically at equal
distances from each other.
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.
3. Select the objects that you want to align.
4. Select the aligning command from the toolbar.

5. If you selected one of the two commands that position objects at equal distance, type the
distance in the displayed dialog box.

To create a row of objects, align them first to the top and then position
them horizontally at equal distances from each other. You do not need to
reselect the objects between the two commands.

Example Below is an example where marks have been aligned to left.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 167

Editing drawings
Creating fillets
With the Create Fillet command you can connect two intersecting lines by extending the two
selected lines to their intersection point. If no intersection point is found or if it is outside the
drawing, nothing will be done.
To create a fillet:
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.
3. Select two intersecting lines.

4. Click the Create Fillet in the Drawing tools toolbar.

168 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Creating chamfers
You can create chamfers between two lines using the distance that you specify. You can create
both straight and round chamfers.
To create a chamfer:
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.
3. Select two intersecting lines.
4. Do one of the following:

a To create a straight chamfer, click Create Straight Chamfer in the Drawing

tools toolbar.
Enter the distance that you want to have between the two lines (the length of the
chamfer line) in the displayed dialog box.

b To create a round chamfer, click Create Round Chamfer in the Drawing

tools toolbar.
Enter the desired radius in the displayed dialog box.

Example Example of a straight chamfer:

Example of a round chamfer:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 169

Editing drawings
Copying with offsets
You can copy lines and circles with offsets. You can copy lines to a new location in the
direction you point using the offset that you specify. You can also create new circles centered in
the same location as the original circle and adjust the radius by the offset that you specify.
To copy with offset:
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.
3. Select the object that you want to copy.

4. Click Copy with Offset in the Drawing tools toolbar.

5. Enter the offset in the dialog box that is displayed.
6. Click the view in the direction where you want to copy the object. If you are copying a
line, Tekla Structures makes a new copy of the line in the specified location. If you are
copying a circle, Tekla Structures creates a new circle that is centered in the same
location as the original circle, and adjusts the radius by the offset that you specified.

Example Example of a copied line:

170 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Example of a copied circle:

Managing moment connection symbols

Moment connections show the beams that are connected to columns with rigid connections.
With drawing tools you can manage moment connection symbols: create, update and delete
them.

Contents Creating moment connection symbols (p. 171)

Updating moment connection symbols (p. 172)
Deleting moment connection symbols (p. 172)
User-defined attributes

Creating moment connection symbols

You can create moment connection symbols to show the beams that are connected to columns
with rigid connections. The symbols are created according to part end releases. You can create
moment connection symbols automatically for all parts in the view, or for selected parts.
To create moment connection symbols:
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.

3. Click Create moment connection symbols in the Drawing tools toolbar.

4. In the Create moment connection symbols dialog box, select the color for the symbols
from the color list.
5. In the Create moment connection symbols dialog box, enter a scale for the symbols in
the box next to the color list.
6. Do one of the following:
a To create moment connection symbols for all parts in the view, select the view.
b To create moment connection symbols for selected parts, select the parts.
7. Click Create.
The moment connection symbols are created according to part and connection release
properties:
• If a connection exists, start and end release information is read from the Start releases and
End releases tabs in the part analysis properties dialog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 171

Editing drawings
• If a connection does not exist, release information is read from the End conditions tab in
the user-defined attributes dialog box of the part.

Limitations • Moment connection symbols are created to reference lines. This means that offsets are not
taken into use.

Example

Updating moment connection symbols

To update moment connection symbols:
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.

3. Click Create moment connection symbols in the Drawing tools toolbar.

4. Do one of the following:
a To update the moment connection symbols of all parts in the view, select the
view.
b To update the moment connection symbols of selected parts, select the parts.
5. Click Create.
When you do this, Tekla Structures removes all previously created symbols, and creates new
ones that are up-to-date.

Deleting moment connection symbols

To delete moment connection symbols:
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.

3. Click Create moment connection symbols in the Drawing tools toolbar.

4. Do one of the following:
a To delete the moment connection symbols of all parts in the view, select the view.
b To delete the moment connection symbols of selected parts, select the parts.
5. Click Delete.

172 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Managing cut lines
Cut lines are lines that are displayed using a zigzag or a dash-and-dot to show that the line is
partially outside the view border. With drawing tools you can manage cut lines: create, update
and delete them.

Contents Creating cut lines (p. 173)

Updating cut lines (p. 173)
Deleting cut lines (p. 174)

Creating cut lines

You can create cut lines to show the lines that are partially outside the view border. You can
create cut lines automatically for all parts in the view, or for selected parts.
To create cut lines:
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.

3. Click Create cut lines in the Drawing tools toolbar.

4. In the Create cut lines dialog box, select the type (zigzag or dash-and-dot) for the line
from the list of types.
5. In the Create cut lines dialog box, select the color for the line from the color list.
6. In the Create cut lines dialog box, enter a scale for the line in the box next to the list of
types.
7. Do one of the following:
a To create cut lines for all parts in the view, select the view.
b To create cut lines for selected parts, select the parts.
8. Click Create.

Limitations • Cut lines cannot be created for polybeams.

• View extension for neighbor parts setting is not taken into account.

Example

Updating cut lines

To update cut lines:
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.

3. Click Create cut lines in the Drawing tools toolbar.

4. Do one of the following:
a To update the cut lines of all parts in the view, select the view.
b To update the cut lines of selected parts, select the parts.
5. Click Create.
When you do this, Tekla Structures removes all previously created cut lines, and creates new
ones that are up-to-date.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 173

Editing drawings
Deleting cut lines
To delete cut lines:
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.

3. Click Create cut lines in the Drawing tools toolbar.

4. Do one of the following:
a To delete the cut lines of all parts in the view, select the view.
b To delete the cut lines of selected parts, select the parts.
5. Click Delete.

4.14 Grids in drawings

You can show grids and grid line labels in single-part, cast unit, assembly, and general
arrangement drawings.
You can manually modify the grid properties in an open drawing.

Adding or removing grid lines in the model may cause unwanted

changes in general arrangement drawings in some cases. You should
avoid modifying grids after the general arrangement drawings are
created, or set
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_ASSOCIATE_VIEWS_TO_GRIDS to TRUE.

See also Modifying grid and grid line properties (p. 174)
Hiding grids or grid lines (p. 175)
Moving grid labels (p. 175)
Grid properties (p. 407)
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_ASSOCIATE_VIEWS_TO_GRIDS

Modifying grid and grid line properties

You can modify grid properties on the drawing and view levels, and modify individual grids or
grid lines in an open drawing.

Ensure that you have the correct selection switch selected. To modify

grids, use the selection switch and to modify grid lines, use

To modify grid properties:

1. Double-click the grid or the grid line. Tekla Structures opens the Grid Properties or
Grid Line Properties dialog box.
2. Visible shows the grid lines in the drawing. If you want to see the labels only, select
Only grid labels visible.
3. Modify the label text placing, grid line and text settings as required.
4. Click Modify.

174 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
See also Grids in drawings (p. 174)
Grid properties (p. 407)
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR

Moving grid labels

You can move single grid labels. This is useful, for example, if the label is covering an
important area in a drawing.
To move a grid label:

1. Ensure that you have the grid line selection switch selected .
2. Click a grid label.
3. Hold down Shift and drag the label by the label handle to a new position.

Hiding grids or grid lines

You can hide grids and grid lines.

Ensure that you have the correct selection switch selected. To hide grids,

use the selection switch and to hide grid lines, use .

To hide a grid or a grid line:

1. Click a grid or a grid line.
2. Right-click the grid or the grid line and select Hide > Hide from drawing view from
the pop-up menu.

4.15 Colors in drawings

You have three basic color modes for line colors in drawings. The color modes are Black and
White, Gray Scale, and Color. By default, drawings are black and white.
In addition to the three basic color modes, you can have a black background and colored lines
in drawings.

Colors and gray The table below shows the colors available in Tekla Structures, and how the different colors are
shades shown in black and white drawings and in gray scale drawings. The corresponding pen
numbers are also listed.

Name Pen Tekla Structures Black and Gray scale Lightness

color white
Invisible 9 Invisible
Black 7 0%

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 175

Editing drawings
Name Pen Tekla Structures Black and Gray scale Lightness
color white
Red 1 0%
Green 3 0%
Blue 5 0%
Cyan 4 0%
Yellow 2 0%
Magenta 6 0%
Brown 15 30%
Dark green 110 50%
Dark blue 141 70%
Blue-green 111 90%
Orange 31 100% white
Gray 8 60%
Special - -

Changing drawing color

You can change the color of the drawings.
To change the drawing color:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Tools > Options > Drawing Color Mode, and select Black and White, Gray
Scale or Color.
You can toggle between the modes by pressing B on the keyboard.

You can change the background color to black using the advanced
option XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND. If the background is black,
use Color as color mode.

Example Below is an example of a color drawing.

176 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
In grayscale mode, the colors from 1 to 7 (black, red, green, blue, cyan, yellow, magenta) are
shown in black, and the colors from 8 to 14 (brown, dark green, dark blue, blue-green, orange,
gray) are shown in different shades of gray. Below is an example of a gray scale drawing.

Below is an example of a black-and-white drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 177

Editing drawings
See also XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND
Colors in drawings (p. 175)

Specifying and using special color

You can define a special color that is not converted to black when printed. This color will be
printed as color or grayscale, depending on the selected printer settings. The special color is
defined using RGB (Red Green Blue) values in a scale of 0 to 255.
You can specify a special color for a building object before creating a drawing, and use it in the
final drawing for shape or a building object.
To define and use a special color in a final drawing:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Hatching.
2. Define the color using the following advanced options:
• XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
• XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G
• XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B
The default value is black (0, 0, 0).
The smaller the values are, the darker the shade.
3. Click OK or Apply.
4. Open a drawing.
5. Double-click a drawing object to open the properties dialog box. For example, click a
building object or a rectangle.
6. Select a fill type.
7. Select the Special fill color.
8. Click Modify.

178 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
See also XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B
Colors in drawings (p. 175)
Colors and line weights in printing (p. 199)

Pen numbers in Color Table

Pen number refers to the line weights used in the printed drawing. By default, pen 0 has a line
weight of 0.1 mm. The final line thickness in a printed drawing is the default pen thickness
multiplied by the pen number.
• You can change the default pen thickness using the advanced option
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH.
• The line thicknesses displayed on the screen are taken from the first printer on the Printer
instances list in the Printer Catalog.
• In color drawings, Tekla Structures shows the lines with different line thicknesses only
with the setting Use Printer Linewidths (Tools > Options).
• In black and white drawings, Tekla Structures shows the black lines on the screen using
thickness defined for the color with the pen number.

Changing the pen numbers for colors

You can change the pen numbers for the colors to show and print lines with different
thicknesses.
To change the pen numbers:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Drawing File > Print Drawings > Add/Edit > Printer Catalog....
3. Select the printer instance.
To be able to see the changes on the screen, you need to make the changes to the first
printer instance on the list. Otherwise, you will see the different line weights only in the
printed drawing.
4. Click Color Table.
5. Enter or change a pen number.
6. Click OK in the Color Table.
7. Click Update in the Printer Catalog.
8. Save the changes when prompted to do so.
9. Close the Printer Catalog.
10. Close the drawing and open it again to see the changes if you changed the pen numbers
for the first printer instance.
11. In a color drawing, click Tools > Options and select Use Printer Linewidths, otherwise
you cannot see the changes on the screen.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 179

Editing drawings
4.16 User coordinate system (UCS)
The UCS is a local user coordinate system you can use in a drawing view. It is easier to
position drawing objects in view drawing, when you place objects relative to a user-defined
point of origin, or base point in the drawing view.
Tekla Structures shows the UCS symbol in the current drawing view, when you create, copy,
move, or modify graphical objects.

You can define a different point of origin for the UCS for each drawing view, and change the
UCS point of origin as often as you like.
The following example shows several views, each with their own UCS.

To position an object using the global coordinate system, you need to

calculate the coordinates of the object from the point of origin of the
drawing.

See also Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System (p. 103)
Setting a new UCS (p. 181)
Toggling between two user coordinate systems (p. 181)
Resetting UCS (p. 181)

180 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
Setting a new UCS
You can set a new UCS using one point or two points.
To set a new UCS:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) and select one of the following
commands:
• Select Set Origin to set the new UCS using one point.
• Select Set by Two Points to set the new UCS using two points.
Tekla Structures displays the UCS symbol with a crosshair marking the center point.
3. Click the view where you want to place the origin.
4. If you are using two points, pick a point to define the direction of the x axis.

Toggling between two user coordinate systems

You can toggle between two user coordinate systems that have the same point of origin: the
UCS following the axes of the drawing view and the oriented UCS you have created.
To toggle between the coordinate systems, do one of the following:
• Press Ctrl + T.
• Click Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) > Toggle Orientation.

4.17 Saving drawings

Tekla Structures automatically saves drawings at set intervals. You can also save your drawing
when ever you want to.
To save a drawing:
• In the open drawing, click Drawing File > Save.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 181

Editing drawings
Closing drawings (p. 182)
Autosave

4.18 Closing drawings

You can only have one drawing open at a time. Tekla Structures always has to close an open
drawing before you can open another one.
To close a drawing:
1. Click the Close button in the upper-right corner of the drawing window.
2. If you have made changes in the drawing, Tekla Structures asks you if you want to save
your changes.

182 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Editing drawings
5 Working with drawings

This section explains how to work with and manage the drawings you have created.

Contents Finding and opening drawings (p. 71)

Updating drawings when the model changes (p. 183)
Locking and unlocking drawings (p. 184)
Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings (p. 185)
Issuing drawings (p. 186)
Deleting drawings (p. 186)
Revising drawings (p. 186)
Printing drawings (p. 188)
Preview images of drawings (p. 200)

5.1 Updating drawings when the model changes

You need to update drawings of parts that have changed after the drawing was saved the last
time. The drawings needing updates are indicated by flags in the Drawing List. General
arrangement drawings do not need to be updated. Renumbering model objects after creating
drawings may also generate flags.
Do the following after changing the model:
1. Check the numbering settings by clicking Drawings & Reports > Numbering >
Numbering Settings.... Select Compare to old for both the new and modified parts.
2. Number all model objects that have same numbering series settings by clicking
Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects, or number
only new or modified model objects by clicking Drawings & Reports > Numbering >
Number Modified Objects.
3. Check the drawing list for status flags.

4. To find the parts that have been affected, select each drawing marked with the flag
in the Drawing List and click the Select objects button.
Tekla Structures highlights the affected parts in the model. Do the following:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 183

Working with drawings
a Check the numbering history log for renumbered parts by clicking Tools >
Display Log File > Numbering History....
Part or Assembly at the beginning of a line in the numbering history log
indicates that Tekla Structures has renumbered parts or assemblies, as in the
following example:

b To find the renumbered parts in the model, select the relevant entries from the
numbering history log. Tekla Structures highlights the corresponding parts in the
model.
5. Select the affected drawings from the Drawing List and click Update.
6. Optional: If you have new parts in the model, create drawings for them.

5.2 Locking and unlocking drawings

You can indicate that a drawing is not available for editing by locking it. When a drawing is
locked, it cannot be accidentally modified. Locking prevents the drawings from being opened,
updated, cloned, deleted, or modified, even if the model changes. Tekla Structures flags locked
drawings for update if the model changes.
To lock and unlock drawings:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawing(s) you want to lock.
2. Click Lock > On.
3. To unlock the drawings, select the drawings and click Lock > Off.

5.3 Freezing drawings

You can select whether to allow Tekla Structures to update all associative objects on top of the
drawing views. The geometry of the model is always updated, but freezing is used to stop the
drawing intelligence (associativity) of drawing objects on top of the model views, and prevents
them from being updated. For example, parts are updated, but dimensions, associative notes,
text, marks, views, additional drawing objects are not.

184 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Working with drawings
See also Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings (p. 185)
Freezing and unfreezing single part, cast unit and assembly drawings (p. 185)
How freezing affects drawings (p. 185)
Working with drawings (p. 183)
Selecting drawings in the Drawing List (p. 76)
Updating marks (p. 130)

Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings

To freeze a drawing if something has not gone the way you want:
1. If you have the drawing open, close it without saving it.
2. In the Drawing List, select the drawing you want to freeze.
3. Click Freeze > On.
4. When freezing is no longer necessary, select the frozen drawings and click Freeze > Off.

How freezing affects drawings

Freezing affects drawings in the following way:
• The associativity does not disappear from a frozen drawing. When you unfreeze the
drawing, the associativity works again.
• Freezing does not have any effect on the cloning result. If you edit the drawing, it does not
matter whether you freeze the drawing before or after editing it.
• If a drawing is frozen, the associative drawing objects are not updated when the drawing is
updated. This means that the dimensions and views are not updated, and the marks do not
follow the parts if the parts have been moved.
• If a drawing is frozen, and the part changes in the model, the geometry of the part is
updated in the frozen drawing when the drawing is updated.
• Unfreezing the drawing before cloning does not have any effect on the cloning result. This
means, for example, that it does not matter whether you keep the drawing frozen all the
time or temporarily unfreeze it before cloning.
• If you unfreeze a drawing before update, the drawing is updated normally.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 185

Working with drawings
5.4 Issuing drawings
When a drawing is released for fabrication, it should be marked as issued in the Drawing List.
Issued drawings are not updated when the model changes. This information can be used to
filter the Drawing List and in templates.
To issue drawings:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawings to be issued.
2. Select Issue > On.
Tekla Structures marks the issued drawings with a flag
When an issued drawing has been edited or otherwise changed, the color of the flag
changes and the text Issued drawing changed is displayed.

To show the issue date in a report, add the template field DATE_ISSUE in
the appropriate report template.

5.5 Deleting drawings

You can delete drawings in the Drawing List.
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawings you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. When Tekla Structures asks you to confirm the deletion, select Yes.

If you press down Shift, Tekla Structures will not ask you to confirm the
deletion.

5.6 Revising drawings

When you revise drawings, you can attach information to them about the changes you have
made. Tekla Structures displays this information alongside the revision number or mark. The
revision date also appears in the revision table within drawings. The revision number or mark is
also shown in the Drawing List by default. Revision information can also be used in reports.
You can revise drawings through the Drawing List or when the drawing is open. When you
revise the drawings using Add Revision Mark in an open drawing, Tekla Structures creates
marks in the drawing indicating the places where the changes have been made.

186 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Working with drawings
The report drawing_issue_rev.xsr shows the most recent revision dates of drawings.

To show the revision mark instead of the revision number in the

Drawing List, set the advanced option
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST to TRUE.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 187

Working with drawings
Deleting revisions
You can delete unnecessary revisions.
To delete a revision:
1. Select a revised drawing from the Drawing List.
2. Click Revision....
3. In the Revision Handling dialog box, select the revision number from the list next to the
Mark field.
4. Click Delete.
When you delete a revision, Tekla Structures automatically adjusts the remaining
revision numbers for that drawing. The revision marks do not change.

5.7 Printing drawings

Tekla Structures prints drawings to selected printers, to print files, and to PDF. Printing can be
started from the Drawing List or from an open drawing.
We do not cover setting up printers in the Microsoft Windows environment. It is assumed that
print devices already have been set up and tested in your environment. For further information
about on setting up printers, contact your system administrator.

Printing single drawings

There are many ways you can start printing single drawings: you can use menu commands,
icons, and pop-up menu commands.
Before you print the drawing, check that the printer instance settings are correct and the layout
contains the correct drawing size settings.
To print single drawings using menu commands in an open drawing:
1. In the drawing, click Drawing File > Print Drawings....
2. In the Print Drawings dialog box, select the printer instance you want to use.
3. Optional: Modify the printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the printout.
4. Click Print.

188 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Working with drawings
Shortcut for opening the Print Drawings dialog box: Shift + P.

Example: Printing on A4 in landscape

This example describes how you can print on A4 paper in landscape style in black and white.

In this example, it is assumed that the print area h*b is defined h being
along the longer side of the paper and b being along the shorter side of
the paper. When using some other printer driver you might have to
change h*b values if you find out that the printer driver uses h along the
short side of the paper.

To print on A4 in landscape in black and white when a drawing is open:

1. In drawing properties dialog box, click Layout.
2. Set Size definition mode to Specified size and set Drawing size to 287 * 200.
You can also use Autosize. Then you need to make sure that you have defined
appropriate Fixed sizes or Calculated sizes.
3. Click Modify and OK.
4. Select Drawing File > Print Drawings....
5. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click the printer instance you want to use.
6. Click Add/Edit and check that the printer settings are correct:
• Paper size: A4 210 x 297 mm
• Print area h*b: 287 x 200
• Color: Black/white
7. Click Update.
8. Click OK.
9. Set Scaling to Scale and enter 1.
In this case also Scaling setting Auto would produce a similar printout because drawing
size and h*b are the same.
10. Set Orientation to Landscape (or Auto).
11. Set Print area to Entire Drawing.
12. Click Print.

Example: Printing on A3 in portrait

This example describes how you can print on A3 paper in portrait style in black and white.
You can print from the Drawing List or when a drawing is open.
To print on A3 in portrait in black and white when a drawing is open:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 189

Working with drawings
1. In drawing properties dialog box, click Layout.
2. Set Size definition mode to Specified size and set Drawing size to 287 * 410.
You can also use Autosize. Then you need to make sure that you have defined
appropriate Fixed sizes or Calculated sizes.
3. Click Modify and OK.
4. Select Drawing File > Print Drawings....
5. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click the printer instance you want to use.
6. Click Add/Edit and check that the printer settings are correct:
• Paper size: A3 297 x 420 mm.
• Print area h*b: 410 x 287
• Color: Black/white
7. Click Update.
8. Click OK.
9. Set Scaling to Scale and enter 1.
10. Set Orientation to Portrait (or Auto).
11. Set Print area to Entire Drawing.
12. Click Print.

Printing multiple drawings with different sizes in one go

You can print multiple drawings from the Drawing List. You can print drawings of different
sizes at the same time.
To print multiple drawings:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawings you want to print.

2. Click the Print drawings icon .

3. In the Print Drawings dialog box, indicate the printers you want to use.
To select several printers, hold down Ctrl and select the printers.
If you select drawings of several sizes and several printers, Tekla Structures sends each
drawing to the printer that is using the smallest paper size on which the drawing will fit.
For example, if you have two printers selected, one A4 and one A3, Tekla Structures will
send A4 drawings to the A4 printer and A3 to the A3 printer.
4. If you selected several printers, set Scale to 1.
5. If necessary, modify other printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the
printout.
6. Click Print.

190 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Working with drawings
Specify the folder. You can use the folder specified during printer instance setup or click
Browse... to locate the destination folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box.
If you do not enter a folder, Tekla Structures creates the files in the current model folder
or in the folder defined by the advanced option XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY.
5. Optional: Modify other printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the printout.
6. Click Print.
Tekla Structures prints the selected drawings to files in the specified folder using the drawing
names.

Customizing print file names

By default, Tekla Structures uses the drawing names as print file names. You can customize
these file names using an advanced option indicating the drawing type, and entering switches
defining the format of the print file name as a value.
To customize the filenames:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Printing.
2. Enter switches for the advanced options XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A,
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W, XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G,
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M, and XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C
You can also combine several switches. The switches are not case sensitive.
3. Click OK.

Example The example below results in the filename E_P1_PLATE_Revision=2.dxf:

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A=E_%NAME.%_%TITLE%%REV?_Revisi
on=%%REV%.dxf

See also Switches for customizing print file names (p. 191)
Printing to file (p. 190)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G

Switches for customizing print file names

Use the following switches when you want to customize the print file name format.

Example of the
Switch result Description
%NAME% P_1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position,
using the filename format
%DRAWING_NAME%
prefix_number.
%NAME.-% P-1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position,
using the filename format prefix-
%DRAWING_NAME.-%
number.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 191

Working with drawings
Example of the
Switch result Description
%NAME.% P1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position,
using the filename format
%DRAWING_NAME.%
prefixnumber.
%REV% 2 Drawing revision number, if
Include revision mark to filename
%REVISION%
is checked in the Print Drawings
%DRAWING_REVISION% dialog box.
%REV_MARK% B Drawing revision mark, if Include
revision mark to filename is
%REVISION_MARK%
checked in the Print Drawings
%DRAWING_REVISION_MAR dialog box.
K%
%TITLE% PLATE Drawing name from the drawing
%DRAWING_TITLE%
properties dialog box.

%UDA:<drawing user- Painted Value of a drawing user-defined

defined attribute>% attribute that can be found in
Template Editor.
%REV? - <text>% 2 - Rev Adds conditional prefixes. In this
example, if REV exists, Tekla
Structures adds the text between ?
and % to the filename.
%TPL:<template Base plate You can use here template
attribute>% attributes, for example, drawing title
template attributes TITLE1,
TITLE2, and TITLE3. The actual
values for these attributes are
entered in the drawing properties
dialog box.

Creating PDF files

You can use any standard PDF printer to create PDF files in Tekla Structures, such as
pdfFactory, Win2PDF or Adobe Acrobat.
Before you start creating PDF files using Adobe Acrobat, ensure that you have Adobe Acrobat
and Adobe Distiller installed and configured with the Adobe Postscript Printer Driver set up
to print to file. Consult your Adobe documentation for more information.
Also ensure that you have an Adobe postscript printer instance in the Tekla Structures printer
catalog.
To create PDF files:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawings of which you want to make PDF files.

2. Click the Print drawings icon .

3. In the Print Drawings dialog box, select the PDF printer instances you want to use.

192 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Working with drawings
If you select several printer instances, Tekla Structures sends each drawing to the printer
instance that is using the smallest paper size on which the drawing will fit. For example,
if you have two printer instances selected, one A4 and one A3, Tekla Structures will
send A4 drawings to the A4 printer and A3 to the A3 printer.
4. Optional: Modify the printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the PDF.
5. Click Print.
Tekla Structures creates the PDF files and saves them in the folder that you specified
when you defined the printer instance. The file will have the name shown in the
Drawing List with the extension ps.

Limitations Do not use the Print to file option when you create PDF files.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 193

Working with drawings
See also Printing single drawings (p. 188)
Printing multiple drawings with different sizes in one go (p. 190)
Drawing frames and foldmarks (p. 195)
Setting up printer instances (p. 197)
Print area h*b (p. 199)
Printing drawings (p. 188)
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST
XS_PLOT_VIEW_FRAMES

Printing to multiple sheets

Before printing to multiple sheets, make sure that the layout of the drawing supports printing
on several smaller sheets. Remember that Tekla Structures automatically adds a 5 mm margin
to the printouts.
Also ensure that you have set up the printer instance correctly for printing to multiple sheets.
To print on several smaller sheets:
1. In the drawing, click Drawing File > Print Drawings....
2. In the Print Drawings dialog box, select the printer you want to use.
3. Select the Print on multiple sheets option.
4. Set Scaling:
• Auto: this prints everything in the print area defined in Print area h*b setting for the
printer instance. Tekla Structures rounds the amount of sheets to the nearest number
and scales the drawing down.
• Scale = 1: Preserves the scale. The number of sheets is rounded up. The location of
the drawing contents on the paper may vary.
Tekla Structures calculates the required amount of sheets needed to print the drawing.
5. Optional: Modify other printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the printout.
If you set Orientation to Auto, Tekla Structures selects an orientation that results in the
smallest number of printed sheets.

Tekla Structures prints the drawing to multiple sheets so that it prints the lower right corner the
first, and the upper left corner the last (see the numbered sheets in the example below).
If you want to have drawing frames and/or the title blocks for each smaller size sheet, you need
to use proper table layout as shown in the example below.

194 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Working with drawings
Use the advanced option XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER to set
borders that are left out from the smaller sheets.

Drawing frames and foldmarks

You can have a frame around drawing contents, or two drawing frames inside each other. You
can add default Tekla Structures frames around the drawing contents, or use DWG/DXF files in
the table layouts as drawing frames.
You can create foldmarks as guides for folding printed drawings. They are small lines between
and perpendicular to the drawing frames.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 195

Working with drawings
Frames

Foldmark

Adding frames and foldmarks in printouts

To add frames and foldmarks:
1. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click Frames....
2. In the Drawing Frame Properties dialog box, select the check box(es) of the frame(s)
you want to print.
3. In Margins, enter in millimeters the distance between each frame and the left, right,
bottom, and top edge of the paper.
4. Select a color for each frame.
5. To print the foldmarks, select the Foldmarks check box.
6. Enter in millimeters the horizontal and vertical distances of the first foldmarks from the
lower right corner of the outer frame, and between the other foldmark.
7. Select a color for the foldmarks.
8. Click OK.

Using a DWG/DXF file as a frame

DWG/DXF files can be used as drawing frames. You can do this by adding the DWG/DXF file
in the table layout of the drawing.
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout....
2. Select a layout and click Table layout....
3. Select a table layout and click Tables....
4. Double-click DWG/DXF in the Available tables list.
5. Select the file and click OK.
6. Click Update.
7. Set the Scale.

196 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Working with drawings
8. Select Transparent.
9. Click OK.

Setting up printer instances

Tekla Structures uses Microsoft Windows printer drivers to write the printed data directly to a
printer, print file or PDF file. There are two stages in setting up printers in Tekla Structures:
First, you need to add a printer instance in the Printer Catalog. By default, several printer
instances are already defined. Next, you need connect the printer instances to printer drivers
and adjust the printer instance settings. You can also connect one printer driver to several
instances, for example, to print in different sizes.

Adding a printer instance

To add a printer instance in Tekla Structures Printer Catalog:
1. In the model, click File > Print > Printer Catalog....
2. In the Printer Catalog dialog box, click an existing printer instance that has similar
settings to the one you want to add.
3. Enter a name for the new printer instance in the box under the Printer instances list.
4. Click Add.
5. Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box, which shows a list of Microsoft
Windows printer drivers currently configured in your system.
6. Click a printer driver and then OK.
7. Select the paper size.
8. Enter the print area in Print area h*b (height and width).
9. If necessary, use Offset for print origin to move the drawing print origin.
10. Select Black/white or Color. If you select Color, Tekla Structures prints lines with the
colors defined in the drawing properties.
11. Click Color table to map pen size to the on-screen line color. The background color is
not printed.
12. Click Update.
13. Click OK.
14. Confirm that you want to save changes to the model folder.

Adding a print-to-file instance

To add a print-to-file instance in the Printer Catalog:
1. In Printer Catalog, click Add.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 197

Working with drawings
2. Enter a printer instance name for the printer driver, followed immediately (no spaces) by
@path\folder\. The folder must already exist. For example, 11X17@d:\small\
You can also leave the folder out. If you do this, Tekla Structures prints the file in the
current model folder or in the folder specified for the advanced option
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY.

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY overrides the folder defined in

the Printer Catalog.

3. Click Add.
4. Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box and click a printer driver that is
configured to print to file and then click OK.
5. In Paper size, select By print area.
6. Enter the print area in Print area h*b.
7. Enter a file extension, for example, plt for a print file.
8. Select Color or Black/white as the color.
9. Click Color table... to map pen size to the on-screen line color.
10. Click Update.
11. Click OK.
12. Confirm that you want to save changes to the model folder.

One way to send different drawing sizes to different folders is to set up a

Microsoft Windows printer to print to file for each paper size you will
use. Enter a different destination folder for each paper size in the Printer
instances in Tekla Structures.

Adding an Adobe postscript printer instance

To add a Adobe postscript printer instance to the Printer Catalog:
1. In Printer Catalog, click Add.
2. Enter a new printer instance name followed immediately (no spaces) by @ and the
folder where Adobe Distiller should look for files. For example,
A4_PDF@c:\plots\pdf\in\ .
3. Click Add.
4. Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box. Click the Adobe postscript
printer driver and then OK.
5. Set Paper size to By print area.
6. Enter the print area in Print area h*b.
7. Enter the file extension ps.
8. Select Black/white as the color.
9. Click Color table to map pen size to the on-screen line color.
10. Click Update.
11. Click OK.
12. Confirm that you want to save the changes to the model folder.

198 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Working with drawings
See also Print area h*b (p. 199)
Adding a printer instance (p. 197)
Printing drawings (p. 188)

Paper size
Use the Paper size setting in Printer Catalog to select the paper size used in printing.

Setting Description
Named paper size Tekla Structures lists a named paper sizes for most sizes
A3 and smaller. Selecting one of the listed sizes is
recommended for A3 printers and smaller.
By print area The printer selects the paper size based on the print area.
This option is recommended for A2 printers and larger. If
you use a named paper size with a larger printer than A3,
drawings larger than the print area are cropped to the size
of the print area.
None Sends no size information to the printer. This option
provides legacy support for Xsteel 5.0 and is not
recommended for use in other circumstances.

To print to different paper sizes, define several printers, each using a

different paper size, but all connected to the same physical printer. For
more information about setting up print devices in Microsoft Windows,
see your operating system documentation.

Print area h*b

When defining the print area, keep in mind the following facts:
• Tekla Structures uses the print area values to position the printout on the paper. Ensure that
the values for h and b relate to the paper size required.
• Usually for roll feed printers, h defines the roll width direction and d defines the roll feed
direction. Usually for tray feed printers, h defines the tray feed direction, and d defines the
tray width direction.
• Minimum value is a paper size less the hard clip margins of the printer. See your printer
documentation for the hard clip margins of your printer.
• Tekla Structures overrides the paper size defined in Windows printer setup if the
information is entered in the printer instances.

Colors and line weights in printing

Use the Color table in Printer Catalog to map different screen colors to different line weights.
The pen numbers refer to the line weights used in the printed drawing.
The line weight displayed on the screen is taken from the first printer on the printer list.
The pen numbers in the Color Table also affect the line weights displayed on the screen in
black-and-white drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 199

Working with drawings
Colors in drawings (p. 175)
Pen numbers in Color Table (p. 179)

Printing tips
Here are some tips that help you print drawings the way you want.
• If you are printing a drawing to a smaller paper, the line weights are scaled accordingly.
This means that no lines are drawn too thickly and the drawings are more readable.
• You can force a drawing to use a different size paper: Open the drawing and go to Drawing
Properties > Layout. In Size definition mode, select Specified size. Insert the required
sheet size into Drawing size.
• If a drawing does not fit to the paper or is printed to a wrong location, use the following
variables to move the drawing print origin: XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X and
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y.
• You can disable the print date information to prevent the loss of information when working
with multi-user models. This is useful in cases where a user modifies drawings while
another user prints the same drawings. Use the XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE to
disable the print date.

5.8 Preview images of drawings

You can create preview images of the drawings. These screenshots are saved by default in the
\drawings folder under the model folder as .png files.
The preview images can be added and displayed for master drawings in the Master Drawing
Catalog. They can also be viewed through the Clone Drawings dialog box.

Creating preview images

Before you can create a preview image of a drawing, you must first create the drawing.
To create a preview image:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Delete all unnecessary objects from the drawing.
3. Click Tools > Create Preview Image.
The image is saved in the \drawings folder under the model folder in .png format
with the same name as the drawing.

200 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Working with drawings
Adding preview images for master drawings
Before you can add a preview image, you must create it.
To add a preview image for a drawing in the Master Drawing Catalog:
1. Open the Master Drawing Catalog by clicking Drawings & Reports > Create
Drawings.
2. Locate the desired master drawing and double-click it to open the Master Drawing
Properties dialog box.
3. Add the image you created:
• For the master drawings of the type saved settings, cloning templates, and wizard
files, click Change image and browse for the preview image. Click OK to save the
image as a preview image.
• For rule sets, click Next until you get to the page where you can add the preview
image. Click Browse and browse for the preview image. Click Save to save the
image as a preview image.
Now you can display the preview image by selecting the master drawing on the catalog
list, right-clicking and selecting Preview.

Viewing preview images of drawing templates

You can create preview images of the drawing templates that you have in your template library
(model folder). You can later browse through the preview images easily through the Clone
Drawings dialog box, and quickly find the drawing template you are looking for.
To view preview images that you have created for drawing templates:
1. Open the Drawing List.
2. Open the Clone Drawing dialog box by clicking Clone in the Drawing List.
3. Select Other model and browse for the template library.
4. Click the Select template button to open the list of drawings that the selected model
has. On the list, there is a small icon in the Preview column if the drawing has a preview
image.

5. Double-click the drawing to open the preview image.

See also Cloning using drawing templates in template library (p. 58)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 201

Working with drawings
202 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Working with drawings
6 Modifying automatic
drawing settings

This section explains how to define automatic drawing settings. Automatic drawing object
settings include all drawing type main dialog drawing properties and subdialog properties
settings. In addition, many of the drawing settings are defined through environment variables
or by using additional settings files.
This section also explains the principle of applying drawing settings on different levels:
drawing level, view level, and object level, and how to apply the object level settings on higher
levels.
After you have created a drawing using the automatic settings, you can open the drawing and
modify the settings and edit the contents of each drawing, if necessary.

Contents Updating project information (p. 204)

Drawing properties (p. 206)
Filtering in drawings
Drawing layout (p. 213)
Drawing size and drawing view scale (p. 222)
Automatic drawing views (p. 225)
Placement settings (p. 249)
Automatic dimensions (p. 253)
Automatic marks (p. 302)
Grids in drawings (p. 323)
Parts and neighbor parts (p. 325)
Bolts (p. 332)
Surface treatments (p. 335)
Reinforcement and meshes (p. 336)
Hatch patterns (p. 338)
Reference models (p. 342)
User-defined attributes in drawings (p. 344)
Defining a firm folder for images and symbols (p. 345)
Defining customized line types (p. 345)
Settings affecting the recreation of drawings (p. 347)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 203

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Managing Master Drawing Catalog (p. 348)
Drawing settings (p. 357)

6.1 Updating project information

You will use project information, such as the project number and name, many times during a
project. Update the project information at the beginning of the project to make reports and
drawings display the correct information automatically.
To update project information:
1. Click File > Project Properties....
The Project Properties dialog box is displayed. It contains some sample entries, which
you can overwrite.
2. Enter or update the project information. All the information is optional.
3. In the Description box, enter a description that helps you identify the model when you
next need to open it.
The description appears in the Open dialog box.
4. Optional: To define user-defined attributes, click User-defined attributes....
• Enter fabricator information
• Define project standards, such as finish, material and field connection (Project
standards tab)
• Define what information appears in drawings (Drawing switches tabs)
• Define your own fields to include in drawings and reports (Parameters tab)
• Preview title block and bill of material styles.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK to save your changes.
Now you will get updated project properties in drawings and reports.
7. To save the project properties as the default properties for this project, click Tools >
Defaults > Save Defaults.

The names in the image below refer to template fields, which you can
use when designing your own reports and templates.

204 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
PROJECT.NUMBER

PROJECT.NAME

PROJECT.BUILDER

PROJECT.OBJECT

PROJECT.ADDRESS

PROJECT.DESIGNER

PROJECT.DATE_START

PROJECT.DATE_END

PROJECT.INFO1

PROJECT.INFO2

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 205

Modifying automatic drawing settings
6.2 Drawing properties
Drawing properties tell Tekla Structures how the drawing should look and what it should
include. You can modify the properties of a drawing before and after you create it. You can
modify drawing properties on three levels.
Tekla Structures allows you to save the drawing properties in drawing property files for future
use.

Modifying drawing properties on drawing level

The drawing level is the highest level of setting the drawing properties. By setting properties on
the drawing level, you can change the drawing properties of all objects and elements in a
drawing, and also save your changes for future use for a drawing of the same type.

Whenever possible, modify drawings by changing the drawing

properties on the drawing level. These modifications also remain when
the drawing is recreated due to a model change, for example.

You can modify properties on the drawing level before you create a drawing, and in an existing
drawing. You can also use the Drawing List to modify the properties of multiple drawings.

See also Modifying and saving drawing properties before creating drawings (p. 206)
Modifying drawing properties of an existing drawing (p. 207)
Modifying drawing properties of several drawings (p. 207)

Modifying and saving drawing properties before creating drawings

Tekla Structures creates drawings using the properties defined for each type of drawing. Ensure
that the drawing properties are set and the necessary drawing property files are created before
creating drawings using the menu, toolbar or pop-up menu commands, and before creating
drawings using saved settings or rule sets in the Master Drawing Catalog.
To modify and save drawing properties:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Load a drawing property file that contains the settings that are closest to the ones you
need by selecting a drawing property file from the list and clicking Load.
3. Go through the various settings in the drawing properties dialog box, and make the
necessary changes.
4. Click OK in each of the subdialog boxes where you changed the properties.
5. Optional: If there are some object level settings that you want to apply, click the Edit
settings button and load the object settings that you want to use.
Close the dialog by clicking OK.
6. If you want to save the changes in another property file, enter the name of the property
file and click Save as.

206 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Otherwise, click OK to save the settings in the currently open settings.

Now you can create a drawing using the modified drawing property file. In the Master
Drawing Catalog, the drawing property files are called saved settings. Saved settings are also
used in rule sets.

Modifying drawing properties of an existing drawing

To change the drawing properties of an existing drawing:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Double-click the drawing area or select Edit > Drawing Properties (Alt + Enter).
3. Click the buttons to open the subdialog boxes.
4. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch at
the bottom of the dialog box.
Select the check boxes next to the options that you want to change.
5. Make the necessary changes.
6. Click OK in each of the subdialog boxes where you changed the properties.
7. Optional: If there are some object level settings that you want to apply, click the Edit
settings button and load the object settings that you want to use.
Close the dialog box by clicking OK.
8. Optional: If you want to save the changes in another property file, enter the name of the
property file and click Save as.
9. Click Modify.
The changes that you made in the drawing properties are displayed in the drawing.

Modifying drawing properties of several drawings

You can change the drawing properties of several drawings at the same time.
To do this:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List.
2. Select the drawings that you want to modify.
3. Right-click and select Properties from the pop-up menu.
4. Click the buttons to open the subdialog boxes.
5. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch at
the bottom of the dialog box.
Select the check boxes next to the options that you want to change.
6. Modify the drawing properties.
7. Click OK in each of the subdialog boxes where you changed the properties.
8. Click Modify in the drawing properties dialog box.
Tekla Structures changes the drawing properties in all of the drawings you selected from the
Drawing List.

Modifying drawing properties on view level

You can modify the drawing properties on the view level. This means that the changes you
make apply only to the view that you have selected in the drawing.
To modify drawing properties on the view level:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 207

Modifying automatic drawing settings
1. Open the drawing.
2. Double-click a drawing view frame to open the drawing view properties dialog box.
3. Click the buttons to open the subdialog boxes.
4. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch at
the bottom of the dialog box.
Select the check boxes next to the options that you want to change.
5. Make the necessary changes.
6. Click OK in each of the subdialog boxes where you changed the properties.
7. Optional: If there are some object level settings that you want to apply, click the Edit
settings button and load the object settings that you want to use.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
8. Click Modify.
The changes that you made in the drawing view properties are displayed in the view.

Modifying and saving properties on object level

You can modify the drawing properties on the object level. This means that you change the
individual properties of the objects in the drawings (parts, dimensions, marks, bolts, and
welds), and save the object property files for later use.

Remember that the drawing object property files are drawing-type-

specific. For example, if you want to save object properties for objects in
single-part drawings, do this through the Single-part Properties dialog
box.

To modify and save object properties in a drawing:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click the button for the object you want to change.
For example, click Part.
3. Change the desired settings in the property dialog box.
For example, go to the Appearance tab and change the part color.
4. In the box next to the Save as button, enter the name for the property file and click Save
as.
5. Click Cancel to close the object properties dialog box.
Now you have a new object property file. You can apply the settings in this file in an open
drawing. You can also use the object property files with the drawing or view filters to apply the
object level settings on the drawing or view level through the drawing properties dialog box.

Loading saved drawing object properties in an existing drawing

You can change the object properties in an existing drawing by loading saved object properties.
To load saved object properties:
1. Open the drawing.

208 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
2. Double-click the drawing object you want to change to open the object properties dialog
box. For example, double-click a part.
3. Select the desired object property file from the list next to the Load button and click
Load.
4. Click Modify.
Tekla Structures changes the drawing object according to the settings in the loaded object
property file.

See also Modifying and saving properties on object level (p. 208)

Creating object level settings

You can control detailed object level settings directly on the drawing and view level. This way
setting up special representation for objects in drawings or views is very easy. For example,
you may want to define that all columns in a drawing or drawing view are shown in a specific
color.You also have the option of turning the detailed object level settings on or off for the
drawings or views you choose.
To create object level settings:
1. In the drawing properties dialog box of a drawing or a view, click Filter... and create the
necessary drawing or view filter that selects the objects you want a special
representation for.
For example, create a filter that selects columns.
2. In the drawing properties dialog box of a drawing or a view, modify and save the
drawing object properties.
For example, click Part... and define that you want to have blue parts.
3. In the drawing property dialog box of a drawing or a view, click Edit settings.
4. In the Object level settings for drawing/for view dialog box, click Add row and select
the filters to be used, the drawing object types and the drawing object properties to be
used.
By doing this, you are combining the filter, object type, and object property settings into
detailed object level settings.
You can add many rows in the object level settings as you want.
5. Give the object level settings a name and save them using Save as.
Now you have new drawing object level settings or view object level settings to be applied on
the drawing or view level.

Limitations You must create object level settings separately for the drawing level and view level.

Applying object level settings on drawing level

You can control the drawing object settings (settings of parts, reinforcing bars, neighbor parts,
marks, bolts, welds, and dimensions) directly on the drawing level. Using this feature you can
easily set up special representations for objects in drawings.
Before you can apply object level settings, first create and save the necessary drawing filters
and object property files and create the object level settings.
To apply the saved model object settings on the drawing level before creating a drawing:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 209

Modifying automatic drawing settings
2. Load the desired drawing properties (saved settings) by selecting the property file from
the list and clicking Load.
3. Click Edit settings.
4. In the Object level settings for drawing dialog box, load the desired object level
settings and click OK.
5. Optional: Save the drawing properties including the activated object level settings in a
drawing property file with the same or another name using Save as.
You can use this file later on in future drawings you create.
6. Click OK or Apply.
7. Create the drawings.

Example: Applying object level settings on drawing level

In this example, we will set up different object level properties for various types of building
objects, such as beams, columns and braces. Before doing this, we have saved drawing object
properties for beams, columns and braces so that they are drawn with different colors.
We will first make a general arrangement drawing filter, save object level settings in a settings
file and apply the new object level settings on drawing level.
Parts can be classified using drawing filters. This example is using part names defined in the
model, similarly as modeling filters.
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > General Arrangement Drawing.
2. Click Filter... in the drawing properties dialog box.
3. Create filters by Part - Name for column, beam, and brace and save the settings using
Save as with different names, such as ts_column, ts_beam and ts_brace.

4. Click Cancel. Now you have created the required filters needed for selecting the desired
parts.
5. In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click Edit settings.

210 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
6. In the Object level settings for drawing dialog box, select the filters to be used, the
drawing object types and the drawing object property settings to be used:
a Click Add row and select ts_column as Model object (Drawing filter), Part as
Drawing object type and column as Settings used.
b Click Add row and select ts_beam as Model object (Drawing filter), Part as
Drawing object type and beam as Settings used.
c Click Add row and select ts_brace as Model object (Drawing filter), Part as
Drawing object type and brace as Settings used.
7. Save the object level settings as gatype1 using Save as.

The same object level settings can be used with other saved general arrangement
properties, you do not need to create new ones.
8. Click Cancel to exit the dialog box.
9. Create a general arrangement drawing.
10. Open the created general arrangement drawing and double-click the drawing to open the
drawing properties.
11. Click Edit settings.
12. Load object level settings you created, in this example gatype1, and click Load.
13. Click OK.
14. Click Modify to apply the changes in the drawing.
15. Confirm the object level changes by clicking Yes in the on Object level settings
changed! confirmation message box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 211

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Filtering in drawings
Modifying and saving properties on object level (p. 208)
Creating object level settings (p. 209)

Applying object level settings on view level

You can control the drawing object settings (settings of parts, reinforcing bars, neighbor parts,
marks, bolts, welds, and dimensions) in an existing drawing on the view level. Using this
feature you can easily set up special representation for objects in the views you select.
Before you can apply object level settings, first create and save the necessary view filters,
object property files and object level settings.
To apply the saved object settings on the view level in an existing drawing:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Double-click a drawing view frame.
3. Click Edit settings.
4. In the Object level settings for view dialog box, load the desired object level settings.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Modify to apply object level settings in the selected views.

How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties

Tekla Structures generates drawings according to the properties defined for each drawing type.
The way Tekla Structures connects the properties to the drawing you create depends on the
method you select for creating the drawing:

212 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
• If you create the drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using a rule set, Tekla
Structures uses the properties defined for the saved settings file or cloning template used in
the rule set.
• If you create the drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using saved settings, Tekla
Structures uses the properties defined in the saved settings file you select.
• If you create the drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using cloning templates, Tekla
Structures uses the properties that you have defined for the drawing used as a cloning
template.
• If you create drawings through Drawings & Reports menu commands, Tekla Structures
uses the current properties in the appropriate drawing properties dialog box. The current
properties in the drawing properties dialog box are also used when you create drawings
using toolbar command buttons or pop-up menu commands.

6.3 Drawing layout

The layout defines which drawing tables to include and the set of rules for increasing the
drawing size when necessary. It connects a set of table layouts and drawing sizes. Tekla
Structures selects the smallest defined drawing size which will fit the drawing views and the
connected table layout. This tells Tekla Structures which elements to include in your drawings
automatically. Each layout has its own:
• Table layouts
• Fixed drawing sizes
• Calculated drawing sizes
Tekla Structures includes several predefined layouts, which are connected to drawing types.
Each drawing type; assembly, single-part, cast unit, general arrangement, and multidrawing,
has its own layout. You can also create your own layouts.
Using different layouts you can, for example, set assembly drawings to use A1 and A2 size
drawing sheets, and single-part drawings to use A3 and A4 sheets. Another example is that you
may want to include a material list in assembly drawings, but not in general arrangement
drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 213

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Table layouts
A table layout is a group of tables or templates included in a drawing of a certain type and size.
The layout defines:
• Which tables are included in the drawing
• Where the tables are located in the drawing
• How much space Tekla Structures leaves between the drawing frame and views and
between the drawing views
The example below illustrates the relationship between the table layout and drawing views.The
drawing views are shown in blue, and the elements of table layout in red.

Margins Key plan

Spaces Revision table

Top view Material list

Front view Drawing title block

Section views A-A and B-B Table layout consisting of several tables

Frame Foldmarks

Table layouts define the background of the drawing, not the number or location of the drawing
views to include. You can use the same table layout with different drawing sizes, or give each
drawing size its own table layout. For example, if the number of views changes in a drawing
and Tekla Structures chooses a new drawing size, Tekla Structures may also choose another
table layout.

Drawing frames and foldmarks are not included in the table layout. You
define them when you print drawings.

214 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Drawing frames and foldmarks (p. 195)
Creating and adding a new table layout (p. 216)
Adding tables in table layout (p. 217)
If you replace a table in a table layout (p. 218)
Setting the properties of tables in a table layout (p. 218)
Drawing layout (p. 213)

Tables
The term table refers to various elements of the drawing layout, such as:
• Tables (such as revision tables)
• Title blocks
• Lists (such as part and bolt lists)
• General notes
• Key plans
• DWG files
Tables contain information on model objects. If you change the model, Tekla Structures
updates the contents of the affected drawings and tables. You can create tables in Template
Editor. In Template Editor, the tables are referred to as templates.

Creating a new layout

If none of the layouts meet your needs, you can create a new one from scratch or on the basis of
an existing layout.
To create a layout:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout.
2. Do one of the following:
• To create a new layout from scratch, enter the name of the new layout in the box
under the list of layouts and click Add.
The new layout is empty.
• To create a new layout on the basis of an existing layout, select a layout from the list
and enter a new name for the new layout in the box under the list of layouts and
click Add.
The contents of the new layout are the same as those of the layout you selected from
the list.
3. Define and add table layouts and fixed and calculated sizes in the empty layout or
modify the table layouts and fixed and calculated sizes in the layout you created on the
basis of an existing layout.
4. Close the dialog box.
Now you can use the new layout in your drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 215

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Defining fixed sizes
Fixed drawing sizes have a specific size (width and height), and table layout. You can use fixed
sizes in autosizing.
To define the fixed drawing sizes in a layout:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout.
2. Select the layout and click Fixed sizes.
3. Select a fixed size from the list.
To create a new size, enter its name and click Add.
4. Enter the width and height.
5. Select the table layout.
6. Click Update.
7. Repeat steps 3–6 for each fixed size.
8. Click Apply or OK.

Use fixed sizes when you print drawings to small (A4 and A3) printing
devices.
Single-part and assembly drawings also typically use fixed drawing
sizes.

Defining calculated sizes

You can use calculated drawing sizes to define the rules Tekla Structures follows when it
automatically adjusts drawing size. You can also connect layouts to drawing sizes that meet
certain criteria.
To set the rules and connect layouts:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout.
2. Select the layout and click Calculated sizes.
3. Use Increasing step to define the interval by which Tekla Structures increases the
drawing size when it needs to.
This can be set individually for drawing width and height. You can also define the
maximum size of the drawing. If the drawing exceeds the width or height limit you set
here, Tekla Structures uses an oversize sheet with no table layout.
4. You can connect a layout to drawings that meet one of the following size criteria:
• Size A4 for drawings exactly this size
• Size A3 for drawings exactly this size
• Height = A3 for drawings having the same height as an A3 sheet (=297 mm)
• Height > A3 for drawings with a larger height than A3.
For each size, Tekla Structures makes the table layouts available depending on the
layout you select.
5. Click OK or Apply.

Creating and adding a new table layout

To create a new table layout and add in a layout:

216 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout.
2. Select a layout from the list of layouts.
3. Click Table layouts to display the Table Layouts dialog box.
4. Enter the name of the new table layout in the box under the list of table layouts and click
Add.
5. Enter the margins between the drawing views and frame, and the spaces between two
drawing views in Margins and Spaces.
6. Click Tables to display the Tables dialog box.
7. Add tables in your table layout, define the location, scale and transparency settings for
each table.
8. After each table you add, click Update.
9. Click OK or Apply to save the table layout.

Setting margins and spaces for drawing views

Table layouts define the margins between the drawing views and the frame, and the space
between two drawing views.
A margin is the width or height from the outermost drawing views to the drawing frame. A
space is the horizontal or vertical distance between two drawing views.
To set the margins and spaces:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout....
2. Select a layout and click Table layout.
3. Select the table layout on the list.
4. Enter margins and spaces.
5. Click Update.
6. Repeat step 3–5 for each table layout.
7. Click OK or Apply.

Adding tables in table layout

To add tables (Template Editor templates) in a table layout:
1. Open the Tables dialog box by clicking Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings >
Drawing Layout > Table Layout > Tables.
2. On the Available tables list, double-click each table you want to include in the table
layout.
You can also use the arrow buttons to add and remove tables.
3. Set the table properties as required for each table you add.
4. Click Update.
5. Click OK or Apply.

See also Setting the properties of tables in a table layout (p. 218)
Table layouts (p. 214)
Modifying tables in Template Editor (p. 221)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 217

Modifying automatic drawing settings
If you replace a table in a table layout
When you delete a table from a table layout and replace it with a new one:
1. Define the location of the new table relative to the remaining tables. The new table does
not automatically inherit the location of the deleted table.
2. Check that the remaining tables do not use the deleted table as their reference.
If they do and you delete the table, you cannot see any tables at all in the layout.

Setting the properties of tables in a table layout

You can define the location of each individual table in a table layout by binding it to the
drawing frame or to another table.
In the illustration below, the lower right corner of the drawing title (table) is bound to the lower
right corner of the drawing frame (reference).

To set the properties of a table in a table layout:

1. Open the Tables dialog box by clicking Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings >
Drawing Layout > Table Layout > Tables.
2. Select a table from the Chosen tables list.
3. Choose one of the table corners as its reference point, and select the check box in that
corner.
4. In the Reference box, select the reference object, which can be another table included in
the table layout, or the drawing frame.
5. Choose the reference point of the reference object, and select the check box in the
appropriate corner.
6. In the Vector between corners fields, define the horizontal and vertical distance of the
table from the reference object. By default, Tekla Structures places tables side by side.
7. In Scale, set the size of the table relative to its original size. Each table can have its own
scale.
8. If you want the table to be transparent, select the Transparent check box. A transparent
table can overlap with another table, view or drawing object.
9. Click Update.
10. Repeat steps 2–9 for all the tables on the Chosen tables list.
11. Click OK or Apply to save the table layout.

218 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
You can also position a table in the midpoint of a frame or table
boundary by selecting two reference points, for example, the lower left
and right corners.

If you do not use the right combinations of reference points for tables
and binding objects, Tekla Structures may position drawing tables
outside the drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 219

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Adding a key plan in a table layout
Before you start, create a drawing that you want to use as a key plan.
To add a key plan in a layout:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout.
2. Select the layout you want to modify and click Table layout.
3. Select the table layout you want to modify and click Tables.
4. From the Available tables list, double-click Key plan. The Drawing List is displayed.
5. Select the drawing that you want to use as a key plan drawing and click OK.
6. From the Chosen tables list, select Key plan and set the key plan properties.
7. Click Update.
8. Click OK.
Now you can create a drawing using the layout containing the key plan.Check the drawing
properties before creating a drawing to ensure that you are using the correct layout.

See also Setting the properties of tables in a table layout (p. 218)

Setting up a drawing view to be used as a key plan

Tekla Structures automatically includes the correct part in the key plan. Drawings that contain
only one view of the correct scale can be used as a key plan. Tekla Structures only uses the
view from the drawing, and the view position, drawing size, and templates are not relevant to a
key plan drawing.
Set the view properties for the key plan as follows:
1. Open the drawing and double-click the view boundary to open the View Properties
dialog box.
2. Set the desired drawing scale. Tekla Structures uses the scale of the key plan view in
every drawing using it. You cannot change the scale in the layout properties.
3. Set the drawing view boundaries so that all parts are visible. To do this, change the x
min, x max, y min, and y max, or select the view and drag the boundary using the
handles on the x and y axes of the view.
4. Set other view properties. All the changes you make in the properties affect the key plan.
For example, if you set part and bolt marks to be visible, they will also be visible in the
key plan.
5. Click Modify.

In drawings that will be used as key plans do not filter out anything
indicated with not. Tekla Structures clears the not check boxes in the
filter automatically when the key plan is inserted in another drawing.

Adding a DXG/DXF file in a table layout

You can add DWG and DXF files in table layouts. For example, you might have some details in
a DWG or DXF file that you want to show in certain types of drawings and therefore add the
file in the layout.
To add a DWG or a DXF file in a table layout:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout.
2. Select the layout you want to modify and click Table layout.
3. Select the table layout you want to modify and click Tables.
4. From the Available tables list, double-click DWG/DXF.
5. Select the DWG/DXF file that you want to add.

220 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
6. Click OK
7. From the Chosen tables list, click the selected DWG/DXF file and set the properties as
required.
For example, set the required scale and define the location for the DWG/DXF file in the
drawing. Test the layout before using it to ensure, that the settings are as you wish.
8. Click Update.
9. Click OK.
Now you can create a drawing using the layout containing the DWG/DXF file. Check the
drawing properties before creating a drawing to ensure that you are using the correct layout.

See also Setting the properties of tables in a table layout (p. 218)
Adding links to DWG and DXF files (p. 137)

Modifying tables in Template Editor

If you need to modify the tables in the drawing, open them in Template Editor (TplEd). In the
Template Editor, tables are called templates.
To modify a table:
1. In a drawing, double-click the table you want to modify.
2. Tekla Structures shows the following message:

3. Click OK. Tekla Structures starts the Template Editor, and the selected table is displayed.

You can only open tables with templates created or saved in Template
Editor version 3.2. or later.

For more information about the Template Editor, see the TplEd help, which is also available in
PDF format on the Tekla Structures installation DVD.

Selecting a new layout

You can define which layout to use in a drawing in drawing properties. The layout information
is stored in the drawing property files. We recommend that you create as many property files as
you need different layouts for the different drawing types.
To select a new layout and save the layout information in a drawing property file:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 221

Modifying automatic drawing settings
2. Load the drawing property file that you want to change by entering its name next to
Load and clicking Load.
3. Click Layout.
4. In the Layout box, select a new layout.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK to save the changed properties and close the drawing properties dialog box.
Now you can create a drawing using the drawing property file that contains the changed layout
information.

6.4 Drawing size and drawing view scale

Tekla Structures offers you several combinations of settings that you can use for defining the
drawing size and the drawing view scale. Which one you use, depends on your needs:
• If you always want to use a certain scale, then you would set the exact scale to be used and
let Tekla Structures automatically select the drawing size that suits the selected scale. This
is called autosizing. You can define different scales for main views and section views. All
main views in a drawing automatically use the same scale unless you fine-tune individual
views manually.
• If you always need to use a certain drawing size, for example, A3, A4 or A1, then you
would set the size and let Tekla Structures automatically select the drawing view scale that
suits the selected size. This is called autoscaling.
• If you are not bound to any specific drawing sizes or drawing view scales, you might want
to let Tekla Structures take care of both.

Using exact drawing view scale and automatic drawing size

You can let Tekla Structures find appropriate sizes and table layouts for drawings. This is very
useful if, for example, the number, size, or location of drawing views might change. Tekla
Structures automatically updates drawings to adapt to these changes by using different drawing
sizes and table layouts.
To define exact drawing view scale and let Tekla Structures automatically select the suitable
drawing size:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Layout.
3. Optional: On the Drawing size tab, change the layout in Layout, if necessary.
The different layouts contain different sets of table layouts and drawing sizes Tekla
Structures uses for finding the suitable drawing size.
4. Set Size definition mode to Autosize.

222 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
5. Select the set of drawing sizes for Tekla Structures to use. You have the options:
• Calculated sizes: Use this when you want to define the rules that Tekla Structures
follows when it tries to adjust the drawing size.
• Fixed sizes: Use this when you want Tekla Structures to use fixed drawing sizes A2,
A3, A4, etc.
• Calculated/fixed sizes: Use this when you want Tekla Structures to select the
smallest of the suitable sizes.
6. Go to the Scale tab and set Autoscale to No.
This way Tekla Structures uses the exact scale that you have set for the main views and
section views.
7. Click OK or Apply.
8. Click View or Section view, go to the Attributes tab and set the desired Scale.
9. Click OK or Apply.
When you create the drawing, Tekla Structures creates the views using the selected scale and
selects the smallest drawing size where the views fit in the drawing. Tekla Structures may also
need to change the table layout to adapt to the new drawing size. It will then use another
appropriate table layout within the same layout specified in drawing properties.

See also Drawing size and drawing view scale (p. 222)
Drawing layout (p. 213)
View properties in drawings (p. 357)
Section view properties (p. 360)

Using exact drawing size and automatic drawing view scale

If you need to use a specific size in your drawings, for example, A3, A2, or A1, you can specify
the exact size, and let Tekla Structures automatically select the suitable drawing view scale.

The drawing size should always be smaller than the actual paper size to
accommodate printer margins.

To use exact size and automatically scale the view:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Layout and on the Drawing size tab, set Size definition mode to Specified size
and enter the drawing size.
3. Select the table layout.
4. On the Scale tab, set Autoscale to Yes.
5. Set the main view and section view scales. Enter the denominators of scales and separate
them with spaces. For example, enter "5 10 15 20" for the scales 1/5, 1/10, 1/15, and 1/
20.
6. Select the Scale change mode, which defines the relationship between the scales of
main and section views within a drawing. The options are:
• main = section: The scales of the main and section view are equal.
• main < section: Main view scales are smaller than section view scales.

• main <= section: Main view scales are smaller than or equal to section view scales.
7. Click OK or Apply.
8. Click View > Attributes (or Section View > Attributes) and enter the preferred scale.
9. Click OK or Apply.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 223

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Tekla Structures creates the drawing using the specified size. Tekla Structures first tries to use
the preferred scale for the drawing views, then the alternative scales, and selects the largest
possible scale.

See also Drawing size and drawing view scale (p. 222)
Drawing layout (p. 213)
View properties in drawings (p. 357)
Section view properties (p. 360)

Autoscaling and autosizing drawings

If you are not bound to any specific drawing sizes or drawing view scales, you can let Tekla
Structures take care of both.
To use both autoscaling and autosizing:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click View/Section view > Attributes and set the preferred drawing view scale.
3. Click OK or Apply.
4. Click Layout > Scale and set Autoscale to Yes.
5. Set the alternative main view and section view scales.
6. Select the Scale change mode.
7. Enter the Preferred size.
8. On the Drawing size tab, set Size definition mode to Autosize.
9. Select the set of drawing sizes (Calculated sizes, Fixed sizes or Calculated/Fixed
sizes).
10. Click OK or Apply.
When you use both autoscaling and autosizing at the same time, Tekla Structures follows the
steps below:
• First Tekla Structures tries to find a drawing size where the drawing contents fit by first
trying to use the exact scale defined in View/Section view > Attributes and the smallest
drawing size defined in the current layout (Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings >
Drawing Layout > Calculated/Fixed sizes).
• Then Tekla Structures increases the drawing size until it reaches the Preferred size
defined in Layout > Scale.
• If the drawing fits with the original scale, Tekla Structures tries to increase the scale using
the alternative main and section view scales you defined in Layout >Scale.
• If the drawing does not fit to any of the defined scales, Tekla Structures starts to increase
the drawing size until the contents fit, using the fixed or calculated sizes or both. When
necessary, Tekla Structures changes to another appropriate table layout within the current
layout.
• When the views fit, Tekla Structures begin to increase the scale again so that the final
drawing uses the largest possible scale.

See also Drawing size and drawing view scale (p. 222)
Drawing layout (p. 213)
View properties in drawings (p. 357)
Section view properties (p. 360)

224 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
6.5 Automatic drawing views
Automatic drawing views are views that Tekla Structures creates when it creates a drawing.
Define the desired drawing view properties before you create drawings. All views of a view
type share the same properties.
Most of the drawing view properties are common to all view types and drawing types. There
are some exceptions, for example, section views have some additional properties.
You can edit drawing view properties on both the drawing level and view level. This section
describes the view settings that you can adjust already before creating a drawing. You can fine
tune some view-specific properties once you have created drawings.

Selecting the views to create

Before you create single-part, assembly or cast unit drawings, select the views that you want to
include automatically. You can also add views to existing drawings.

When you create general arrangement drawings, you select the created
views after initiating the creation command.

To select the views to be created:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click View.
3. On the Views tab, select the main views and section views you want to create.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 225

Modifying automatic drawing settings
• If you select off, Tekla Structures does not create the view, but dimensions the parts
in the available views. If you set all four main views off, Tekla Structures will still
create a front view.
• If you select on, Tekla Structures always creates the view, even if it was not
necessary in order to show the dimensions. For section views, Tekla Structures
creates one additional section view showing the middle of the main part. For end
views, Tekla Structures creates end view from one end of the main part.
• If you select auto, Tekla Structures creates the view if it is necessary in order to
show the dimensions. For section views, Tekla Structures creates the necessary
number of views to show all the dimensions. For end views, Tekla Structures also
creates another end view from the other end of the main part, if there are dimensions
at that end.
4. On the Views tab, set 3D view to On to create a 3D view, and select one of the options in
3D view attributes.
There are ready-made properties for different types of drawings that you can use when
creating the corresponding drawing. The automatically created 3D views have the same
filtering type as the other drawing views.
The Current attributes option creates the 3D view based on the values you last entered
in the Rotation around (in 3D views) fields in the View properties dialog box.
5. Click OK.

Selecting the view projection type

Projection type defines how Tekla Structures places the projections of a part in cast unit,
single-part, and assembly drawings. Projection type affects the order of the views in the
drawing.
To set the projection type:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Layout and go to the Other tab.
3. Select one of the following:
• First angle (also referred to as European projection).
• Third angle (also referred to as American projection).
4. Click OK.
First-angle projection:

226 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Third-angle projection:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 227

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Drawing layout (p. 213)

Setting the location of end views and section views

You can select to always place section views and end views next to the main view in a single-
part, assembly, or cast unit drawing, or in any empty location in the drawing.
To set the location of section views and end views:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Layout and go to the Other tab.
3. Set Align end views with main view to Yes to place the views next to the main view.
4. Set Align section views with main view to Yes to place the views next to the main
view.
5. Click OK.

If you select No, Tekla Structures places the section and end views in
any available location.

228 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Examples
End and section views in any location (No
selected).

End and section views beside the main view (Yes

selected).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 229

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Drawing layout (p. 213)

Including single-part drawings in assembly drawings

You can include single-part drawings of the individual parts that make the assembly in
assembly drawings. You can use existing single-part drawings on the Drawing List or create
new drawing views.
To include single-part drawings:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Assembly Drawing.
2. Click Layout... and go to the Other tab.
3. Set Include single-parts to Yes. This activates the Single-part attributes list.
4. From the Single-part attributes list, select the desired drawing properties to be used in
the single-part view. Current is the default.
5. Click OK.
The value of the advanced option
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS affects how Tekla
Structures creates the single-part views. If it is set to TRUE, Tekla Structures will use single-part
drawings in the Drawing List. If it is set to FALSE, or if there is no existing single part drawing
for a given part, a new view will be created according to the Include single parts setting. The
default value is FALSE.

230 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Part orientation in drawing views
In single-part, assembly, and cast unit drawings, you can adjust the orientation of the parts in
the drawing views by selecting an appropriate coordinate system and by rotating the parts. You
can also separately set the viewing direction of columns, beams and bracings in assembly
drawings. The project north setting also affects part orientation.

Contour plates are always oriented so that the longest side of the plate is
parallel to the x axis. You can affect this setting with the advanced
options XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR and
XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 231

Modifying automatic drawing settings
You can use the model option to display sloping parts in position. Tekla
Structures cannot display horizontally skewed parts.

• oriented
Tekla Structures uses the local coordinate system of the main part, but the coordinate
system is oriented so that the x axis of the part points to the right even if the part was
created from right to left.

• horizontal brace
Tekla Structures automatically rotates the drawing views so that the front view is from the
top of the model. This is used for skewed braces. It automatically rotates the front view
around the x axis.
• vertical brace
Tekla Structures automatically rotates the drawing views so that the front view is in the
same plane as the brace in the model. This is used for skewed braces. It automatically
rotates the front view around the x axis.

• For concrete parts, the option Fixed rotates the front view so that it shows the casting
direction (the face that is top in form) of the concrete part, if it is defined in the model.

232 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Part orientation in drawing views (p. 231)

Changing the coordinate system

You change the coordinate system currently in use.
To change the coordinate system:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click View and go to the Attributes tab.
3. In Coordinate system, select one of the available coordinate systems.
4. Click OK.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 233

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See examples of rotating around the x axis below:

0 degrees

90 degrees

180 degrees

270 degrees

See an example of rotating the same part 180 degrees around the y axis below.

234 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See an example of rotating the same part 30 degrees around the z axis below.

Setting viewing direction for columns in assembly drawings

In assembly drawings, you can define the front view direction separately for columns. The
default value for the front view direction for columns is As beam and bracing.
To define the direction of the front view for columns in assembly drawings:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options... > Orientation marks.
2. Use the Columns in assembly drawing options to set the front view direction:
• If you have set the coordinate system to local in the view properties, Tekla
Structures uses the coordinate system of the column when setting the direction of
the front view.
• If you have set the coordinate system to oriented, the column is in a horizontal
position, and the direction of the front view is the option you select (North, East,
South or West).
• If you have set the coordinate system to model, the column is in a vertical position,
and the direction of the front view is the option you select (North, East, South or
West).
3. Click OK.

Setting viewing direction for beams and bracings in assembly draw-

ings
In assembly drawings, you can define the front view direction separately for beams and
bracings.
To define the viewing direction for beams and bracings:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options... > Orientation marks.
2. Use the Beams and bracings in assembly drawing options to set the front view
direction. The default value is North or east.
• If the beam or bracing is parallel to the x axis in the model, it is also parallel to the x
axis in the drawing.
• If you have set the coordinate system to model, and the beam or bracing is sloped, it
is also sloped in the drawing.
3. Click OK.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 235

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Part orientation in drawing views (p. 231)

Showing neighbor parts in views

Neighbor parts refer to (optionally shown) parts that are close to the part that is depicted in a
drawing. Depending on settings this may be parts somehow connected to the part in question,
or just parts that happen to be close by.You can select which neighbor parts to show in views
and also automatically extend the view boundary if necessary.
To control which neighboring parts to show and extend the view boundary automatically:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Neighbor part > Visibility.
3. Select the parts that you want to show using the following options:
• None does note show neighbor parts.
• Connected parts shows all parts connected to the model object.
• Connecting parts shows only the parts the model object is connected to.
• All components combines the Connected parts and the Connecting parts
options.
• By extreme show all parts within the boundaries of the main and secondary part.
• Main parts shows only neighbor parts that make the main part of an assembly or a
cast unit.
• Secondary parts shows only neighbor parts that are secondary parts of an
assembly or a cast unit.
• Both shows both main and secondary parts.
• Skew parts: Yes shows skew parts as neighbor parts in the drawing, No does not.
4. Click OK.
5. Click View (or Section view) > Attributes.
6. Enter a value by which to extend the view in the View extension for neighbor parts
box.
7. Click OK.

Shortening and lengthening parts

Use the shortening functionality in the model to make the part longer or shorter in the drawing
than in the model. This can be useful for adding length to concrete precast parts in the cast
condition while the model stays in the erected state. The most common use for this is to
account for prestressing elastic shortening, where the part actually shrinks a fraction of an inch
after casting and after the strands are cut.
You can shorten and lengthen parts also in drawing views.

236 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Shortening a part in the model
To shorten a part in the model:
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Deforming tab.
3. In the Shortening field, define the degree of shortening.
4. Click Modify.
When drawings are created, Tekla Structures decreases the true length of the part by the value
defined in the Shortening field. Shortening is applied linearly along the length in drawings.

To show the dimensions of the shortened part correctly in the drawings,

set the setting Undeformed to Yes in the View Properties dialog box of
the drawing.

Limitations • The shortening functionality is available only in the Full and Precast Concrete Detailing
configurations.

Lengthening a part in the model

To have a concrete part lengthened in cast unit drawings, you must enter a negative value for
shortening in the part properties dialog box.
To lengthen a part in drawings:
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Deforming tab.
3. In the Shortening field, enter a negative value.
For example, -20 would result in a part that is cast 20 units longer than the part in the
model.
4. Click Modify.

Shortening parts in drawing views

If parts are quite long and do not include any important details, you can shorten them in
drawing views.
To shorten parts:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click View and go to the Shortening tab.
For section views, click Section view.
3. In Minimum cut part length and Space between cut parts, select how to cut the middle
regions of the parts in drawing views.
The Minimum cut part length defines the minimum cut length of the section of the
shortened part to show. The Space between cut parts defines the distance between cut
parts.
4. Set Cut skew parts to Yes to also cut skew parts in views.
5. Click OK.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 237

Modifying automatic drawing settings
• You can show view shortening symbols in drawings by setting the
advanced options
XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS
and
XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PART
S to TRUE through Tools > Options > Advanced Options... >
Drawing Properties.
• You can also control the appearance of the view shortening symbol
with the advanced options XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR,
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE, and
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG.

Example Below is an example of a cut part.

Below is an example of using the advanced option

XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS.

238 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS
XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS
Shortening and lengthening parts (p. 236)
Shortening parts view by view (p. 140)
Automatic drawing views (p. 225)
View properties in drawings (p. 357)
Section view properties (p. 360)

Lengthening shortened parts in drawing views

After Tekla Structures has scaled drawing views and selected the drawing size, it may stretch
shortened views to fill up empty areas of the drawing.
To lengthen shortened parts:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Layout and go to the Other tab.
3. Set Expand shortened parts to fit to Yes.
4. Click OK.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 239

Modifying automatic drawing settings
To unfold a polybeam:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Single-Part Drawing....
2. Click View and go to the Attributes tab.
3. Set Unfolded to Yes.
4. Click OK.
Tekla Structures unfolds the polybeam when you create the single-part drawing.

Limitations • You can unfold only beams that have been created with the Polybeam command. You
cannot unfold beams created with the Curved beam command, for example.
• You can unfold a polybeam only on one plane.

Undeforming deformed parts

Deformed parts are parts that have been warped or cambered in the model. You can undeform
these parts and show the developed (undeformed) shape of deformed parts in drawings. You
may want to do this, for example, if you want a concrete part to have two states: as erected (in
the model view) and as cast (in the drawing view).
To create drawings that show the developed shape of parts and hide the part deformations:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click View and go to the Attributes tab.
3. To hide deforming angles and cambering, set Undeformed to Yes.
4. Click OK.
When you create the drawing, it shows the developed shape and dimensions of the part.
See below for an example of a undeformed part in a drawing.

See below for an example of a warped part in a drawing.

240 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Shortenings are hidden if you set Undeformed to No.

Showing part openings and recesses

You can select if you want to show symbols for part openings and recesses (blind holes) in
drawings.
To show openings and recesses in parts in a drawing:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click View and go to the Attributes tab.
3. Set Show openings/recess symbol to Yes.
4. Click OK.
By default, Tekla Structures displays openings and recesses in the following way:

Type of opening Shown as Examples

Hole through a part Hole symbol

Recess in the front Recess symbol and

face of a part bounding lines shown as
unbroken lines

Recess in the back Recess symbol and

face of a part bounding lines shown as
dashed lines
Remember to switch
hidden lines on for parts.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 241

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Automatic drawing views (p. 225)
Additional ways for showing symbols in openings and recesses (p. 242)

Additional ways for showing symbols in openings and recesses

Tekla Structures contains some advanced options that give you more variety for showing the
openings and recesses in your drawings:
To use other types of symbols in openings and recesses, and to show symbols in openings
located at part borders and in part corners:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
2. Set the variable XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL to FALSE to show the
openings and recesses as follows:

3. Set XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_BORDER_HOLES to TRUE to show opening/recess

symbols in openings located at part borders. This advanced option is by default set to
FALSE. The symbol used depends on the setting of the advanced option
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL.

4. Set XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_CORNER_HOLES to TRUE to show opening/recess

symbols in openings located in part corners. This advanced option is by default set to
FALSE. The symbol used depends on the setting of the advanced option
XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL.

242 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL
XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_CORNER_HOLES
XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_BORDER_HOLES
Showing part openings and recesses (p. 241)

Combining section views

To combine section views, you need to define a distance to use. If two sections are within this
distance, and if the combined view will show all dimensions clearly, Tekla Structures combines
the section views.

You can additionally control which section views get combined using the
advanced option XS_DRAWING_CUT_VIEW_COMPARISON_CRITERIA.

To define the distance:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Section view.
3. On the Attributes tab, set Distance for combining cuts.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 243

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Distance = 1’- 4" for combining

Section depth = 4"

Combined sections

Setting section view depth

You can set the depth separately for section views. The Section depth defines the positive and
negative depth of the section view when sections are not combined.
To set the view depth:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Section view.
3. Set the section view depth in Section depth.
The Section depth defines the positive and negative depth of the section view when
sections are not combined.

Setting section and end view direction

You can define the direction of section views separately for left, middle, and right section
views.
To set the section view direction:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Section view.
3. On the Attributes tab, set the direction (left or right) of the Left section, Middle
section and Right section.
The arrow in the section view symbol indicates the direction of the section view, as shown
below:

Left section, right direction

244 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Middle section, right direction

Right section, left direction

See also Showing section and end view direction marks (p. 245)
Section view properties (p. 360)

Showing section and end view direction marks

You can display view direction marks in section views and end views.
To show view direction marks:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Section view.
3. On the View Label tab, select the appropriate options in the Section views and End
views.
4. Define the height of the symbol and text label in Height.
5. Click OK.
The view direction is shown with a small symbol (optionally with a text label) around the end
or section view.

You can define the symbol in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... >
Drawing Properties by using the following advanced options:
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP
The default symbol is xsteel@66.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 245

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Setting section and end view direction (p. 244)

Adding view labels for main and section views

All drawing views can have view labels, which may contain text and symbols. You can set the
contents of the main view labels and section view labels before you create the drawing, and
adjust them after you have created the drawing.

You can set detail view labels after you have created the drawing, before
or after creating the detail view.

To set the main view and section view label:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click View (or Section view).
3. Go to the Label (or View label) tab.
4. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box and select the
elements to be included in the view label mark, and set the appearance, position and
alignment of the mark.
The illustration in the view properties dialog box is only one way to position the label
text. When you modify the positioning, the illustration in the dialog box does not
change.

5. Select the view label Symbol you want to use in the label.
You can simply use only a label or add a symbol in it. You can also set the color, size,
line length and the position of the view label.
6. Select the Vertical (Above or Below) and Horizontal (Center by view frame or Center
by view restriction box) position of the view label.
7. Click OK.
See below for an example of a section view label.

Automatic drawing views (p. 225)

Section view properties (p. 360)
View properties in drawings (p. 357)

Modifying view label marks

To modify the view label mark contents and position:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click View (or Section view).
3. Go to the Label (or View label) tab.
4. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box
5. On the Content tab, select the elements that you want to include in the view label mark.

246 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
6. Optional: Select an element from the list and click Add frame and select the frame Type
and Color.
You can set these individually for each element.
7. Optional: Select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font and Height.
You can set these individually for each element.
8. Go to the Position tab and set the text position, horizontal and vertical offset, and the
text alignment.
Text positioning depends on whether you use a symbol or not.
9. Click OK.
10. Click OK also in the view label properties dialog box.

See also View, section view and detail view label mark elements (p. 389)
Mark appearance properties (p. 376)
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks (p. 378)
View properties in drawings (p. 357)
Section view properties (p. 360)

Displaying main view names automatically

You can set names for front, back, top and bottom views. Tekla Structures displays the view
names automatically if you include the element View name in the view label mark.
To set the view names:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click View.
3. Go to the Label tab.
4. Enter the names for the labels in the Front view, Top view, Back view, and Bottom
view fields.
5. Click one of the ... buttons next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box.
6. Include the view name in the mark by selecting View name from the list of elements.
7. Click OK.

Modifying section marks

Section marks are located at the ends of the section cut lines. You can adjust the appearance and
contents of the section marks.
To modify the section mark before you create drawings:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Section view.
3. Go to the Section mark tab.
4. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box.
5. On the Content tab, select the elements that you want to include in the mark.
6. Optional: Select an element from the list and click Add frame and select the frame Type
and Color.
You can set these individually for each element.
7. Optional: Select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font and Height.
You can set these individually for each element.
8. Go to the Position tab and select the side to show the text, the text position, the
horizontal and vertical offset, and the text rotation options.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 247

Modifying automatic drawing settings
9. Click OK.
10. In the Symbol area, define the section mark symbols.
You can select from a list of predefined arrow symbols or use your own custom symbol.
The symbol properties can be defined separately for both the left and the right section
mark symbols. Also set the color, size and position of section mark symbols.
11. Click OK in the section view properties dialog box.
See below for examples how the section marks could look.

Setting the section mark cutting line

To set the section mark cutting line:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Section view.
3. Go to the Cutting line tab.
4. Set the section mark line length and offset (distance between the mark and the section).

Line length

Offset

5. Click OK.

248 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
6.6 Placement settings
When you create a drawing, Tekla Structures uses predefined rules for positioning annotation
objects such as text, marks, dimensions, and welds. These annotation objects are placed in the
first suitable position considering the areas protected in the drawing, the placing settings
defined for the annotation objects, and other object-type-specific location settings defined in
the annotation object properties.
You can also define placement settings for the annotation objects that you add manually.
Protection settings are also considered in the final drawings.
When you create a drawing, Tekla Structures places the views in the drawing according the
settings in the drawing layout and view properties. In final drawings, you can select whether to
use fixed or free view placement of views.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 249

Modifying automatic drawing settings
With a selection like this, text and marks may overlap with part corners
and edges, but not with part.
With a selection like this, dimensions may not overlap with other
dimensions (arrowheads, lines and values).

The columns define the areas to be protected, see descriptions below:

Column Description
Part corners

Part edges

Part

Text, mark or weld mark

Dimension arrowhead

Dimension line

Dimension value

Cutting line

Section mark

Weld arrow

Weld mark text

The rows in the New area define which objects, or object components, Tekla Structures cannot
place in the protected areas.

250 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Row Description
Text, mark or weld mark

Dimension arrowhead

Dimension line

Dimension value

Protecting areas in drawings

To protect areas in the drawings:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Protection. The protection properties dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box is similar for all drawing types.
3. Select check boxes to indicate the areas that you want to protect from text, marks, weld
marks, other annotation objects, dimension arrowheads, dimension lines or dimension
values.
For example, to prevent text, marks, dimension and other annotation objects from being
placed over the inside area of parts, select the third check box on the first row. The first
row defines the placement of annotation objects, and the icon above the third check box
indicates the inside area of parts. With this setting, Tekla Structures may place
annotation objects on the corners and edges of parts.
4. Click OK.

If you clear the first two columns of check boxes, Tekla Structures does
not protect part corners and edges. This increases drawing speed and
decreases the memory requirements. You can still protect these areas by
using the third column of check boxes for part protection.

Defining placement settings for annotation objects

You can define a place for the annotation objects before and after creating a drawing.
To define placement settings for annotation objects before you create a drawing:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. In the drawing properties dialog box, click a button for the object type you want to
adjust, for example Part Mark.
3. On the appropriate tab, click the Place button to open the Placing dialog box.
4. Adjust the placement settings. The options available in the dialog box vary depending on
the annotation object type.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 251

Modifying automatic drawing settings
• In Minimal distance, enter the closest distance Tekla Structures should use to place
the drawing object.
• In Search margin, enter the minimal is the distance within which Tekla Structures
searches for a space to place the object.
• Select the Quarter to define the areas Tekla Structures searches for a space to place
the object.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK.

To move marks away from each other, use Search margin, not Minimal
distance. Keep the minimal distance setting as small as possible to
reduce the possibility of marks overlapping.

Defining placement settings for dimensions

You can control the space between parallel dimension lines and the location of the dimension
in relation to the object it is dimensioning. You can also select whether to place short dimension
text inside or outside the dimension.
To adjust dimension placement:
1. Go to the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. In Dimension lines spacing, enter the desired space between two parallel dimension
lines.
3. Select whether to place short dimension text inside or outside of the dimensions from the
Short dimension list.
4. Click Place.
5. In Minimal distance, enter the closest distance Tekla Structures should use to place the
dimension.
6. If Tekla Structures cannot place the dimension at the minimal distance, it moves the
dimension by the value you enter in the Search margin box. Tekla Structures tries to
place the dimension using the Search margin value until it finds a place for the
dimension.
7. Click OK to close the dimension placing dialog box.
8. Click OK.

Remember that in addition to dimension placement settings, the

placement is also affected by Protection properties.Tekla Structures uses
the protection properties to prevent marks and dimensions from being
placed in protected areas.

252 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Defining free or fixed placement of views
You can always maintain the views in the same location or let Tekla Structures find a suitable
place for the view during drawing updates using the Fixed or Free placement setting.
To define free or fixed placement of views:
1. Double-click a view frame in an open drawing.
2. Select one of the following options:
• Set Place to Fixed to always keep the view in the same location when you update
the drawing.
• Set Place to Free to let Tekla Structures find a suitable place for the view when you
update the drawing.
3. Click Modify.

Arrange Drawing Views only affects views where the Place is set to
Free. Fixed views are not moved.

6.7 Automatic dimensions

Dimensions are associative annotation objects that represent building object measurements.
Dimensions are more than lines or vectors; they are interactive callouts of geometry.
Automatic dimensions are dimensions that Tekla Structures creates in a drawing based on the
dimensioning properties.
There is a multitude of options for controlling automatic dimensions in Tekla Structures. Very
often modifying one dimension setting affects how other settings work. You may want to
experiment with these settings.
You can define automatic dimension settings before you create a drawing and you can also
modify the settings after you have created the drawing.
Adding automatic dimensions (p. 253)
Adding automatic dual dimensions (p. 254)
Setting dimension appearance (p. 255)
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings (p. 262)
Dimension and dimensioning properties (p. 361)

Adding automatic dimensions

You can set up dimensions for drawings in the drawing properties dialog box. Tekla Structures
contains pre-defined dimension settings that are stored in drawing properties files. These
settings affect how Tekla Structures automatically creates appropriate dimensions. You can also
create new property files.
To adjust the automatic dimensioning settings:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Load the drawing properties that you want to change by selecting the drawing property
file from the list next to the Load button and clicking Load.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 253

Modifying automatic drawing settings
3. Do both of the following:
• Adjust the dimension appearance by clicking Dimensions.
• Select the dimensions to create and adjust the related settings by clicking
Dimensioning.
4. When you are ready, click OK in each of the subdialogs to save the changes and close the
subdialog.
5. Click OK to save the settings in the drawing property file.

Adding automatic dual dimensions

You can create dual dimension tags automatically in all types of drawings.
To create dual dimensions:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options... > Drawing dimensions.
2. Set the units, format and precision.
3. Select the drawing types where you want to have the dual dimensions.
4. Click OK.
When Tekla Structures creates the drawing, it adds in the lower dimension tag in the selected
unit and format, and puts the text DIMENSION in the middle dimension tag in the Dimension
Properties dialog box.

Limitations Dual dimensions can only be shown in relative and US absolute dimensions, but not in absolute
dimensions.

Example Below is an example of dual dimensions using the units mm and format ###.

254 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Setting dimension appearance
Tekla Structures contains several settings that affect the appearance of the dimensions. For
example, you can control the dimension type, unit, precision, format, location, and size, and the
appearance of texts, lines and arrows in the dimension.
The settings that affect the dimension appearance are located in the Dimensions dialog box.

See also Setting dimension text, line and arrow appearance (p. 255)
Selecting the dimension type (p. 255)
Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions (p. 256)
Selecting the dimension format, precision and units (p. 256)
Grouping large dimension values (p. 257)
Setting the dimension extension line length (p. 257)
Creating exaggerated dimensions (p. 259)
Defining placement settings for dimensions (p. 252)
Example: Sloped dimension texts (p. 261)
Showing plate side marks automatically (p. 260)
Changing the prefix in radial dimensions (p. 261)
Dimension and dimensioning properties (p. 361)
Dimension appearance properties (p. 364)

Setting dimension text, line and arrow appearance

You can set the dimension text, line and arrow to look in the way you want.
To set the appearance of dimension texts, lines and arrows:
1. Go to the Appearance tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. In the Text area, select the color, height, font, frame and place for the mark.
3. In the Line, Arrow area, select the dimension line color, arrow type, and arrow size.
4. Click OK.

Selecting the dimension type

You can select the dimension type for straight dimensions and angle dimensions. There are two
basic types of straight dimensions: relative and absolute. Relative dimensions show linear
distances or length, whereas absolute dimensions show the linear distance from an origin point
to the dimensioned edge, hole, etc. All other dimension types are combinations of the two basic
types. The angle option you select affects the appearance of the bevel angles, skew position,
and skewed bolt groups.
To select the dimension type to use:
1. Go to the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. Use the Straight box to set the dimension type for straight dimensions.
3. If you want to override the straight dimension setting for horizontal dimensions, select
an option from the In x direction box.
The options are the same as in the Straight box. If you use the blank option, Tekla
Structures also uses the Straight option settings for horizontal dimensions. The x
direction usually means dimensions parallel to the drawing x axis.
4. Use the Angle box to set the dimension type for angle dimensions.
5. In Triangle base length, set the base length of a triangle.
6. Click OK.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 255

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Setting dimension appearance (p. 255)
General dimension properties (p. 361)
XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR
XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS
XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS
XS_SINGLE_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS
XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT
XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS

Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions

You can select whether to show zero at the zero point of the absolute dimensions, and also
change the orientation of the absolute dimensions.
To change the appearance of absolute dimensions:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options, and go to the Drawing dimensions page.
2. Set Show zero in absolute dimensions to No if you do not want to show zero at the
zero points in absolute dimensions.
Yes is the default value.
3. Set Draw absolute dimension values parallel to dimension line to Yes to show
dimensions parallel to dimension lines in absolute dimensions.
No is the default value.
4. Click OK.

Example In the following example, dimensions are parallel to the dimension line and zero is shown at
the zero point.

Selecting the dimension format, precision and units

You can select the desired format, precision and units for the dimensions.
To select the format, precision and units:
1. Go to the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. In the Format area, select the desired format for straight dimensions from the Straight
list and for angle dimensions from the Angle list.
Tekla Structures uses the information in brackets only when necessary. For example, the
dimension 500.00 is shown as 500 if you use the format ###.[#] and as 500.0 if you use
the format ###.#.
3. In the Precision area, select the desired precision for straight dimensions from the
Straight list and for angle dimensions from the Angle list.
4. Select the units to be used from the Units list.
5. Click OK.

256 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
If you want to change the decimal separator, use the advanced option
XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options > Dimensioning: General.

Grouping large dimension values

You can select to group long dimension values to display them more clearly.
To group dimension values:
1. Go to the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. To group dimensions, set Use grouping to Yes.
If you select No, Tekla Structures does not use any grouping.
3. Click OK.
4. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Dimensioning: General and enter
values for the following advanced options:
• Use XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER to specify the separator
character to be used in large dimension values. If you enter a comma (,), then
154321 is displayed as 154,321. If no character is specified, Tekla Structures uses a
space.
• Use XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT to specify the number of digits
after which a separator character will be inserted in dimension values. If you enter
3, then 154321 is displayed as 154 321.

Setting the dimension extension line length

You can adjust the length of the dimension extension lines.
To adjust the extension line settings:
1. Go to the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. Select an option from the Short extension line list:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 257

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Options Description
No

Yes Use this option to create extension lines all of the same
length:

On grid lines only Use this option to use the short extension line
automatically if a dimension line falls on a grid line.
Elsewhere the extension line will be as usual.

3. Click OK.
4. Optional: To adjust the extension line lengths, go to Tools > Options > Advanced
Options > Dimensioning: General and use the following advanced options:
• Use XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR to adjust the length of
the dimension extension lines that are facing towards the dimension points.
• Use XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR to adjust the length of the
dimension extension lines that are facing away from the dimension points.

258 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Text height * 1.0 (default)

Text height * 1.5 (default)

Creating exaggerated dimensions

You can exaggerate narrow dimensions to make them easier to read.
When you enable the exaggeration of the dimensions, a dimension that is narrower than the
defined limit is enlargened. If there are many exaggerated dimensions, Tekla Structures
arranges them automatically. Setting exaggeration consists of selecting the exaggeration limit
and the exaggeration scale, enabling the exaggeration and setting the direction, origin, width,
position and height for the exaggerated dimensions.
To set the exaggeration:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Options > Drawing dimensions.
2. Enter the exaggeration limit in the Exaggeration limit box.
3. Select Paper or Model as the exaggeration scaling method.
If you select Paper, the exaggeration limit is multiplied by the view scale. For example,
if the scale is 1:10 and the limit is 10 mm, then all the dimensions smaller than 100 mm
are exaggerated. If you select Model, and the scale is 1:10, all the dimensions smaller
than 10 mm are exaggerated regardless of the drawing scale.
4. Click OK.
5. Go to the Advanced tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
6. Enable the exaggeration by setting Exaggeration to Specified.
7. Set the values for Direction, Origin, Width, Position and Height.
8. Click OK.

Limitations Exaggeration works only if the dimension extension lines are long. Set Short extension line to
No on the General tab of the Dimension Properties dialog box.

Example See below for an example of exaggerated dimensions:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 259

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Setting dimension appearance (p. 255)
Advanced dimension properties (p. 365)

Showing plate side marks automatically

You can create plate side marks on dimension leader lines. The plate side marks indicate
whether the dimension point is to the face or center of the part, for example, a plate, web, or
flange.
To create plate side marks:
1. Go to the Advanced tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. In Plate side marks > Type, select Automatic.
3. Select the color, offset and the size of the mark.
4. Click OK.
Below is an example of plate side marks.

260 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT
Advanced dimension properties (p. 365)
Setting dimension appearance (p. 255)

Changing the prefix in radial dimensions

By default, the prefix of radial dimensions is R, for example, R 200.
To change the dimension prefix to Radius 200, for example:
1. Open the file dim_operation.ail located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\messages\.
2. Change the prefix R to Radius:
string dim_operation_dim_radius_prefix{ ... entry = ("enu", "R
");};
string dim_operation_dim_radius_prefix{ ... entry = ("enu",
"Radius ");};

Example: Sloped dimension texts

Tekla Structures aligns slightly sloped dimension text. If the dimension text is sloped more than
a certain degree, Tekla Structures flips the text.
Below is an example of a dimension text that is slightly sloped.

Below is an example of a flipped dimension text.

The default limit for aligning dimension text is 0.1 (5.74 degrees). When this limit is
exceeded, the dimension text gets flipped. To adjust this limit, use the advanced option
XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 261

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings
In the general arrangement drawing General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box, you can
create part, grid and overall dimensions, and control the way they are created. You can
experiment with different combinations of options to achieve different kinds of dimensioning
effects.
To select the dimensions to create and modify the dimensioning settings:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > General Arrangement Drawings.
2. Click Dimensioning.
3. Select the dimensions to create and modify the related settings.
4. On the Grids tab, adjust the grid dimension and overall dimension creation settings and
the positioning of the dimensions.
5. On the Parts tab, adjust part dimension creation settings and the positioning of the
dimensions.
6. Click OK.

You can adjust the general arrangement drawing properties further in the
final drawing using the semi-automatic GA Dimensioning Settings.

Object groups in dimensioning

In dimensioning of general arrangement drawings, the term object group refers to objects that
have been grouped together for the purpose of dimensioning object groups on different
dimension lines.
You can use the object groups (selection filters) that you have created when modeling, or create
the necessary groups through the Parts tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog
box. For example, you might want to create an object group for beams of a certain size.

Dimensioning object groups on different dimension lines

You can use object groups to specify different objects to be dimensioned on different
dimension lines.
To do this:
1. Go to the Parts tab of the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box.

262 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
2. Add the desired object groups to dimensioning rules by clicking Add rule and selecting
the rule from the list box in the Object group column.
3. Optional: You can create object groups of your own by clicking Object group. For
example, add object group rules for beams of different size.
4. For each object group, select the Positioning option, the Horizontal position option,
and the Vertical position option, depending on the type of the objects in the group. For
example, for beam groups, set Horizontal position to Left side to position the beam
dimensions to the left side of the grid.
5. Optional: In the Tag column, enter the text tags that you want to display for the different
object groups in the drawing. For example, enter the size of the beam.

Example In this example, we created several beam groups, one for each beam size to be dimensioned,
then selected the position for the dimensions in different groups, and added tags to be displayed
for each group:

Example: Grid and overall dimensions

Here are some examples of what the grid and overall dimensions look like with different
settings selected on the Grid tab.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 263

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Dimensioning setting Example
Grid line dimensions is set to
On, Overall dimension to On,
Horizontal to Left, and Vertical
to above.

Grid line dimensions is set to

On, Overall dimension to Off,
Horizontal to Left, and Vertical
to above.

See also Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (p. 374)
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings (p. 262)

Example: Using maximum leader line length options

Here are some examples of how the dimensions are positioned when you have set values for the
Maximum leader line length options on the Parts tab.

264 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Dimensioning setting Example
A value has been set for
Outside dimensions.

A value has been set for

Inside dimensions.

Example: Dimensioning parts partly outside the view

Here is an example of how the parts are dimensioned if you set the option Include parts not
entirely in the view to On on the Parts tab.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 265

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (p. 374)
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings (p. 262)

Example: Limiting the number of outside dimensions

Here is an example of what the part dimensions look like when you have set 3 as the value for
the option Maximum number of outside dimensions on the Parts tab. Tekla Structures has
created three dimensions outside the grid and the fourth inside the grid.

266 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (p. 374)
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings (p. 262)

Example: Part dimension positioning

Here are some examples of how the part dimensions are positioned in general arrangement
drawings with different positioning settings selected on the Parts tab.
In the example below, Positioning is set to Inside grid, which places all dimensions next to or
near the grid.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 267

Modifying automatic drawing settings
In the example below, Positioning is set to Outside grid, which places all dimensions outside
the grid.

268 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
In the example below, Horizontal position is set to Left side, which places all dimensions to
horizontal parts to the left of the grid.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 269

Modifying automatic drawing settings
In the example below, Horizontal position is set to Right side, which places all dimensions to
horizontal parts to the right of the grid.

270 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
In the example below, Horizontal position is set to Distributed to both sides, which places all
dimensions to horizontal parts to the side of the grid nearest the part they are dimensioning.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 271

Modifying automatic drawing settings
In the example below, Vertical position is set to Above, which places all dimensions to vertical
parts above the grid.

272 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
In the example below, Vertical position is set to Below, which places all dimensions to vertical
parts under the grid.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 273

Modifying automatic drawing settings
In the example below, Vertical position is set to Distributed to both sides, which places all
dimensions to vertical parts to the side of the grid nearest the part they are dimensioning.

274 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (p. 374)
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings (p. 262)

Example: Dimensions in anchor bolt plans

Below are examples of what the dimensions in anchor bolt plans look like in different
situations.
First an example of a typical situation, where all columns are located in grid line intersections:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 275

Modifying automatic drawing settings
If the column reference point is not located on the grid line, Tekla Structures dimensions the
reference point automatically relative to the grid lines. See the example below.

If the column is rotated relative to the drawing, the rotation is also automatically dimensioned.
See the example below.

276 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
If you set the advanced option
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS to FALSE and
create the drawing, all dimensions are in the drawing coordinate system.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 277

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings
In the Dimensioning dialog box, you can control what gets dimensioned and how in a drawing.
You can experiment with different combinations of options to achieve different kinds of
dimensioning effects.
To select the dimensions to create and modify the dimensioning settings:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Dimensioning.
3. Select the dimensions to create and adjust the related settings.
The available tabs and settings depend on the drawing type:
• On the Part dimensions tab, select the part dimensions to create and adjust the
related settings.
• On the General tab, adjust settings related to minimizing the number of views,
dimension type, combining dimensions, closing dimensions, limit for dimensioning
asymmetry in secondary parts, forward offset, grid dimensions, dimension position,
and part marks on dimension line.
• On the Position dimensions tab select the position dimensions to create. They
indicate the position of parts in relation to the main part or to work points.
• On the Bolt dimensions tab, select the bolt dimensions to create, combine bolt
dimensions and select the side for the dimension.
• On the Dimension grouping tab, group dimensions and adjust the related settings.
• On the Sub-assembly tab, create dimensions for parts in sub-assemblies and adjust
the related settings.
• On the Reinforcement dimensions tab, create dimensions for reinforcing bar
groups in cast unit drawings, add dimension marks and adjust the related settings.
4. Click OK.

See also Creating minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts (p. 279)
Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line (p. 279)
Modifying dimensions for unfolded parts (p. 280)
Creating elevation dimensions (p. 281)
Dimensioning plates (p. 282)
Dimensioning profiles (p. 284)
Creating check dimensions (p. 285)
Example: Part dimensioning (p. 287)
Example: Position dimensioning (p. 290)
Example: Combining dimensions (p. 296)
Example: Closing dimension (p. 295)
Example: Forward offset (p. 300)
Example: Recognizable distance (p. 300)
Example: Combining bolt group dimensions (p. 299)
Example: Preferred dimension side (p. 301)
Example: Reinforcement dimension (p. 302)
Example: Bolt dimensioning (p. 290)
General dimensioning properties (p. 366)
Part dimensioning properties (p. 370)
Position dimensioning properties (p. 368)
Bolt dimensioning properties (p. 371)

278 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Dimension grouping properties (p. 372)
Sub-assembly dimensioning properties (p. 373)
Reinforcement dimensioning properties (p. 373)
Adding dimensions (p. 99)

Creating minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts

By default, Tekla Structures does not create minimum and maximum position dimensions for
bolts.
To create minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Dimensioning: Bolts
2. Set XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT to TRUE.
The examples below show a maximum bolt dimension of 40:

Setting Example
Before setting the advanced option.

After setting the advanced option to

TRUE.

XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)

Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line

You can group identical parts, bolts, components and cuts or shapes to the same dimension line.
You also have the option to include automatic dimension tags to grouped dimensions.
To group identical objects to the same dimension line:
1. In the Dimensioning Properties dialog box, go to the Dimension Grouping tab.
2. In Activate dimension grouping, select the objects that you want to group.
3. Highlight a row (Parts, Bolts, Components or Cuts/Shapes in the Activate
dimension grouping list and select the elements by which you define the identical
conditions in grouping properties.
4. In Automatic tagging, select the appropriate options to include automatic dimension
tags.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 279

Modifying automatic drawing settings
5. If you want Tekla Structures to update dimension grouping automatically, set the option
Update grouping when model changes to Yes.
6. Click OK.

You can change the dimension tag contents in the final drawing and
include some other elements in the tag.

Modifying dimensions for unfolded parts

In single-part drawings, you can control the dimensions Tekla Structures adds for unfolded
parts that have been created using View > Attributes > Unfolded =Yes. Use the advanced
options in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Dimensioning: Unfolding.
To control the dimensions:

To Do this
Create bending line dimensions for Set the advanced option
unfolded parts. XS_DRAW_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONS_IN_U
NFOLDING=TRUE.
Create angle and radius dimensions for Set the advanced option
unfolded parts. XS_DRAW_ANGLE_AND_RADIUS_INFO_IN_UNF
OLDING=TRUE.
Set a prefix text for an angle dimension. Set the advanced option
XS_ANGLE_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_L
INE_DIMENSIONING=A=.
Set a prefix text for a radius dimension. Set the advanced option
XS_RADIUS_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_
LINE_DIMENSIONING=R=.

280 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
To Do this
For angle text dimensions, show the Set the advanced option
interior angle instead of the exterior XS_DRAW_INSIDE_ANGLE_IN_UNFOLDING=TR
angle. UE.
Set the format for angle text. Set the advanced option
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_FORMAT=1.
###= 0
###[.#]= 1
###.#=2
###[.##]= 3
###.##= 4
###[.###]=5
###.###= 6
### #/#= 7

###/##.###= 8
Set the accuracy of the angle text. Set the advanced option
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_PRECISION=10.
0.00= 1
0.50= 2
0.33= 3
0.25= 4
1/8= 5
1/16= 6
1/32= 7
1/10= 8
1/100= 9
1/1000= 10

See also Selecting the dimension format, precision and units (p. 256)
Dimension format, precision and unit properties (p. 363)
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)

Creating elevation dimensions

You can add elevation dimensions (level marks) in your drawings for the start and end points of
parts. Tekla Structures dimensions elevations relative to a reference point, which you can
change. For example, if the elevation is 5000 mm, and you set the reference point to 200, the
elevation changes to 4800 mm. You can also change the elevation dimension prefix, which in
the English version is EL by default.
To change the reference point and create elevation dimensions using another prefix:
1. Go to the Position dimensions tab, and set Elevation dimensions to On.
2. Click OK.
3. In the drawing properties dialog box, click View > Attributes.
4. Do one of the following:
• To use a specific value, select Specified from the Datum point for elevations list
and enter a value in the Datum level field.
• To measure reference points relative to the view plane, select View plane from the
Datum point for elevations list.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 281

Modifying automatic drawing settings
5. Click OK.
6. To change the prefix, open the dim_operation.ail file in any text editor. This file
is located in the Tekla Structures/<version>/messages/ folder. Replace
EL with a new prefix on the following line in the file:
string dim_operation_dim_elevation_prefix{entry = ("enu",
"EL");};

Shortening value added in the user-defined properties of a part affects

also elevation dimensions.

Example

Limitations Tekla Structures creates elevation dimensions for skew parts only if the parts are in the same
position in the drawing as they are in the model. This means that the coordinate system must be
set to model.
If you are using local, oriented, or brace coordinate systems, Tekla Structures does not draw
the elevation dimensions for skewed parts by default. If you want to create elevation
dimensions, set the variable XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS to TRUE in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options > Dimensioning: Parts. See below for an example of an elevation
dimension for a skew part.

282 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
To dimension plates:

To Do this
Dimension the plates to the edge Set the advanced option
that is nearest to the neighbor part. XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGH
BOUR to TRUE.
Dimension the plates to the 1. Disable the advanced option
leading edge of the beams. XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING by deleting
the value from the box.
2. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_N
EIGHBOUR to FALSE.
3. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE to
TRUE.
Dimension the plates to the 1. Disable the advanced option
leading edge of the columns. XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING by deleting
the value from the box.
2. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_N
EIGHBOUR to FALSE.
3. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_C
OLUMNS_ALSO to TRUE.
Dimension the plates to the 1. Disable the advanced option
trailing edge. XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING by deleting
the value from the box.
2. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_N
EIGHBOUR to FALSE.
3. Disable the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE by
deleting the value from the box.
4. Disable the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_C
OLUMNS_ALSO in the same way.
Dimension the plates using their 1. Set the advanced option
original reference points in the XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_N
model. EIGHBOUR to FALSE.
If you have created one plate from 2. Set the advance option
left to right and another from right XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING to TRUE.
to left, Tekla Structures
dimensions them differently in
drawings.

Below is an example of dimensioning all plates to the leading edge.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 283

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOUR
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)

Dimensioning profiles
You can affect the way Tekla Structures dimensions different profiles in drawings. For
example, you can have Tekla Structures always dimension round bars to the middle of the
profile and large I profiles to the top.
To define dimension settings for profiles, you need to edit the dimension planes table
dim_planes_table.txt.
To define dimensioning settings for profiles:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Dimensioning: Parts.
2. Set the advanced option XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE as follows:
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE=%XS_PROFDB%\dim_planes_table.txt
This variable defines the path to the part dimension planes table.
3. Open the dim_planes_table.txt file in any text editor, for example, Microsoft
Notepad. The file is located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\profile.
4. Edit the file contents.
5. To use the new settings in drawings, restart Tekla Structures and recreate the drawings.
Changing the file does not automatically update existing drawings.

Example Here is an example of a dimension planes table:

dim_planes_table.txt
FLANGE WEB
ProfType,MaxSize, middle,right, left, middle, right, left
========================================================
1, 300.0, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE*, TRUE
7, -1.0, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE

The line beginning with 1 means that Tekla Structures always dimensions I profiles (ProfType
= 1) smaller than 300 mm (MaxSize = 300) to the middle of the flange and to the right edge of
the web, no matter how the part was created.

284 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
The line beginning with 7 means that Tekla Structures always dimensions round tubes
(ProfType = 7) to the middle of the profile
The ProfType numbers run in the same order as the profiles in the Profile catalog:
• 1 = I profile
• 2 = L profile
• 3 = Z profile
• 4 = U profile
• 5 = plate
• 6 = round bar
• 7 = round tube
• 8 = square pipe
• 9 = C profile
• 10 = T profile
• 15 = ZZ profile
• 16 = CC profile
• 17 = CW profile
• 51 = polygon_plate etc.
The value -1.0 in the MaxSize indicates that there is no size limit for the profile.
The asterisk after TRUE indicates that it is the default value.

Creating check dimensions

You can create additional dimensions to check the accuracy of dimensions.
To create check dimensions, do any of the following:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 285

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Number in
To Do this the figure
Create check dimensions between Click Dimensioning > Part
outermost work points. dimensions and set Main part work
points to Yes.
Create check dimensions between Click Dimensioning > Bolt
outermost bolts. dimensions and set Extreme bolts
to Assembly or Main part.
Create check dimensions from Click Dimensioning > Bolt
outermost work point to first bolt. dimensions and set Extreme bolts
to Assembly or Main part and
Extreme bolts to work points to
Yes.
Create horizontal and vertical check Click Dimensioning Position
dimensions between the work points dimensions and set Main part
in a skewed brace. skew position to Yes.
Create check dimensions between Click Dimensioning > Position
the work points, such as the dimensions and set Position bolts
intersections of main and neighbor to or Position parts to Working
part reference lines. points or Both.
Create check dimensions to the bolt Click Dimensioning > Position
hole locations in the main part. dimensions and set Main part bolt
position to On.
Create knock-off dimensions. Click Dimensioning > Part
dimensions and set Knock-off
dimensions to On.

286 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
To change the appearance of the check dimensions and the type of the
knock-off dimension to use, click Dimension in the drawing properties
dialog box and go to the Advanced tab.

Example: Part dimensioning

Here are some examples of what the part dimensions look like with different settings selected
on the Part dimensions tab.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 287

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Dimensioning setting Example
Internal dimensions set
to None

Internal dimensions set

to All.

Overall dimensions

Main part shape (Shape

dimensions) set to On.

288 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Dimensioning setting Example
Bevel dimensions set to
On.

Bevel angle set to Angle

of cut.

Bevel angle set to Angle

of beam.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 289

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Example: Bolt dimensioning
Here are a couple of examples of what the bolt dimensions look like with different settings.

Dimensioning setting Example

Main part bolt internal
dimensions is set to All on the
Bolt dimensions tab of the
Dimensioning Properties dialog
box.

All bolt and hole dimensions are

shown in the front view of the
main assembly. The elements
Gage of outstanding leg (GOL)
and Center-to-center distance
(C/C or Gage) have been added in
a bolt and hole mark in Bolt
mark... > Content.

Example: Position dimensioning

Here are some examples of what the position dimensions look like with different settings
selected on the Position dimensions tab.

290 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Dimensioning
setting Example
Position parts to is set
to None.

Position parts to is set

to Main part.

Position bolts to is set

to Working points.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 291

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Dimensioning
setting Example
Secondary part is
dimensioned By bolts.

Secondary part is
dimensioned By parts.

Secondary part is
dimensioned By both.

Secondary part is
dimensioned By bolts.
Secondary part
dimension direction
is Neighbor part.
Position from is set to
Work points.

Running dimensions start from the intersection of the main

and secondary part (=work point)

Dimensions are aligned with the neighboring part

292 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Dimensioning
setting Example
Main part bolt
position is set to Off.
(Main part bolt
internal dimensions
is set to Internal on the
Bolt dimensions tab.)

Main part bolt

position is set to On.
(Main part bolt
internal dimensions
is set to Internal on the
Bolt dimensions tab.)

Main part skew

position is set to Yes.

Skew position is set to

Angle.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 293

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Dimensioning
setting Example
Centered part is set to
Internal.

Centered part is set to

Position.

Center bolt is set to

Internal.

Center bolt is set to

Position.

294 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Example: Closing dimension
Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures creates dimensions with different options
selected in the Close dimensions area on the General tab.

Closing option Example

Close dimensions is set to No.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 295

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Closing option Example
Close dimensions is set to All.

Short dimensions is set to No.

Example: Combining dimensions

Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures combines dimensions with different options
selected on the General tab.

296 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Combining option Example
Option No prevents dimensions
from being combined.

Option 1 combines part position

dimensions with part internal
dimensions, and bolt group internal
dimensions with bolt edge distances.
Bolt position dimensions are not
combined with bolt internal
dimensions.

Option 2 combines the part position

dimension with part internal
dimensions and bolt group internal
dimensions. Bolt internal
dimensions are combined with bolt
position dimensions. Edge distances
are shown separately.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 297

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Combining option Example
Option 3 combines bolt internal
dimensions and position dimensions
in the same dimension line.

Option 4 combines bolt group

position dimensions with part
position dimensions. Part and bolt
internal dimensions are not
combined with this option, but bolt
internal dimensions are combined
with bolt edge distances.

Option 5 combines internal

dimensions and the position
dimension of bolt groups where
there are several bolt groups.

Option 4.5 uses a combination of option 5 for the main part and a combination of option 4
for the secondary parts.
Distance 5’-0

298 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Combining option Example
Distance 1’-0

Min distance 5’-0

Min distance 5"

Example: Combining bolt group dimensions

For dimensioning and marking purposes, Tekla Structures treats bolt groups located close
together as one group on the basis of the minimum number of dimensions to combine and
format selected on the Bolt dimensions tab. See an example below:

Bolt group 1

Bolt group 2

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 299

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Bolt dimensioning properties (p. 371)
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)

Example: Forward offset

Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures locates dimensions with different forward
offset values set on the General tab.

Forward offset setting Example

Forward offset greater than the 1’-8
dimension to the hole group.

Forward offset set to a smaller

value.

Example: Recognizable distance

Here is an example of how Tekla Structures uses the Recognizable distance setting. If you set
value for Recognizable distance on the General tab, and the asymmetry of the parts is smaller
than the distance you entered, Tekla Structures represents it using a dimension.
This setting is used, when the Internal dimension is set to Necessary. Recognizable distance
dimension is not necessarily needed, if the part can be assembled correctly without it.
A typical example is a rectangle that is almost as long as it is wide.

300 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also General dimensioning properties (p. 366)
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)

Example: Preferred dimension side

You can set the preferred dimension side for parts and bolts on the Part dimensions tab and
Bolt dimensions tab.The examples below show how the different settings for Preferred dim
side look like for part dimensions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 301

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)

Example: Reinforcement dimension

Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures creates dimensions for reinforcing bar groups
with different options selected on the Reinforcement dimensions tab.

Settings Example
Dimensions for reinforcing bar
groups is set to On, no dimension
tags selected in Mark location.

Dimensions for reinforcing bar

groups is set to On, dimension
tags selected in Mark location.

Dimensions for reinforcing bar

groups is set to On, dimension
tags selected in Mark location,
Close dimensions to binding
geometry is set to Yes.

6.8 Automatic marks

Marks are associative annotation objects that are used for identifying an individual object. A
mark displays a set of properties that the user has selected. Automatic marks are marks that
Tekla Structures creates in a drawing based on the mark properties.
The options in the mark properties dialog box define how Tekla Structures shows marks in
drawings. Mark properties are generally the same for each of the available mark types.
Tekla Structures creates the following automatic marks:
• Part marks
• Bolt marks
• Neighbor part marks
• Connection marks
• Reinforcement marks
• Surface treatment marks
• Dimension marks
• View and section view label marks, and section marks

302 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Merging marks automatically (p. 319)
Mark properties (p. 376)
Mark elements (p. 382)
Placement settings (p. 249)
Associative annotation objects (p. 127)

Adding automatic marks

You can set up marks for building objects in the drawing properties dialog box. You can save
mark settings in a drawing property file for later use.
To adjust the automatic mark settings for building objects:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Load the drawing properties that you want to change by selecting the drawing property
file from the list next to the Load button and clicking Load.
3. Click the button of the mark type you want to modify, for example, Part mark.
4. For some marks, you need to select from the list the object that you are defining the
marks for. For example, for part marks, you can define part mark options independently
for main and secondary parts and for sub-assembly main and secondary parts.
5. Add elements in the mark by double-clicking the elements in the Available elements
list.
6. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to place the elements in the order you want.
7. Modify the appearance, placement and visibility settings on the Content and General
(or Appearance) tabs.
8. When you are ready, click OK in the subdialog to save the changes and close the
subdialog.
9. Click OK to save the settings in the drawing property file.

Example This is an example of a part mark.

Assembly position

Size

Mark frame

Profile

Element frame

Length

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 303

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Merging marks automatically (p. 319)
Mark location (p. 315)
Setting mark appearance (p. 311)
Defining placement settings for annotation objects (p. 251)
Mark properties (p. 376)
Mark elements (p. 382)
Adding symbols in marks (p. 304)
Adding templates in marks (p. 304)
Adding user-defined attributes and template attributes in marks (p. 307)
Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options (p. 308)
Adding pull-out pictures in reinforcement marks (p. 310)

Adding symbols in marks

All types of building object marks and view label marks allow you to add symbols in them. You
can select the symbol file to be used and the symbol to be added in the mark.
1. Depending on the properties dialog you are in, do one the following:
• In the building object mark properties dialog box, click Symbols in the Available
elements list.
• In the view or section view properties dialog box, go to the View label or Label tab,
and click the... button next to one of the Ax boxes you want to use
2. In the Mark content - Symbol dialog box, click the Select button next to the File box to
select the symbol file you want to use.
3. When you have selected the file, click the Select button next to the Number box to
select the symbol you want to use.
4. Click OK.
Tekla Structures adds the name of the symbol in the elements list.

Adding templates in marks

You can create custom graphical templates (.tpl) with Template Editor and add them as
elements in all types of building object marks and associative notes. In the mark templates, you
can include detailed information of an embed or assembly, such as the submaterial used. Or you
can use a template that changes the unit and the number of decimals in measurement values in
a mark. You can also add graphical objects using the Template Editor tools in your mark
templates. You can use templates in marks and associative notes in all drawing types.
Before you add a template in a mark, ensure that the template you use does not contain any
margins.
To add a template in the mark:
1. In the mark properties dialog box, double-click the Template element to add it in the
mark. This will remove all other elements from the mark.
2. Select a template from the list in the Mark content - template dialog box. If you have
not created a template yet, or want to edit the template, you can do it from here.
Remember that if you edit the template here, the change affects all drawings that have
marks containing the changed template.
3. Click OK.
4. Click OK to save the mark properties.

304 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
The mark templates are by default searched from the following folders in
the following order:
%XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY%\mark
ModelDir\mark
%XS_PROJECT%\mark
%XS_FIRM%\mark
%XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM%\mark
%XS_SYSTEM%\mark
The mark folder name can be changed using the advanced option
XS_TEMPLATE_MARK_SUB_DIRECTORY

Example

Limitations Mark templates do not support image files like the other graphical drawing templates.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 305

Modifying automatic drawing settings
4. Click File > New and create a new graphical template.
5. Click Insert > Component > Row.
6. Select PART as the content type.
7. Click Insert > Text, enter L and place it inside the row you just added.
8. Click Insert > Value field and place the value field on the right side of the L text.
9. In the displayed Select Attribute [Part] dialog box, scroll down to PROFILE - Profile,
open the profile tree, select the HEIGHT - height property and click OK.
10. Double-click the value field. In the Value Field Properties dialog box, change the
settings as follows:
• Unit: inch
• Decimals: 1
• Length: 8
11. Click OK.
12. Click Insert > Text, enter X as text and place it on the right side of the value field.
13. Add the second value field for the width information in the same way as you added the
height field.
Select the WIDTH - Width profile property and modify the settings as above.
14. Click Insert > Text and add the second X between the value fields.
15. Add the third value field for the profile flange thickness by selecting
FLANGE_THICKNESS_1 - Flange thickness 1 profile property and modify the settings
as follows:
• Unit: inch
• Decimals: 2
• Length: 4
16. Click Edit > Properties... and minimize the height and the width of the row.
17. Click File > Save to save the template.
The template is by default saved as a .tpl file in the \mark folder under the model
folder. You can copy this template to other models as required.
18. In Tekla Structures, click Refresh list in the Mark content - template dialog box to see
the template you created.
19. Select the template and click OK.
20. Click Modify and OK in the Part Mark Properties dialog box.

Example The first example below uses fractions and the second one uses decimals.

306 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Example 2: Creating a mark template containing a formula in the value field
In the second example, you also want to use decimals instead of fractions in US Imperial
environment. Now you will use a formula in the value field to make the change.
To create a part mark template and define the content by using a formula in the value field:
1. In an open drawing, select a part and click Annotating > Add Part Marks > For
Selected Parts.
2. Double-click Template in the Available elements list.
3. In the Mark content - template dialog box, click Create new....
This starts the Template Editor.
4. Click File > New and create a new graphical template.
5. Click Insert > Component > Row.
6. Select PART as the content type.
7. Click Insert > Value field, and place the field.
8. In the displayed Select Attribute [Part] dialog box, click the Formula... button.
9. Add the following formula in the Formula box and click OK:
"L " + format(GetValue("HEIGHT"),"Length","inch",1) + " x "+
format(GetValue("WIDTH"),"Length","inch",1) + " x " +
format(GetValue("PROFILE.FLANGE_THICKNESS_1"),"Length","inch",2)
10. Double-click the value field to open the Value Field Properties dialog box.
11. Set the Data type to text, enter a name for the field, for example, PART_MARK, and
ensure that the length value you give in the Length field is high enough to fit all the
characters and numbers included, for example, 20.
12. Click OK.
13. Click Edit > Properties... and minimize the height and the width of the row.
14. Click File > Save to save the template.
The template is by default saved as a .tpl file in the \mark folder under the model
folder. You can copy this template to other models as required.
15. In Tekla Structures, click Refresh list in the Mark content - template dialog box to see
the template you created.
16. Select the template and click OK.
17. Click Modify and OK in the Part Mark Properties dialog box.

See also Example 1: Creating a mark template containing separate value fields and text elements
(p. 305)
Adding templates in marks (p. 304)

Adding user-defined attributes and template attributes in marks

All types of building object marks allow you to add user-defined attributes and template
attributes. For example, you might want to add control numbers or specify the number of
characters in part numbers in assembly or part marks.
To add a user-defined attribute in a building object mark:
1. In the mark properties dialog box, double-click the User-defined attribute element to
add it to the mark.
2. Enter the user-defined attribute name in the Mark content - user defined attribute
dialog box exactly as it appears in the objects.inp file.
If you want to enter a template attribute, enter it in the correct format.
3. Click OK.
4. Click OK to save the mark properties.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 307

Modifying automatic drawing settings
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL
TOP_LEVEL
BOTTOM_LEVEL
Automatic marks (p. 302)

Changing the dimension format in level attributes in marks

You can add level attributes (TOP_LEVEL, BOTTOM_LEVEL, ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL or
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL) in part mark and associative note elements as user-defined
attributes. The level attributes take the dimension format from the
MarkDimensionFormat.dim file. You can change the dimension format in the level
attributes in an open drawing.
Precondition is that you have in your drawing part marks or associative notes that contain a
level attribute the format of which you want to change.
To change the dimension format in level attributes:
1. In the open drawing, click Dimensioning > Dimension Properties.
2. Select MarkDimensionFormat from the Load list and click Load.
3. Change the unit, precision and format.
4. Click Save to save the changes in the MarkDimensionFormat file.
5. Right-click the drawing and select Update all marks.

Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options

You can use a couple of advanced options to define the contents of the bolt mark Size element
in different types of drawings in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Marking: Bolts.

• Note that general arrangement drawings have separate advanced

options.
• Any changes made to the advanced options listed in the table below
will take place only in the new drawings you create and if you
modify the affected bolt marks.

To define the contents for a bolt mark size element:

To Do this
Define the contents of the size element in slotted Set a value for the advanced option
hole marks or longhole marks (general arrangement XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
drawings).
Set a value for the advanced option
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.
Define the contents of the size element in slotted Set a value for the advanced option
hole marks or longhole marks (general arrangement XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
drawings) for site bolts.
Set a value for the advanced option
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.

308 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
To Do this
Define the contents of the size element in slotted Set a value for the advanced option
hole marks or longhole marks (general arrangement XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
drawings) for workshop bolts.
Set a value for the advanced option
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.
Define the contents of the size element in hole Set a value for the advanced option
marks. XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
Set a value for the advanced option
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.
Define the contents of the size element in hole Set a value for the advanced option
marks for site bolts. XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Set a value for the advanced option
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Define the contents of the size element in hole Set a value for the advanced option
marks for workshop bolts. XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Set a value for the advanced option
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Define the contents of the size element in bolt Set a value for the advanced option
marks. XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Set a value for the advanced option
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Define the contents of the size element in bolt Set a value for the advanced option
marks for site bolts. XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Set a value for the advanced option
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Define the contents of the size element in bolt Set a value for the advanced option
marks for workshop bolts. XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Set a value for the advanced option
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA

You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for the above
advanced options. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special characters enter a
backslash (\) followed by an ASCII number. You can use the options in any order, and make
calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• BOLT_DIAMETER
• BOLT_LENGTH
• HOLE_DIAMETER
• LONGHOLE_X
• LONGHOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• NAME_SHORT

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 309

Modifying automatic drawing settings
• NAME_FULL

Example Example of using the advanced options:

XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE=D%HOLE_DIAMETER%(%HOLE_DIAMETER+LONGH
OLE_X%x%HOLE_DIAMETER+LONGHOLE_Y%)
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE=D%HOLE_DIAMETER%

Adding pull-out pictures in reinforcement marks

To illustrate the shape and dimensions of a reinforcing bar in a drawing, you can add a pull-out
picture of the bar in the reinforcement mark.
To add pull-out picture in the mark:
1. In the Cast Unit - Reinforcement Mark Properties dialog box, double-click the Pull-
out picture element in the Available elements list to add it to the reinforcement mark.
2. In the Pull-out picture dialog box, select the scaling option in Scale by:
• Auto autoscales the pull-out picture.
• One factor and Two factors scale the pull-out picture according to the values that
you enter.
The scale of the pull-out is relative to the scale of the drawing view. For example, if
the drawing view scale is 1/10 and the pull-out scaling is 2, the actual scale of the
pull-out in the drawing view is 1/5.
3. In End marks, define the shape of bar ends in the pull-out picture.
4. In Dimensions, select whether you want to show bar dimensions in the pull-out picture.
5. In Exaggeration, select whether you want to show reinforcing bar hooks more clearly in
the pull-out picture.
6. In Bending angle, select whether you want to show bar bending angles in the pull-out
picture.
7. Click OK.
8. Click OK to save the mark properties.

310 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Example

To change the color, line type, or representation of a pull-out, open the

rebar_config.inp file in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\
system and edit the following lines: PulloutColor,
PulloutVisibleLinetype and PulloutRepresentation.

Setting mark appearance

You can set the mark appearance using the options on the Content and General tabs, and also
for reinforcement marks on the Appearance tab.

See also Setting the appearance of mark text, frames and leader line (p. 312)
Showing mark frames and leader lines for hidden parts (p. 314)
Mark location (p. 315)
Setting a predefined location for beam, bracing and column marks (p. 315)
Setting the visibility of marks (p. 311)
Unit settings for mark elements (p. 318)
Placement settings (p. 249)
Automatic marks (p. 302)
Mark appearance properties (p. 376)
Mark properties (p. 376)

Setting the visibility of marks

Using the visibility options in the mark properties you can indicate the views where the marks
are displayed.
To set the visibility of marks:
1. Go to the General (or Appearance) tab page of the mark properties dialog box.
2. Select where you want to display the marks using the Visibility of marks or Visibility in
view options. The available options depend on the mark type.
3. Click OK.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 311

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Mark properties (p. 376)

Setting the appearance of mark text, frames and leader line

You c an add frames around single mark elements and around the mark itself. You can also
adjust the appearance of the mark text and leader line.
To adjust the appearance of mark text, leader line and frames:
1. On the Content tab, select an element from the Elements in mark list.
2. Click Add frame.
3. Select a Type and Color for the frame.
You can select a different frame type and color for each element you add.
4. Select the element text Color, Font and Height.
You can select a different color, font and font height for each element you add.
5. Go to the General (or the Appearance) tab and select the mark frame Type and Color.
6. Select the Type for the leader line and the Arrow to use.
All marks do not have leader lines, in which case the leader line type selection is not
available.
7. If you want to hide leader lines of hidden parts, set Use hidden lines for hidden parts
to Yes.
This option is not available for all marks.
8. Click OK.

Modifying part mark leader line with advanced options

You can modify part mark leader line settings further using a couple of advanced options in
Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Marking: Parts.
To modify part mark leader line settings using advanced options:

To Do this
Define whether a leader line is drawn Set
when the leader line is shorter than XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_
defined with the advanced option MARKS to TRUE (default) to always draw leader
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_ lines in part marks. When you set this option to
PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH FALSE, the leader line is not drawn if it would
be shorter than the minimum you set for the
advanced option
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_
MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH.
Give a minimum length for the leader Set a value in millimeters for the advanced
line. If the length is less than this value, option
the leaderline is not drawn. XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_
MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH .
Define the leader line start position for a Set a value for the advanced option
leader line with a rectangular frame. XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_F
OR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME.

312 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
To Do this
Define the leader line start position for a Set a value for the advanced option
leader line with no frame. XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_F
OR_NO_FRAME.
Define the length of the leader line Set a value for the advanced option
extension. XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGT
H.

Example An example showing optimized base points.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 313

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Setting mark appearance (p. 311)
XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_STEP_LENGTH
XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_TOLERANCE
XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_OPTIMIZATION

Showing mark frames and leader lines for hidden parts

If a part is behind another part in the drawing so that it is hidden, you can select to show the
mark frame and leader line of the hidden part with a dashed or a solid line.
To set the mark frame and leader line appearance for the part marks of hidden parts:
1. In the part mark properties dialog box, go to the General tab.
2. Use one of the following options:

Setting Example
Use hidden lines for hidden parts: Part mark frame and leader line are
Yes shown with a dashed line.

Use hidden lines for hidden parts: No Part mark frame and leader line are
shown with a solid line.

314 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
3. Click OK.

The advanced option

XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS affects the
displaying of marks of hidden objects in general arrangement drawings.

Setting a predefined location for beam, bracing and column marks

By default, part marks are placed at the end point of the part. You can changes this by adjusting
the predefined location settings for beams, bracings and column marks.
1. Click Tools > Options > Options > Orientation marks.
2. In Mark location: Preferred location for beams and bracings, select Left or Right to
place the mark to the left or right end of the part.
3. In Mark location: Mark always to center of column in GA drawings, select Yes to
place part marks in the center of columns in plan views, or No to place part marks on the
same flange in GA drawings and assembly drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 315

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Part mark and surface treatment mark leader line types and mark location
Part marks and surface treatment marks have several types of leader lines you can select. The
type of the leader line affects the location of the mark.

Leader line type Description

Always use a leader line.

Tries to find a space along the part for the mark. If

impossible, Tekla Structures uses a leader line.

The mark is always along the part. Lack of space might

cause the mark to overlap other elements.

The mark is always inside the part.

The mark is always inside the part and parallel to the part
axis.

Tries to find a space for the mark inside the part. If

impossible, Tekla Structures places the mark along the part
with a leader line.
Tries to find a space inside the part for the mark and align it
parallel to the part axis. If impossible, Tekla Structures
places the mark along the part with a leader line.
Places the part mark along and in the middle of a part face.

Reinforcement leader line types and mark location

Reinforcement marks have several types of leader lines you can select. The type of the leader
line affects the location of the mark.
Tekla Structures tries to place the mark close to the midpoint on straight bars, or to the midpoint
of the longest bar segment.

Reinforcement leader
line type Description
Always creates a leader line.

Tries to find a space along the reinforcing bar for the mark.
If impossible, creates a leader line.
The mark is always along the reinforcing bar. The mark may
overlap other elements if there is not enough space.

316 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Reinforcement leader
line type Description
The mark is parallel to the reinforcing bar.

The mark is parallel to the reinforcing bar on line. If there is

not enough space for the mark, a leader line is created.

Option Image Example

One leader line to group

One leader line per row

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 317

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Option Image Example
Parallel leader lines

Leader lines to one point

Unit settings for mark elements

Tekla Structures uses the contentattributes_global.lst attributes file for setting
the default unit settings for various mark elements. This file defines, for example, the unit used,
and the number of decimals.
The contentattributes_global.lst file also defines default values for attributes in
templates created in Template Editor.

Do not edit contentattributes_global.lst.

For user-defined attributes in mark elements, the default unit settings are taken from the
contentattributes_userdefined.lst file. You can use
contentattributes_userdefined.lst also when you want to configure settings of
your own.

Example This example shows how the part mark element length is defined by default in the
contentattributes_global.lst file in the US Imperial environment and in the
default environment, and what the resulting part marks look like.
US Imperial environment:

318 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Default environment:

You can add in the mark a template that changes the unit and number of
decimals. This affects all drawings that have marks containing the
changed template.

Merging marks automatically

You can let Tekla Structures automatically merge marks.
You can automatically merge part marks, surface treatment marks and reinforcement marks.

Merged part marks

A merged part mark means that only one part mark is used for similar parts in a drawing.
Merged part marks indicate the number of included parts, and contain the specified part mark
contents, and the near side and far side information. The marks are merged only in x direction
of the main part.
Tekla Structures merges marks for visible parts in drawings if:
• The secondary parts are welded or bolted to the same main part.
• The parts are on the same line.
• Distances between the parts are equal.
• The parts have the same part position.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 319

Modifying automatic drawing settings
• Distance between parts is not more than what is set for the advanced option
XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE.
• There are at least as many parts in the array as it has been set for the advanced option
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT.

Limitations • Part marks can be merged only on view and drawing level. It is not possible to merge or
split part marks manually.
• Tekla Structures does not merge neighbor part marks.

Example In the example below, the part marks are merged.

In the example below, the leftmost part marks are not merged, because they are too far from
each other.

In the example below, the marks in the y direction are not merged.

320 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Merging part marks (p. 321)
XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT

Merging part marks

You can merge part marks automatically to reduce the number of marks in the drawing.
To merge part marks automatically:
1. On the General tab of the mark properties dialog box, set the Merge marks to On.
2. Click OK.
This merges marks for identical secondary parts on both faces of main parts.

Merged reinforcement marks

Tekla Structures can automatically merge similar reinforcement marks of bars. Merged marks
may include several blocks, and additional information. Blocks combine similar single marks.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 321

Modifying automatic drawing settings
To have Tekla Structures automatically merge reinforcement marks in
drawings, the reinforcement must be attached to a concrete part or cast
unit in the model.

Tekla Structures automatically merges marks for visible reinforcing bars in drawings if:
• The bars belong to the same concrete part or cast unit
• The direction of the bars is the same
• The bar marks are identical
• The bars are close to each other
• A straight line can be drawn through all the bars
You can also define the distance within which to automatically merge marks for visible
reinforcing bars using advanced options.

Merging reinforcement marks

1. Go to the Merging tab of the Cast Unit - Reinforcement Marks dialog box.
2. Select an option from the Identical marks in same cast unit list to merge marks and
create leader lines.
3. If there are several possible merge directions, select the direction from Preferred
direction of merge.
4. Select the contents to be included in the merged reinforcement marks from the Available
elements list.

To ensure that merged reinforcement marks appear in the drawing,

always include Symbol separating blocks in mark as the last element
in the reinforcement mark. To omit the separating symbol, leave this
field blank, but still include the element in the mark.

5. Optional: Add a frame around the single elements in the mark. You can define the frame
individually for each element.
6. Adjust the font, font height and the color of the mark text. You can adjust these settings
individually for each element.
7. Click OK.

Example In this example, we merge three A φ12 L2000 marks to a block, and six V φ8 L650 marks to
another block, and then merge them in the following way:

322 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Single mark content

Symbol separating the blocks

Block prefix

Distance between groups

Block 1

Block 2

6.9 Grids in drawings

You can show grids in all types of drawings. You change the appearance and visibility of the
labels, label frames, and grid lines.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 323

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Grids in drawings (p. 174)
Defining grid settings (p. 324)
Grid properties (p. 407)

Defining grid settings

You can modify drawing grid properties on the view and drawing level, and on the object level
in an existing drawing.
To modify the grid properties on the drawing level:
1. Click Grid... in the drawing properties dialog box.
2. Modify the grid properties.
3. Click OK.

The advanced options

XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH and
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR allow you
to adjust the grid labels further.

324 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Adding or removing grid lines in the model may cause unwanted
changes in general arrangement drawings in some cases. You should
avoid modifying grids after the general arrangement drawings are
created, or set
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_ASSOCIATE_VIEWS_TO_GRIDS to TRUE.

6.10 Parts and neighbor parts

Parts and neighbor parts in drawings are building objects that will exist in the real building or
which will be closely related to it.
Parts and neighbor parts have drawing properties that affect the way that the part is shown in
the drawing.

See also Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance (p. 325)
Part orientation (p. 326)
Example: Part representations (p. 330)
Part and neighbor part properties (p. 389)
Building object appearance properties (p. 403)

Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance

You can define what is shown in a part or neighbor part and how the part or neighbor part is
shown.
To set the part contents and appearance before creating a drawing:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Part... or Neighbor part....
3. On the Contents tab, select the part representation, select whether to show hidden lines,
center lines and reference lines, and which additional markings to show.
A reference line is a line between the points from which a part is created.
4. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of the lines.
5. On the Fill tab, set the part and section fill options. Neighbor parts do not have a Fill tab.
6. Click OK.
7. Create the drawing.

Limitations The color of the center lines can be changed only on the drawing and view level, not on the
object level. For center lines, you can only adjust the color in the properties dialog box, not the
type. You can adjust the line type of part center lines with the advanced option
XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 325

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Example: Part representations (p. 330)
XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE
XS_DRAWING_PART_REFERENCE_LINE_TYPE
XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE

Part orientation
Part orientation marks indicate the erection direction of assemblies and cast units. You can
indicate the part orientation by using part marks, including compass direction in marks, and
using orientation marks and connecting side marks.

Using part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement draw-

ings
In general arrangement drawings, part marks appear at the same end as in assembly drawings.
Parts with the same assembly position are always marked at the same end.
To use the part marks as orientation marks in general arrangement drawings:
1. In the assembly drawing properties, click View... > Attributes and set the Coordinate
system to oriented or model.
You must use oriented or model if you want the Viewing direction settings in Tools >
Options > Options… > Orientation marks to have effect.
2. In the model, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... and
clear the Beam orientation and Column orientation check boxes.
When you do this, similar assemblies get the same number regardless of the part
orientation.
3. Go to Tools > Options > Options… > Orientation marks and set the following options:
• Set the desired Viewing direction for beams, bracings and columns.
• Set Mark always to center of column in GA drawings to No.
• Set Preferred location for beams and bracings to Left or Right.
The preferred location determines the end where the mark is placed.
4. Check the leader line type through General Arrangement drawing properties > Part
marks > General.
Place the mark near the part end, not in the middle of the part using one of the following
settings:

5. Create assembly and single-part drawings.

6. Create general arrangement drawings.

326 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
When you update an assembly drawing so that the mark is placed at the
other end of the part, remember to update the marks in the corresponding
general arrangement drawing. Tekla Structures does not do this
automatically.

Cast units do not behave in the same way as the assembly drawings. The
Top in form face setting on the Parameters tab of the part’s User-
defined attributes dialog box tells the end where the part mark is
placed. The part mark is always placed at the start end of the part, except
with the setting Back.

Example The part mark is positioned at the stiffener side:

The marks are positioned at the same side irrespective of the orientation of thebeams:

Displaying compass direction

You can include face direction information in part marks. Face direction indicates the compass
direction (North, East, South, West) of the face where the mark appears.
To add face direction information for parts:
1. Check in which direction north is in the model by clicking Tools > Options > Options...
> Orientation marks > Project north.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 327

Modifying automatic drawing settings
2. In the model, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... and
select the Column orientation check box.
This forces Tekla Structures to show the face direction in the part mark for two similar
columns with different orientation.
3. In the assembly or cast unit drawing properties, click Part mark... and insert the Face
direction element in the part mark.
Now you can create the assembly or cast unit drawing(s).

Limitations Tekla Structures indicates the face direction only if it is the same for all assemblies or cast units
with the same assembly or cast unit position number.

Displaying orientation marks (north marks)

You can use orientation marks or north marks to indicate the erection direction of assemblies.
The default orientation mark is a triangle inside a circle.
To display orientation marks for main parts:
1. In the drawing properties, click Part... > Content and select the Orientation marks
check box.
2. Click OK.
3. Optional: If necessary, define which parts Tekla Structures considers to be columns,
braces or beams by setting the skew limits through Tools > Options > Options... >
Orientation marks > Skew limit.
4. Use the following advanced options to adjust orientation marks:
• XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION
• XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS
• XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS
• XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
• XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
• XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
• XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL (general arrangement drawings)
• XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL (general arrangement drawings)
• XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE (general arrangement drawings)
For different parts, Tekla Structures draws orientation marks in the following way:
• To the top flange of beams, at the end which points closest to the north or to another
designated point of the compass (see part 1 and 2 in the illustration below)

328 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
• To the lower end of columns, on the flange which points closest to the north or to another
designated point of the compass (see part 4 in the illustration below)
• To the flange of bracing, at the end which points closest to the north or to another
designated point of the compass (see 3 A and B in the illustration below)

You can display orientation marks for single-part views included in

assembly drawings with the advanced option
XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK.

Displaying connecting side marks

You can use a symbol in assembly drawings to indicate the side of a part to which a connecting
part is attached.
To display connecting side marks:
1. In the assembly drawing properties, click Part... > Content.
2. Select the Connecting side marks check box.
3. Optional: You can change the symbol with the advanced option
XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 329

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL
Part orientation (p. 326)
Part and neighbor part properties (p. 389)

Example: Part representations

Here are some examples of what parts look like with different settings defined in the Part
Properties dialog box.

330 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Setting Example
Part representation is set to Outline.

Part representation is set to Exact.

The Edge chamfers check box is selected in
Additional marks.

Part representation is set to Symbol.

Part representation is set to Symbol with

partial profile.

Part representation is set to Bounding box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 331

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Setting Example
Part representation is set to Base box.

The Hidden lines check box is not selected.

The Hidden lines check box is selected.

The Own hidden lines check box is
selected.

Hidden lines for other parts are shown

Hidden lines for the main part are

shown.

See also Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance (p. 325)
Part and neighbor part properties (p. 389)
Part and neighbor part content properties (p. 389)
Parts and neighbor parts (p. 325)

6.11 Bolts
Bolts are connecting objects that fasten parts or assemblies or attach to them. There are several
ways to display bolts in drawings.

Setting bolt contents and appearance

You can define what is shown in bolts and how the bolts are shown.
To set the bolt contents and appearance:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Bolts....
3. On the Content tab, select the bolt representation, bolt symbol content, and the visibility
of bolts in main parts, secondary parts and sub-assemblies.
4. On the Appearance tab, select the color of the bolts.
5. Click OK.

332 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Bolts (p. 332)
Bolt properties (p. 393)
Example: Bolts (p. 333)

Creating user-defined bolt symbols

You can create your own bolt symbols and use them in drawings.

You only need to create bolts if you need different bolt symbols than the
ones that Tekla Structures includes.

To create bolt symbols in the Symbol Editor:

1. Save the symbol file ud_bolts.sym in the symbol folder (usually the
folder..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\symbols\).
2. Open Microsoft Notepad, or any text editor.
3. Create a text file consisting of lines in three columns:
• The first column contains the bolt assembly standard.
• The second contains the bolt diameter.
• The third column contains the name of the symbol file and the symbol number,
separated with the @ character.
Example of file contents:
7990 24 ud_bolts@1
7990 25 ud_bolts@2
Tekla Structures uses the user-defined symbol for bolts in drawings that have the
standard and diameter you define in this text file.
4. Save the file with the name bolt_symbol_table.txt.
5. Set the name of the file as a value for the advanced option
XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE in Tools > Options > Advanced
Options... > Marking: Bolts as follows:
set XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE=bolt_symbol_table.txt
You can also write a full path to the bolt definition file. Without the path Tekla Structures
searches for the file in the model, firm, project, and system directories.
6. To use your own bolt symbol, select Bolt... > Content > Solid/Symbol > User-defined
symbol in the drawing properties dialog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 333

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Setting Example
Solid

Exact Solid

Symbol

Symbol 2

Symbol 3

334 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
6.12 Surface treatments
You can add various surface treatments to steel and concrete parts.

See also Setting surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance (p. 335)
Surface treatment visibility and content properties (p. 394)
Building object appearance properties (p. 403)

Setting surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance

You can define what is shown in a surface treatment and how the surface treatment is shown.
To set the surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance options:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Surface treatment...

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 335

Modifying automatic drawing settings
3. On the Contents tab, select the surface treatment representation, and whether to show
the surface treatment, hatch pattern on the treatment, and hidden lines.
4. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of visible and hidden lines.
5. Click OK.

6.13 Reinforcement and meshes

There are numerous ways of showing reinforcing bars and meshes in drawings.

See also Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance (p. 336)
Example: Hiding reinforcing bar lines (p. 336)
Example: Reinforcement representation options (p. 337)
Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties (p. 396)
Reinforcement settings for drawings (p. 398)
Building object appearance properties (p. 403)

Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance

You can define what is shown in reinforcing bars and meshes and how they are shown in cast
unit and general arrangement drawings.
To set the reinforcement contents and appearance:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Reinforcement....
3. On the Bar content tab, set the bar representation, bar end symbols, and the visibility of
bars and lines.
4. On the Bar appearance tab, select the color and type of the visible lines and hidden
lines.
5. On the Mesh content tab, set the mesh representation, mesh symbols, and the visibility
of meshes, wires, bars and lines.
6. On the Mesh appearance tab, select the color and type of the visible lines and hidden
lines.
7. Click OK.

Example: Hiding reinforcing bar lines

You can hide reinforcement bar lines behind other reinforcing bars and behind parts in cast unit
drawings.
Here are some examples of what reinforcing bars look like with different settings selected on
the Bar content tab of the Reinforcement Properties dialog box.

336 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Setting Description
Hide lines behind parts is
selected. The lines are
hidden behind other parts.

Hide lines behind other

rebars is selected. The lines
are hidden behind other
reinforcement bar lines.

See also Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance (p. 336)
Reinforcement and meshes (p. 336)

Example: Reinforcement representation options

Here are examples of how the reinforcement will look with the different representation options
selected on the Bar content tab of the Reinforcement properties dialog box.

Setting Example
single line

double line

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 337

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Setting Example
double lines with filled ends

filled line

stick

outline

6.14 Hatch patterns

Use hatching on part faces, sections or additional drawing objects, such as circles and
polygons, to show different materials. You can also add hatch patterns on surface treatment.

See also Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes (p. 338)
Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment (p. 340)
Example: Insulation hatch patterns (p. 341)
Part and shape hatch pattern properties (p. 391)
Surface treatment hatch pattern properties (p. 395)
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_ACI

Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes

You can add hatch patterns on parts and shapes on the drawing, view and object level.
To add a hatch pattern before creating a drawing:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Part... > Fill.
3. Select the hatch pattern from the Type list.To preview the patterns, click the ... button
next to the Type list.

338 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
You can also select the hatch pattern by double-clicking it in the Hatch window. If you
select Automatic, Tekla Structures uses the hatch patterns defined in the hatch pattern
schema (pattern properties) file (.htc).
4. Define a color for the pattern in the Color box.
5. Define a background color for the hatch in the Background box. You can define the
background color only after selecting a hatch pattern first.
6. In Scale, select whether to use automatic or custom scaling and rotation for hatches.
If you select automatic scaling and rotation, Tekla Structures automatically scales the
hatch pattern to suit the profile size, and you do not need to edit each drawing manually.
If you select Custom scaling and rotation:
• Enter the scales in Scaling in direction x and Scaling in direction y, and select
whether to Keep the x and y ratio.
• Enter the angle of rotation in the Angle field. Angle 0.0 is for horizontal and 90.0
for vertical.
7. Click OK.

Limitations • Background color does not work in conjunction with hardware hatches.
• The background color does not have any effect if there is the automatic hatch available.
The background color can only be changed if the automatic hatch is not defined for the
material type.

Example In the example below, the following hatch pattern options have been selected for sections:

Scale: Custom
Scaling in x direction: 0.25
Scaling in y direction: 0.50
Keep ratio of x and y is selected.
Angle: 10.00

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 339

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Parts and neighbor parts (p. 325)
Part and neighbor part properties (p. 389)
Part and neighbor part fill properties (p. 391)
Part and shape hatch pattern properties (p. 391)
Hatch patterns (p. 338)
XS_HATCH_SCALE_LIMIT
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
XS_HATCH_SEGMENT_BUFFER_SIZE
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_ACI

Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment

You can use hatches to show surface treatment types in drawings. You can add hatch patterns
on the drawing, view and object level.
The hatch pattern Tekla Structures adds on the surface treatment depends on the type of the
surface treatment that has been selected in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box in the
model and the hatch properties defined in the surfacing.htc file.
To add a hatch pattern on a surface treatment:

To Do this
Add a hatch pattern to a surface 1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing
treatment before creating a drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Surface treatment....
3. Select Show pattern.
4. Click OK.
Add a hatch pattern on drawing level to 1. Double-click the drawing.
a surface treatment in an open drawing 2. Click Surface treatment....
3. Select Show pattern.
4. Click Modify.

340 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
To Do this
Add a hatch pattern to a surface 1. Double-click the frame of a drawing view.
treatment on the view level in an open 2. Click Surface treatment....
drawing 3. Select Show pattern.
4. Click Modify.
Add a hatch pattern on the object level 1. Double-click the surface treatment in a
to a surface treatment. drawing.
2. Click Surface treatment....
3. Select Show pattern.
4. Click Modify.

Example: Insulation hatch patterns

Automatic scaling and rotation for hatches can be applied, for example, to insulation. With
automatic scaling and rotation you can also modify the thickness of insulation.
You can use the following fill types to represent insulation:

Hatch name Pattern

HARD_INS1

SOFT_INS

SOFT_INS2

Previewing To preview the scaled and rotated patterns, click the Select... button.
patterns

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 341

Modifying automatic drawing settings
6.15 Reference models
Reference models can be shown in general arrangement drawings. For example, you may want
to use 3D plant models or architectural drawings as reference models.

Setting the visibility and appearance of reference models

To show or hide reference models in drawings, and change their appearance:
1. In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click Reference
objects....
2. The Content tab lists all the reference models included in the model.
3. In the Visibility column, select Visible from the list box to show the selected reference
model in the drawing.
4. Go to the Appearance tab and select the line color and type for all visible reference
models.
5. Click OK.

You can control the visibility and line type of hidden lines in reference
models in drawings using advanced options.

If a reference model is subdivided or modified by setting a user-defined

attribute, individual reference model object gets an ID that is stored in
the Tekla Structures database. These individual reference model objects
are displayed in the reference model list. You can change the appearance
or hide a reference model objects that has an ID.

See also Setting the visibility and line type of hidden lines using advanced options (p. 342)
Reference models (p. 342)

Setting the visibility and line type of hidden lines using advanced options
You can control the visibility and line type of hidden lines of reference models in drawings
using advanced options.
To set the visibility and line type of hidden lines:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options...
2. Go to the Drawing Properties page.
3. Adjust the advanced options XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES,
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF,
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MODELS,
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS, and
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES.

342 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Showing the hidden lines might slow down the system when you have large or several
reference models in the drawing, especially if the advanced options
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES or
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MODELS have been
set to TRUE.
If you set XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES to TRUE, the other advanced
options have no effect.
4. On the same page, set the line type used to display the hidden lines using the advanced
option XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE.
If you do not want to show hidden lines, set this advanced option to 0.

Example In the example below, the lines are not hidden.

In the example below the following settings have been used:

• XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS=TRUE: Some of the foreground
parts are hiding the reference model lines.
• XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF=TRUE: The reference model is
internally hiding its own lines.
• XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES=TRUE: The reference model is hiding
some of the part lines behind it.
• XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES=FALSE: Allows the hidden lines to be
hidden according to the above advanced options. If it is set to TRUE, the above advanced
options have no effect.
• XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE is set to 0: No hidden lines are shown.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 343

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MODELS
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES
Reference models (p. 342)

6.16 User-defined attributes in drawings

User-defined attributes are text fields you can use to add information to a drawing. They are
also displayed in the Drawing List. You can use existing user-defined attributes in drawings, or
create your own. Furthermore, you can add user-defined attributes in marks.

Adding user-defined attributes

To add user-defined attributes in drawings:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click User-defined attributes....
3. On the Workflow tab, enter project-specific information to be displayed in drawings and
in the Drawing List.

344 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
4. On the Parameters tab, enter a user-defined Comment for drawings, projects,
assemblies, parts, and so on.
Tekla Structures uses the comment that is included in the drawing template you select,
and a hierarchy, depending on where the comment has been entered.
5. Use the User field 1 to User field 8 on the Parameters tab to enter drawing-specific
information.
6. Click OK.

• You can add and modify user-defined attributes in objects.inp.

• You can control whether the modifications in user-defined attributes
affect all selected drawings in the Drawing List at the same time,
even if the drawings are of different types by using the advanced
option XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES.

6.17 Defining a firm folder for images and symbols

You can define a firm folder where Tekla Structures always searches for the images and
symbols. When you store the images and symbols in this folder, you do not have to move them
from folder to folder when you install a new version of Tekla Structures. Installing a new
version does not replace the files in the firm folder.
Define the firm folder in the user.ini file with the XS_FIRM variable. The XS_FIRM
variable makes the images and symbols available in all Tekla Structures versions.
To define the firm folder:
1. Modify the user.ini file to include the DXK_SYMBOLPATH environment variable that
points to the firm folder. Add the following line at the end of the user.ini file:
set DXK_SYMBOLPATH=%DXK_SYMBOLPATH%;%XS_FIRM%
You must add this line after the line where XS_FIRM is set. The line must always start
with "set DXK_SYMBOLPATH=%DXK_SYMBOLPATH%;". The DXK_SYMBOLPATH
environment variable can contain multiple paths separated by semicolons.
2. In the Template Editor, click Options > Preferences > File Locations and enter the
path to the firm folder also for Symbols, pictures.

6.18 Defining customized line types

You can define your own line types, and use them wherever line type settings are available. The
customized line types are handled the same way as other line types. The customized line types
are defined in the TeklaStuctures.lin file in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\inp. By default, the most widely
used line types are available in the file.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 345

Modifying automatic drawing settings
To define your own line types in the TeklaStuctures.lin file:
1. Start every line with the letter A to indicate the beginning of the line type pattern.
You can use three different objects: dashes, dots and spaces to form a line.
2. Define the length of a dash (-) using positive numbers.
3. Define the length of a a space ( ) using negative numbers.
4. Define dots (.) using the number zero (0).
The patterns must begin with a dash. They typically end with a space, although the space
in the end is not required.
5. After you have defined the line type pattern, press Enter.
The TeklaStructures.lin.id file contains the names of the line types visible in the
user interface and the unique IDs assigned for each line type. The value of the ID must be
greater than 10, for example:
CENTER, 1000
BORDER, 1002
DASHDOT, 1003
You can use TeklaStructures.lin also for mapping the exported line types.

User-defined line types can not be mapped to other (user-defined) line

types in DWG export.
Default line types can be mapped to user-defined line types.

Example Line type definition for DASHDOT: A, 12.7, -6.35, 0, -6.35 means that the pattern
starts with a dash with the length of 12.7 units, followed by a space with the length of 6.35
units, then a dot, and then again a space with the length of 6.35 units. Then the first dash is
drawn again.

If you add new customized line types, you need to add corresponding
bitmaps to the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder, and name them
dr_line_type_*.bmp, for example
dr_line_type_CENTER.bmp.

346 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
6.19 Settings affecting the recreation of drawings
Modification of the following drawing settings may lead to recreation of drawings.
In view properties:
• Front view
• Top view
• Back view
• Bottom view
• Section views
• End views
• 3D view
• View extension for neighbor parts
• Coordinate system
• Around X
• Around Y
• Around Z
• Undeformed
• Unfolded
• Show opening/recess symbol
In section view properties:
• Section depth
• Distance for combining cuts
• Left section
• Middle section
• Right section
In dimension properties:
• Straight
• In X direction
• Knock off dimension type
• Reference dimension color, text color, and height
In dimensioning properties:
• All dimensioning properties
In part properties:
• Part representation drop down list
In neighbor part properties:
• Neighbor parts
• Main/Secondary parts
• Skew parts
• Part representation drop down list
In surface treatment properties:
• Visibility
• Representation
• Show pattern

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 347

Modifying automatic drawing settings
See also Preventing automatic drawing updates and recreation (p. 348)
Updating drawings when the model changes (p. 183)

Preventing automatic drawing updates and recreation

Here are some tips that help you to prevent automatic drawing updates and recreation:
• Freeze the drawings where you do not want to update all associative objects on top of the
drawing views. The building objects (parts, bolts, welds, etc.) are always updated in frozen
drawings.
• Lock the drawings that you do not want to update.
• If you update a drawing that has not been modified, the drawing is recreated. Drawings
are automatically recreated unless the drawing has been edited and then saved, or the
drawing has been issued using the Issue functionality in the Drawing List. Use the
advanced XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS to control the recreation of
unmodified drawings.
• To prevent Tekla Structures from automatically updating drawings if the model changes,
clear the value field of the advanced option XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED.

6.20 Managing Master Drawing Catalog

Keeping the Master Drawing Catalog up to date and well organized is essential if you want to
create drawings fast and efficiently. Having good master drawings saves you time and effort.
Add only the necessary master drawings, remove obsolete ones, organize the master drawings
in folders, add proper preview images, and keep the properties and descriptions up to date.

See also Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (p. 348)
Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog (p. 350)
Modifying master drawing properties (p. 351)
Managing folders (p. 354)
Master Drawing Catalog (p. 49)

Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

Depending on your environment, the Master Drawing Catalog usually contains some master
drawings when you start using it, at least the predefined saved settings (drawing property files)
are displayed there. You can also add new saved settings, rule sets and cloning templates.

Adding saved settings

All predefined drawing property files are shown as saved settings in the Master Drawing
Catalog. When you save a new drawing property file, Tekla Structures shows it in the Master
Drawing Catalog.

348 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
1. Modify the drawing properties in the Single-part Drawing Properties, Cast Unit
Drawing Properties, Assembly Drawing Properties or General Arrangement
Drawing Properties dialog box.
2. Give a name to the property file in the box next to the Save as button and click Save as.
The new property file is automatically added to the Master Drawing Catalog. If it is not
displayed in the list, press F5 to refresh the view.
3. Modify master drawing properties: give the master drawing a name, add a preview
image, and enter a description and keywords.

See also Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (p. 348)
Saved settings (p. 50)
Creating drawings using saved settings (p. 60)

Adding a rule set

To add a rule set in the Master Drawing Catalog:

1. Click the Add rule set toolbar command button .

2. In the Define Rules for Creating Drawings dialog box, select the drawing types you
want to create with the rule set.
You can select several drawing types with the same rule set. For example, you can use
the same rule set to create single-part drawings and assembly drawings.
3. Click Next.
4. In the next dialog box, click Add group and select the object groups for which you want
to create drawings, and a master drawing for each group. Only those master drawing
types are listed that can be used for the drawing types that you selected in the previous
dialog box.

You can use the buttons in the dialog box to do the following:
• Use Move up and Move down to move rule upwards and downwards in the list. If a
rule that is higher in the list creates a drawing of an object, another rule lower in the
list that would create a drawing of the same object will not do it again.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 349

Modifying automatic drawing settings
• Use Properties to view or modify the properties of a master drawing that you have
selected in the list.
• Use Preview to display a preview image of the selected master drawing.
5. Click Next. If you have selected several drawing types, repeat the previous steps for all
drawing types that you have selected.
6. Modify master drawing properties of the rule set: give a name to the rule set, add a
preview image, and enter a description and keywords.
7. Click Finish. The rule set is added in the Master Drawing Catalog.

See also Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (p. 348)
Rule sets (p. 51)
Creating drawings using rule sets or wizards (p. 62)

Adding a cloning template

You can add drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog from the Drawing List.
Before you add a cloning template in the Master Drawing Catalog, create a drawing with the
desired properties and contents and save it.
To add a new cloning template:
1. Open the Drawing List by clicking Drawings & Reports > Drawing List.
2. Select the drawing, right-click and select Add to Master Drawing Catalog (Ctrl + M).
3. Modify the master drawing properties of the cloning template. On the General tab, enter
a name for the cloning template, and a short description and keywords.
Tekla Structures adds a preliminary preview image for the cloning template. Change it,
if necessary.
4. Go to the Drawing creation tab and specify how dimensions and marks are created, and
select the objects to be cloned from the master drawing.
5. Click OK.

The new cloning template is added in the Master Drawing Catalog. The icon is
displayed in the Master column of the Drawing List next to the drawing you added.

Limitations You cannot add general arrangement drawings or multidrawings to the Master Drawing
Catalog from the Drawing List. You can clone general arrangement drawings using the Clone
command in the Drawing List dialog box.

See also Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (p. 348)
Cloning templates (p. 50)
Creating drawings using cloning templates (p. 54)

Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog

To remove master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, select the master drawings you want to remove.
2. Right-click and select Remove from Catalog.
3. Confirm the removal.
Tekla Structures removes the master drawing(s) from the catalog. Any created drawings
that are based on removed master drawings remain in the Drawing List. The catalog
properties that you have entered for the master drawing are not deleted. They are still
available for the master drawing if you decide to add the master drawing back to the
catalog.

350 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Limitations In the folder view, you cannot remove master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog
through the folders that you have created yourself. Use the Saved searches folders to display
the desired master drawings and then remove the extra ones.

Modifying master drawing properties

Each master drawing in the Master Drawing Catalog has its own properties. You can search
for master drawings on the basis of the master drawing name, description and keywords.

Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it a
lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.

Modifying properties of saved settings

To modify the master drawing properties of saved settings:

1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click a master drawing of the desired type.
2. Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.
3. Enter or modify the description of the master drawing. You can search master drawings
on the basis of data that you enter here.
4. Enter or modify keywords for the master drawing. Use spaces between words. You can
search master drawings on the basis of data that you enter here.
5. To add or change the preview image, click Change image and select the image. You can
use.bmp,.jpg,.jpeg, or.png images. We recommend that you use.png images.
6. Optional: To modify the drawing properties of the master drawing, click Edit drawing
properties to display the drawing properties dialog box.
Edit the properties and save them. Ensure that you have the correct drawing property file
name at the top.
7. Click OK.

Modifying rule set properties

To modify the master drawing properties of rule sets:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click a master drawing of the desired type.
2. In the Edit Rules dialog box, modify the drawing type selections if necessary.
3. Click Next.
4. Add or remove object groups and select the appropriate master drawing type.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 351

Modifying automatic drawing settings
5. Click Next and do the same for all selected drawing types.
6. Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.
7. Enter or modify the description of the master drawing.
You can search for master drawings based on the data you enter here.
8. Enter of modify keywords of the master drawing.
Use spaces between words. You can search master drawings on the basis of data you
enter here.
9. To add or change the preview image, click Change image and select the image.
You can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, or .png images. We recommend that you use .png
images.
10. Click Save to save your changes.

Modifying properties and contents of wizard files

You can modify wizard files using a text editor through the Master Drawing Properties dialog
box. In previous versions of Tekla Structures, you could only edit and use wizard files through
the AutoDrawings dialog box.
To modify the master drawing properties of wizard files and the wizard file contents:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click a wizard file.
2. Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.
3. Enter or modify the description of the master drawing.
You can search for master drawings based on the data you enter here.
4. Enter of modify keywords of the master drawing.
Use spaces between words. You can search for master drawings based on the data you
enter here.
5. To add or change the preview image, click Change image and select the image.
You can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, or .png images. We recommend that you use .png
images.
6. To edit the contents of the wizard file, click Edit drawing properties.
The wizard file is opened in a text editor. Modify the contents of the file, and save and
close it.
7. Click OK.

Wizard file contents

Wizard files consist of the following entries. Notice the use of parentheses.
set_drawing_type(assembly)
This line defines the type of drawing the wizard creates. The drawing type appears in
parentheses. The options are:

Option Creates
single single-part drawings
assembly assembly drawings
multi_single single-part multidrawings
multi_single_with_layout single-part multidrawings with layout

352 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Option Creates
multi_assembly assembly multidrawings
multi_assembly_with_layout assembly multidrawings with layout
cast_unit cast unit drawings

set_drawing_attributes(column)
This line tells Tekla Structures which drawing properties to use when creating the drawings.
The name of the saved drawing properties appears in parentheses.
set_template_drawing
This line tells Tekla Structures to use the defined drawing as a template when creating a new
drawing. This line is used instead of the line set_drawing_attributes. The path and the
name of the drawing template are given in parenthesis like in the following example:
set_template_drawing("C:\TSModels\AngleModel":"[A.2]")
set_filter(column_filter)
This line tells Tekla Structures which selection filter to use to select the parts from which to
create drawings. The filter name appears in parentheses.
create_drawings()
Tekla Structures starts creating the drawings. This line should always appear immediately after
the lines set_drawing_type, set_drawing_attributes and set_filter.

Modifying cloning template properties

To modify the master drawing properties of cloning templates:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click a master drawing of the desired type.
2. Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.
3. Enter or modify the description of the master drawing.
You can search for master drawings based on the data you enter here.
4. Enter of modify keywords of the master drawing.
Use spaces between words. You can search for master drawings based on the data you
enter here.
5. To add or change the preview image, click Change image and select the image.
You can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, or .png images. We recommend that you use .png
images.
6. Go to the Drawing creation tab.
a For the Dimensions, Marks, and Marks for welds in model, define whether you
want to Clone them, recreate them automatically when you clone a drawing
(Create) or Ignore them in cloning.
b Select the objects to be cloned from the master drawing: Drawing welds, Level
marks, DWG/DXF, Text files, Texts, Symbols, Graphics, and Hyperlinks).
7. Click OK.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 353

Modifying automatic drawing settings
Managing folders
In the folder view of the Master Drawing Catalog you can manage the folders in the following
ways:
• Add new, rename, and delete folders
• Copy master drawings to another folder
• Delete master drawings from folders
• Change the folder location in the tree

Deleting master drawings from a folder or copying them to another

folder in the folder view does not affect the catalog contents in any way.
The folder view is just another way to help you to keep you master
drawings well organized.

Adding, renaming, and moving folders

To add, rename and move folders Master Drawing Catalog:

1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, click the folder view icon to go to the folder view.
2. Right-click the tree area in the upper part of the folder view, select Create new folder
and enter a name for the new folder.
Here we use the name PROJECT2008.
3. To create a subfolder, select a folder, in this case PROJECT2008, right-click and select
Create new subfolder.
4. Enter a name for the folder.
Here we use the name Site12. Create another subfolder Site10 in the same way.
5. To rename a folder, select the folder, right-click, select Rename and enter a new name.
Here we rename Site10 to Site11.
6. To move a folder upwards, select the folder, right-click and select Move up. In this case,
we move Site11 one step up.

Shortcut for renaming a folder: F2

Copying master drawings to another folder

To copy drawings to another folders:

354 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Modifying automatic drawing settings
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, click the folder view icon to go to the folder view.
2. Open the folder containing the master drawings that you want to copy to another folder
and select the drawings.
3. Right-click and select Add to and then select the desired folder.
The master drawings are copied. They are not removed from the original folder.

Use the following keys and key combinations for selecting drawings:
• Select all displayed drawings: Ctrl + A
• Select consecutive drawings: Click the first drawing, hold down
Shift and select the last drawing.
• Select several drawings: Click the first drawing, hold down Ctrl and
select the rest of the drawings.

Removing master drawings from a folder

You may want to remove master drawings from a folder in the folder view, for example, when
you have added the master drawings in another folder and do not need them in the original
folder anymore.
To remove drawings from a folder:

1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, click the folder view icon to go to the folder view.
2. In the upper part of the folder view, click the folder from which you want to remove
drawings.
The master drawings in the folder are shown in the lower part of the view.
3. Select the master drawings to be deleted, right-click and select Remove from folder.
The master drawings are removed from the folder. The master drawings are not removed from
the catalog, just from the folder.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 355

Modifying automatic drawing settings
356 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17
Modifying automatic drawing settings
7 Drawing settings

This section provides more information about the various drawing settings you can modify in
Tekla Structures.

Contents View properties in drawings (p. 357)

Section view properties (p. 360)
Dimension and dimensioning properties (p. 361)
Mark properties (p. 376)
Mark elements (p. 382)
Part and neighbor part properties (p. 389)
Bolt properties (p. 393)
Surface treatment visibility and content properties (p. 394)
Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties (p. 396)
Reinforcement settings for drawings (p. 398)
Placement properties for annotation objects (p. 403)
Building object appearance properties (p. 403)
Model weld visibility options (p. 404)
Properties of additional drawing objects (p. 405)
DWG/DXF scaling options (p. 406)
Grid properties (p. 407)
Orientation settings (p. 407)

7.1 View properties in drawings

Use the View Properties dialog box to view and modify the drawing view properties. In the
open drawing, this dialog box also allows you to access the properties of the marks, building
objects, and view filters.
The table below describes all drawing level and view level settings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 357

Drawing settings
Option Description
Front view, Top Define the views to be created.
view, Back view,
Bottom view,
Section views, End
views, 3D view
3D view attributes Defines the 3D view properties.
Scale Sets the view scale.
Coordinate system Sets the coordinate system of the drawing view.
Reflected view Displays load bearing structures, such as columns and beams on a
lower floor.
Yes displays structures with a continuous line, and No displays
them with a dashed line.
Rotation around (in Modify the view angle of 3D views. Enter the values for the angles
3D views) in y and x directions. Rotation in a drawing view is around the local
axis. Value 0.0 for both equals the front view.
Rotate coordinate Rotates the view around the x, y, or z axis of the parts using the
system Around X, entered values.
Around Y and
Around Z
Size Define as distances:
The x and y fields define the view size along the x and y axes of the
view. The depth fields define the depth of the view relative to, and
perpendicular to the view plane.
Fit by parts:
Tekla Structures fits the view contents in the drawing view frame
without leaving any unnecessary space.
View extension for Sets the distance from the drawing view to display neighboring
neighbor parts parts.
Use detailed object Allows you to create and apply object level settings on the view
level settings level.
Filters and Neighbor Opens a dialog box where you can create and modify view filters.
part filters
Place Set the placing for the drawing view to Fixed or Free.
Unfolded Yes shows and dimensions the bend lines in the drawing.
Undeformed Yes undeforms deformed parts and shows the developed
(undeformed) shape of the deformed parts in drawings.
Shortening If parts are very long and do not include any details, you can
shorten them.
Cut part activates shortening. This option is available only on view
level in an open drawing.
Minimum cut part length defines the minimum length of the
shortened part to show.
Space between cut parts defines the distance between cut parts.
Cut skew parts: Yes cuts skew parts.
Show openings/ Yes shows symbols in openings and recesses.
recess symbol

358 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
Datum point for Specified uses the entered value.
elevations
View plane measures reference points relative to the view plane.
Dimension creation Clones the dimensions separately for the selected view only. Using
method in this view this option affects the creation of the dimensions during cloning and
redimensioning of existing drawings.
View name Defines view names for front, top, back and bottom views.
Text Defines the view label text.
Symbol Defines a symbol to be used in the view label, and the color, size,
and line length of the symbol.
Label position Defines the vertical and horizontal position of the view label.
View direction Shows or hides the view direction marks and defines the mark
marks height.
Anchor bolt plan Show as anchor bolt plan: Yes shows the anchor bolt plan.
(GA drawings)
Enlarged part view scale defines the scale used in the enlarged
part views.
Create detail views: Yes creates separate detail views. If you select
No, Tekla Structures dimensions the anchor bolts in the enlarged
view. Tekla Structures groups similar detail views so that similar
details are drawn only once.
Detail view scale defines the scale used in the detail views.

See also Drawing size and drawing view scale (p. 222)
Creating additional views of parts (p. 85)
Showing neighbor parts in views (p. 236)
Defining free or fixed placement of views (p. 253)
Unfolding polybeams (p. 239)
Undeforming deformed parts (p. 240)
Shortening parts in drawing views (p. 237)
Showing part openings and recesses (p. 241)
Creating elevation dimensions (p. 281)
View-specific dimension cloning (p. 57)
Adding view labels for main and section views (p. 246)
Showing section and end view direction marks (p. 245)
Mark elements (p. 382)
Mark properties (p. 376)
Part and neighbor part properties (p. 389)
Bolt properties (p. 393)
Surface treatment visibility and content properties (p. 394)
Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties (p. 396)
Building object appearance properties (p. 403)
Reference models (p. 342)
Grid properties (p. 407)
Creating view filters in drawings
Adding views in drawings (p. 81)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 359

Drawing settings
Automatic drawing views (p. 225)

7.2 Section view properties

Tekla Structures creates section views using the current properties in the Section View
Properties dialog box. You can modify all these settings before you create the drawing, and
some of them after creating the drawing.

Option Description
Attributes
Scale The section view drawing scale.
Section depth Defines the positive and negative distances
of the section view when views are not
combined.
Distance for combining parts Defines the distance range for combining cut
views.
View extension for neighbor parts Defines the boundaries of the drawing view.
Left section Define the view Direction of the section.
Middle section
Right section
Minimum cut part length Defines the minimum cut length of the
shortened part.
Space between cut parts Defines the distance between cut parts in the
drawing view.
Cut skew parts Defines whether to shorten skewed parts.
View label
Text Defines the text on the section view label.
The ... buttons next to the text boxes open
the Mark Contents dialog box.
Symbol Section view label symbol.
Color Color of the section view label symbol.
Size Size of the section view label symbol.
Line length Length of the section view label line.
Label position: Vertical Vertical location of the section view label.
Label position: Horizontal Horizontal location of the section view label.
View direction marks: Section views Visibility of the section view direction mark.
View direction marks: Section views Visibility of the section view direction mark.
View direction marks: End views Visibility of the end view direction mark.
Cutting line
Line Length and offset of the cutting line.
Color Color of the cutting line.
Section mark

360 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
Text Defines the text on the section mark. Click
the ... buttons next to the text fields to open
the Mark Contents dialog box.
Color Color of the section mark symbol.
Symbol Left and right section mark symbol.
Size Size of the section mark symbol.
x/y Offset of the section mark symbol.

7.3 Dimension and dimensioning properties

This section provides more information about the properties related to dimensions and
dimensioning.

General dimension properties

Use the General tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and modify the format,
type, unit, precision, extension line, grouping and placing settings of the dimensions.
The drawing level Dimension Properties dialog box and object level Dimension Properties
dialog box contents differ. The table below contains all options for both dialog boxes.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 361

Drawing settings
Option Description
Dimension types: Sets the dimension type for straight dimensions.
Straight
Relative: Point to point dimensions.

Absolute: Dimensions from a common starting point.

Relative and absolute: Combination of point to point and

common start point.

US absolute: Dimensions from a common starting point, which

include a running dimension mark (RD).

US absolute 2: Similar to US absolute, but it changes short

dimensions to relative.
Absolute plus short relatives: Similar to Absolute, but it
changes short dimensions to relative. Also called internal
absolute. This option may show both dimensions, but it does not
show relative dimensions when dimensions are long. This option
shows the absolute dimensions inside the dimension lines.
Absolute plus all relatives above the absolutes: Similar to
Relative and absolute, but it places the relative dimensions
above the absolute.
Dimension types: In x As above, but overrides the straight setting for horizontal
direction dimensions. If you use the blank option, Tekla Structures uses the
Straight option settings. The x direction usually means
dimensions parallel to the drawing x axis.
Angle Defines the appearance of angle dimensions.
Shows the angle dimensions in degrees on side.

Shows the angle dimensions in degrees at angle vertex.

Shows the angle dimensions using a triangle.

You can also set the Triangle base length to control the base
dimension shown for bevel dimensions.
Shows the angle dimensions using a triangle with degrees.

Triangle base length The base length of a triangle.

Curved Defines whether to use angle units or length for curved
dimensions.
This setting can only be adjusted in drawing mode.
Short extension line Defines whether Tekla Structures should create extension lines all
of the same length or use the short extension line automatically if
the dimension line falls on a grid line.
Units Defines the units used in dimensioning.
Precision Defines dimension precision: rounding, imperial units.
Format Defines the number of decimals and their appearance.
Use grouping Defines the appearance of large dimension values.

362 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
Combine equal Combines equal dimensions. The choices are None, 3*60 or
dimensions 3*60=180.
The accuracy of combining equal dimensions is 0.1.
Minimum number to Defines the minimum number of dimensions to combine.
combine
Dimension line Defines the space between parallel dimension lines.
spacing
Short dimensions Defines the text location of short dimensions: between or outside
the dimension lines.
Place Search margin is the farthest distance Tekla Structures uses
when searching for an empty space for the dimension.
Minimal distance is the closest distance Tekla Structures uses to
search for an empty space for a dimension.
Direction is the side on which Tekla Structures places dimensions
(relative to the object being dimensioned). This option is
available only for manual dimensions.
Placing is the method used to place dimension. This option is
available only for manual dimensions. The choices are:
• Free lets Tekla Structures to decide the location and direction
of the dimension based on the Direction settings.
• Fixed allows you to place the dimension at any point.

Dimension format, precision and unit properties

Use the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box to view and modify properties related to
dimension format.
The integer values are provided for situations like when you need to use the value in an
advanced option.

Integer
Option value Notes
Format
### 0
###[.#] 1
###.# 2
###[.##] 3
###.## 4
###[.###] 5
###.### 6
### #/# 7

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 363

Drawing settings
Integer
Option value Notes

###/##.### 8 This option is available only for

straight dimensions.
Precision
0.00 1 For defining precision with
rounding. For example, with
0.50 2
precision 0.33 the actual dimension
0.33 3 50.40 is shown as 50.33.
0.25 4
1/8 5 For imperial units
1/16 6
1/32 7
1/10 8 For defining precision without
rounding
1/100 9
1/1000 10
Units
automatic Uses the units defined in the model
mm millimeters
cm centimeters
m meters
foot - inch feet and inches
Inches are converted into integer
feet, and the remaining inches are
shown in inches.
cm / m centimeters and meters
Dimensions under 100 cm are
shown in centimeters, and
dimensions above 100 cm are
shown in meters. Millimeters are
shown as superscript.
inch inches

See also Selecting the dimension format, precision and units (p. 256)
General dimension properties (p. 361)

Dimension appearance properties

Use the Appearance tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and modify the
settings affecting the dimension appearance.

Option Description
Line, Arrow
Color The color of the dimension line. This controls the line weight in
printed drawings.
Arrow shape Controls the type of mark used with the dimension line.

364 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
US Absolute Controls the type of mark used with the dimension line in US
dimensions Absolute dimensions.
Level dimensions Controls the type of mark used with the dimension line in level
dimensions.
Sets the height and the length of the arrowhead.

Text
Color Controls the color of the mark text. The color controls the line
weight.
Height Controls the height of the text used in the dimension marks in the
drawing.
Font Controls which font is used in the dimension mark.
Frame Defines a frame for the dimension mark.
Place Defines how the dimension mark is placed relative to the
dimension line.

Advanced dimension properties

Use the Advanced tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and modify the check
dimension, knock-off dimension, plate side mark and dimension exaggeration settings.

Option Description
Plate side marks: Type, Color, Offset and Creates plate side marks automatically to
Size plate dimensions. Sets the color and size of
the mark, and the offset from the dimension
line along the leader line.
Check dimensions: Line color, Text color Defines the appearance of the check
and Text height dimensions.
Knock-off dimension type Defines the type of dimension to use in
knock-off dimensions.
Exaggeration Specified exaggerates narrow dimensions.
Select the Direction: Left/ Down, Right/Up
or Both.
Set the Origin, Width, Position and Height.

Dimension mark and dimension tag properties

Use the Marks and Tags tabs in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and modify the
contents of dimension marks and tags in an open drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 365

Drawing settings
Option Description
Marks tab
Prefix Displays the selected text before the numeric value
of the dimension.
The prefix value cannot be plain numbers, and the
prefix value cannot end with a number.
Visibility of numeric value Defines whether the numeric value of the dimension
is visible or hidden.
If you hide the numeric value of the dimension, the
prefix and postfix text will still be shown.
Postfix Displays the selected text after the numeric value of
the dimension.
The postfix value cannot be plain numbers, and the
postfix value cannot start with a number when the
numeric value of the dimension is visible.
... buttons Define dimension mark contents.
Plate side marks Specified creates plate side marks to plate
dimension using the specified color, size and offset.
Offset means the distance of the mark from the
dimension line.
Exaggeration Specified exaggerates narrow dimensions.
Select the Direction: Left/ Down, Right/Up or Both.
Set the Origin, Width, Position and Height.
Tags tab
Tags area Adds user-defined tags to dimension lines.
... buttons Define dimension tag contents and appearance.
Rotation > Parallel to dimension line does not
rotate the tag. This is the default value.
Rotation > Perpendicular to dimension line
rotates the tag.
Include part count in the tag Yes includes part count in the tag.
Exclude parts according to filter Select a drawing view filter that removes desired
content from the tag.

General dimensioning properties

Use the General tab in the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify the
general settings of the dimensions.

366 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
Dimensioning type Standard is used for almost all dimensioning.
Truss meets the specific requirements needed to dimension truss
drawings. It dimensions the position and length of the diagonals.
The dimensioning is done only if the diagonals are secondary
parts that are welded to upper and lower chords, which are main
parts and not welded to any parts. If the truss welding is done
some other way, standard dimensioning is used.
Number of views: Yes minimizes the number of views that Tekla Structures creates.
Minimize (or Minimize
Also check the settings in the drawing View properties dialog
number of views)
box.
Combine dimensions Combines several single dimensions into one dimension line.
In Options, select the combination level. The larger the number,
the more Tekla Structures combines the dimensions.
Option 4.5 uses a combination of option 5 for main part and
option 4 for secondary parts.
If the distance between two details is less than the defined
Minimum distance, Tekla Structures combines the dimensions.
The Distance means the distance within which Tekla Structures
combines internal dimensions.
Close dimensions Completes dimension lines to include the entire part.
No does not close dimensions
In X only closes dimensions in the x direction and leaves others
open
All closes all dimensions
This setting is not relevant to profile shape dimensions.
Close dimensions: Yes closes short dimension(s).
Short dimensions
With No, the open dimension is the middle one rather than the
short end dimension.
When you leave short dimensions open, Tekla Structures leaves
out the longer dimension line in dimension lines that contain two
dimensions. If dimension lines contain three dimensions, Tekla
Structures leaves out the middle one. This option does not affect
dimension lines with more than three dimensions.
Forward offset Defines the distance Tekla Structures uses to search for the base
point of a dimension. If Tekla Structures does not find a base point
(corner) within the Forward offset search distance, it uses an
edge point.
The Centered bolt setting affects on how the dimension is
displayed.
Recognizable Defines the limit for dimensioning asymmetry in secondary parts.
distance In some cases it is important to look at the asymmetrical
relationship of parts, so that an asymmetric secondary part is
correctly connected to a main part. You can use Recognizable
distance to have asymmetry reflected in dimensioning. If the
asymmetry is smaller than the distance you enter here, Tekla
Structures represents it using a dimension.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 367

Drawing settings
Option Description
Part mark to None creates no part mark on the dimension line.
dimension line
Assembly overall dimensions creates a part mark on the
assembly overall dimension line.
Extreme bolts creates a part mark on the dimension line between
the outermost bolts.
Main dimension Defines the side on which Tekla Structures places the Assembly
position overall, Main part work point, and Knock-off dimensions.
Auto treats the main dimensions in the same way as other
dimensions.
Above places the main dimensions above the part (or to the left
for vertical parts).
Below places the main dimensions below the part.
Above places the skew position dimensions of the main part
below the part and Below places them above.
Grid dimensions Creates grid dimensions.The values are: None, Individual spans,
Overall or Individual spans and overall.
Grid dimension Sets the grid dimension position. The values are: Main view -
position above, Main view - below, Top view - above, Top view -
bottom, Bottom view - above, Bottom view - below, Back view
- above, Back view - below, All views - above, or All views -
below.

See also Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)
Example: Combining dimensions (p. 296)
Example: Closing dimension (p. 295)
Example: Forward offset (p. 300)
Example: Recognizable distance (p. 300)
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_STRICT_POSITION
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE

Position dimensioning properties

Use the Position dimensions tab in the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and
modify the settings for the position dimensions in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.
Note that the contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type, and all the options
listed below are not available for all drawing types.

368 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
Position bolts/parts to Controls from where Tekla Structures creates the part/bolt position
dimensions.
None creates no position dimensions.
Main part creates the dimensions from the main part reference line.
Working points creates the dimensions between the work points,
such as the intersections of main and neighbor part reference lines.
Embedded objects Creates position dimensions for locating embedded objects in cast
unit drawings. The embedded objects are custom components
attached to the cast unit.
As secondary objects dimensions embedded objects in cast unit
drawings the same way as secondary parts.
By reference points dimensions embedded objects to their
reference point, which is the origin of the custom component.
Secondary part Creates dimensions to bolt holes or edges of the secondary part.
None creates no position dimensions for secondary parts.
By bolts dimensions bolt hole locations in the secondary parts.
By parts dimensions edges of secondary parts.
By both dimensions bolt hole locations and edges of the secondary
part.
Secondary part Aligns dimensions with the main or neighboring part. Only for
dimension direction skewed clip angles or shear plates.
Position from Sets the starting point for running dimensions. Only for skewed
clip angles or shear plates bolted to a neighboring part.
Reversed direction for Yes changes the direction of running dimensions. With this option,
running dimensions you can set the zero point to the end of a member rather than to the
start.
Main part bolt position On creates dimensions to the bolt hole locations in the main part.
Main part skew Yes creates horizontal and vertical check dimensions representing
position the skew position of a brace. Created between the work points of
the main part.
Skew check dimensions are located in the front view. Their
location depends on the Main dimension side setting selected on
the General tab. When the main dimensions are above the part, the
skew dimensions are below, and vice versa.
Skew position Defines how Tekla Structures dimensions skewed secondary part
positions.
None creates no dimensions for skewed secondary part positions.
Angle creates an angle dimension for the secondary part.
Dimensions creates dimensions for the skewed position of the
secondary part.
Both creates both the angle and the dimensions.
Centered part Controls the dimensions of centrally-placed parts. These settings
have an effect only if position dimensions are created.
Internal dimensions the centered parts overall size.
Position dimensions the part to the main part center lines.
None creates no centered part dimensions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 369

Drawing settings
Option Description
Centered bolt Controls the dimensions of centrally-placed bolt groups.
Internal dimensions the centered bolts spread.
Position dimensions the bolts to the main part center-lines.
Centered bolt overrides the Secondary part bolt internal option
for centered bolts. This only applies to bolts located centrally on
the part.
Elevation dimension On creates elevation dimensions.
Combine equal Combines equal dimensions. The choices are None, 3*60 or
dimensions 3*60=180.
The accuracy of combining equal dimensions is 0.1.
Minimum number to Defines the minimum number of dimensions to combine.
combine

Part dimensioning properties

Use the options on the Part dimensioning tab of the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to
view and modify part dimensioning settings for single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.
Note that the contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type, and all the options
listed below are not available for all drawing types.

Option Description
Internal Creates internal dimensions for secondary parts connected to the main
part.
None creates dimensions for secondary parts.
Necessary creates only the dimensions that are necessary for assembling
the parts.
All creates all dimensions for the secondary parts.
Main part Once creates one overall dimension for the main part.
overall
All creates overall dimensions for main parts in all views.
dimensions
None creates no overall dimensions for the main part.
The Assembly part overall dimension settings have some effect on
these options.
Assembly part Length only creates overall dimensions for an entire assembly or cast
overall unit in the x direction only.
dimensions
All creates overall dimensions for an assembly or cast unit in all
directions.
Off creates no overall dimensions for an assembly or a cast unit.
Main part work On creates a check dimension between the outermost work points.
points
Main part On creates dimensions to show the shape of a main part.
shape (Shape
By default, Tekla Structures automatically draws shape dimensions on
dimensions)
both ends of a beam, even if the ends are symmetrical.

370 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
Main part On creates radius dimensions for curved chamfers and round holes in the
radius main part.
dimensions
This option is available only if you have set Main part shape dimensions
to On.
Bevel On creates linear dimensions of a bevel.
dimensions
Bevel angle Creates an angle dimension and defines which side of the bevel to
dimension. The choices are None, Angle of cut and Angle of beam.
Knock off On creates check dimensions from the edge of the main part to the work
dimensions point.
Preferred dim Sets the preferred view (front or side) for part dimensions.
side

From the On creates dimensions indicating the distance from the closest floor level
nearest floor to the bottom and/or top of the parts.
level to part
From grid to On creates dimensions showing the offset of a part from the grid to the
part center line part center line.
From grid to On creates dimensions showing the offset of a part from the grid to the
part ends near or far end of the part.

See also Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)
Example: Part dimensioning (p. 287)
XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE
XS_EQUAL_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS_TO_BOTH_ENDS_LIMIT
XS_CREATE_ROUND_HOLE_DIMENSIONS

Bolt dimensioning properties

Use the options on the Bolt dimensions tab of the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to
select which bolt dimensions to create and how in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings.
The options include locating the bolts on the main and secondary parts, and in relation to the
work points.
Note that the contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type, and all the options
listed below are not available for all drawing types.

Option Description
Main part bolt Creates internal dimensions for bolt groups in the main part.
internal dimensions
None creates none of the internal bolt dimensions.
Internal creates bolt group internal dimensions (distances between
bolts).
All creates edge distance and bolt group internal dimensions. Edge
distance is the dimension from the outermost bolt to the part edge.
Main part bolt Indicates whether the dimensions are parallel to the part or the
internal dimensions: bolt group.
Skewed bolt group
The choices are No dimensions, In part direction, and In bolt
group direction.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 371

Drawing settings
Option Description
Secondary part bolt Creates internal dimensions for bolt groups in the secondary part.
internal dimensions
The choices are None, Necessary, Internal, and All.
Secondary part bolt Aligns the bolt dimensions with the secondary part or bolt group.
internal dimensions:
The choices are In part direction, No dimensions, and In bolt
Skewed bolt group
group direction
Distance between Creates check dimension between the outermost bolts.
extreme bolts:
The choices are None, Main part, and Assembly.
Extreme bolts
Distance between Creates check dimensions from the outermost bolts to the work
extreme bolts: points.
Extreme bolts to
work points Yes creates the check dimensions.

Preferred dim side Sets the preferred view (front or side) for bolt dimensions.

Combine bolt Sets the format of the combined bolt group internal dimensions.
dimensions
You can combine bolt group internal dimensions and display them
in the format 3*60 or 3*60=180, or have single dimensions.
Minimum number to Defines the minimum number of dimensions to combine.
combine

See also Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)
Example: Combining bolt group dimensions (p. 299)
XS_COMBINED_BOLT_DIM_CHARACTER

Dimension grouping properties

Use the Dimension grouping tab in Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify
settings for dimension grouping in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings. Note that the
contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type, and all the options listed below
are not available for all drawing types.

Option Description
Activate dimension Selects the objects for grouping.
grouping
Parts Groups according to parts.
Bolts Groups according to bolts.
Components Groups according to components.
Cuts/Shapes Groups according to cuts or shapes.
Automatic tagging Defines how to display information in a dimension line.
Display tags Displays tags.
Include part count in Includes part count in the tag.
the tag
Do not display Does not display part marks for grouped items.
marks for the
grouped items

372 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
Available elements Elements available to define identical conditions.
Add Adds items to Selected elements list.
Remove Removes items from Selected elements list.
Move up Moves the element higher in the list.
Move down Moves the element lower in the list.
Update grouping Yes updates dimension grouping automatically when the model
when model changes.
changes

Sub-assembly dimensioning properties

Use the options on the Sub-assembly tab of the Assembly - Dimensioning Properties dialog
box to view and modify which dimensions to create and how for sub-assemblies.

Option Description
Dimension parts inside sub- Defines whether to dimension parts inside sub-
assemblies assemblies.
Yes creates internal dimensions for parts inside
sub-assemblies.
No does not create internal dimensions for parts
inside sub-assemblies.
Measure sub-assembly position Defines the position from which the sub-assembly
from is measured.
None does not measure the sub-assembly position.
Bolt measures the position of the sub-assembly
from the bolts. If bolts are not included in the sub-
assembly, or if it is not possible to measure the
position from bolts, Tekla Structures measures the
sub-assembly position from the reference point.
Extreme points measures the position of the sub-
assembly from the bounding box of the sub-
assembly.
Reference point measures the position of the sub-
assembly from the reference point.

Reinforcement dimensioning properties

Use the Reinforcement dimensions tab in the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view
and modify the setting affecting the creation of reinforcement dimensions and how they are
displayed.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 373

Drawing settings
Option Description
Dimensions for On creates dimensions for reinforcing bar groups. This also
reinforcing bar groups activates the other selections on this tab.
Mark location Sets the mark type and location.

Selecting the first choice in the list creates dimension

marks.

Selecting one of the other options in the list box

creates tagged dimension marks. The location of the tag is
indicated by the small rectangle in the option.
Edit mark contents Opens the Dimension mark content dialog box where you can
select what you want to include in the dimension mark.
Close dimension to Yes automatically adds closing dimensions to the edge of the
binding geometry part.

See also Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (p. 278)

Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings)

Use the Grid tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify
settings for grid and overall dimensions in general arrangement drawings.

Option Description
Grid line dimensions On creates grid dimension lines.
Overall dimensions On creates the overall dimensions.
Dimension positioning: Positions the vertical grid and overall dimension lines to the
Horizontal Left or Right side of the drawing or on Both sides.
Dimension positioning: Positions the horizontal grid and overall dimension lines Above
Vertical or Below the drawing or Both.

Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings)

Use the Parts tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify
settings for part dimensions in general arrangement drawings.

374 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
Maximum leader line Controls how close the dimension lines are positioned to the
length: Outside parts they are dimensioning. Defines that the outside dimension
dimensions lines take the maximum leader line length from the grid line.
Maximum leader line Controls how close the dimension lines are positioned to the
length: Inside parts they are dimensioning. Defines that the inside dimension
dimensions lines take the maximum leader line length from the part
reference point.
Include parts not On dimensions the parts partly outside the view. Off will not
entirely in view dimension these parts.
Maximum number of Specifies the maximum number of dimension lines allowed
outside dimensions outside the grid. When you dimension different objects on
different dimension lines, using this setting helps you to create
cleaner drawings.
Once the desired maximum is reached, Tekla Structures creates
the dimensions inside the grid.
Object group Specifies different object groups to be dimensioned on different
dimensioning rules dimension lines.
Object group The object group to be dimensioned.
Positioning No dimensions does not create dimensions for the parts.
Inside grid creates dimensions next to or near the parts being
dimensioned. All part dimensions are placed inside the grid
when the parts are inside the grid. The dimension will still be
outside, even if you have selected Inside grid because of where
the parts are in the end bay and the end being dimensioned to is
next to the outside.
Outside grid creates dimensions to parts and positions them
outside the grid.
Either creates dimensions to parts and positions them either
inside or outside the grid depending on the part position and the
setting of the option Maximum number of outside
dimensions.
You must use the Either option if you define the Maximum
number of outside dimensions, so that Tekla Structures can
position dimensions inside the grid when the maximum number
of dimensions is reached outside the grid.
Horizontal position Left side positions all dimensions to horizontal parts to the left
of the grid.
Right side positions all dimensions to horizontal parts to the
right of the grid.
Distributed to both sides positions all dimensions to
horizontal parts to the grid nearest the part they are
dimensioning.
Vertical position Above positions all dimensions to vertical parts above the grid.
Below positions all dimensions to vertical parts below the grid.
Distributed to both sides positions all dimensions to vertical
parts to the grid nearest the part they are dimensioning.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 375

Drawing settings
Example: Limiting the number of outside dimensions (p. 266)
Example: Dimensioning parts partly outside the view (p. 265)
Example: Using maximum leader line length options (p. 264)

7.4 Mark properties

This section provides more information about the properties related to mark appearance and
contents.

Mark appearance properties

Use the General and Contents tabs in the Mark Properties dialog box of different types of
marks to view and modify the settings affecting the mark appearance. For reinforcement marks,
the corresponding settings are located on the Contents and Appearance tabs on the drawing
property level. For views, the corresponding settings are located on the Contents tab in the
Mark Contents dialog box.
Note that all the listed settings are not available for all marks.

Option Description
Contents tab:
Frame around elements: Type and Color Defines the element frame type and color
individually for each element.
Add frame allows you to add frames around
elements.
Font: Color, Height and Font Defines the font type, color, and height used
in element texts individually for each
element. Clicking Select gives more font
choices.
General or Appearance tab:
Visible In one view creates marks in one view only.
In all views creates marks in all views.

376 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
In main parts These options are for bolt marks.
In secondary parts Visible displays bolt marks.
In sub-assembly main parts Not visible does not display bolt marks.
In sub-assembly secondary parts
Visibility in view For some marks, this option can be set on the
drawing level, and for others only on the
view level.
distributed distributes the marks in the view.
Tekla Structures only creates marks that are
not visible in the other views.
always always creates marks in the view,
irrespective the settings in other views.
preferred acts as distributed, but the
preferred view has a higher priority.
none creates no marks.
Parts out of view plane This option is available only in view level
properties.
Visible displays marks outside of the view in
the drawing.
Not visible displays no marks outside the
view.
Bolt size limit This option is for bolt marks.
Filters standard-sized bolt marks out of
drawings. Tekla Structures does not display
bolt marks of the size you enter here.
There are several variables that affect the
Bolt size limit, see the See also list below.
Merge marks This option is for part marks and surface
treatment marks.
On merges marks.
Frame around mark: Type and Color Define the frame to be used around marks,
and the color of the frame.
Leader line: Type, Arrow and Use hidden Define the leader line type and line arrow
lines for hidden parts. type, and select to hide leader lines for
hidden parts.
Place Search margin is the distance within which
Tekla Structures searches for a space to place
a mark.
Minimal Distance is the minimum distance
of the mark from the part.
Quarter defines the areas Tekla Structures
searches for a space to place the mark.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 377

Drawing settings
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE

Leader line types

You can use leader lines with text, symbols, associative notes and marks to make it clearer to
which item it is related to.

Option Description
Texts

Symbols

Level marks

Revision marks

Part marks

Associative note

Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks

Use the Position tab of the Mark Contents dialog box in view properties to set the positioning
options for view labels marks, section marks and detail marks.

378 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
Show on For section marks.
Defines if the section marks are shown at
both ends of the cut line or at the left or right
end.
Text position Defines the position of the mark text in
relation to the line or in relation to the
symbol or symbol center line.
Horizontal offset sets the horizontal offset
of the mark text from the line.
Vertical offset sets the vertical offset of the
mark text from the line.
Text rotation For section marks.
Defines the rotation of the mark text.
Alignment: For view label marks.
Defines if the view label mark is aligned to
the center, right, or left.

Reinforcement mark merging properties

Use the Merging tab in the Cast Unit - Reinforcement Mark Properties dialog box to view
and modify the settings affecting the merging of the reinforcement marks in cast unit drawings.

Option Image Description

Identical marks in One leader line per row merges the marks and
same cast unit creates one leader line for a row of reinforcing
bars.
Parallel leader lines merges the marks and
creates parallel leader lines.
Leader lines to one point merges the marks and
draws all leader lines to one point.
No merge does not merge marks. Tekla
Structures creates an individual leader line for
each mark.
If you select No merge, you still need to define
the mark content for the marks that Tekla
Structures automatically merges on the Merging
tab.
Preferred merge Merge vertically merges the marks in the
direction vertical direction of the drawing.

Merge horizontally merges the marks in the

horizontal direction of the drawing.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 379

Drawing settings
Weld mark properties
Use the Weld Mark Properties dialog box to view or modify the properties of a weld manually
added in a drawing.

Option Description
Prefix a= design throat thickness, s= penetration throat thickness, or z=
leg length
Size The size of the weld.
Type The type of the weld.
Angle The angle of weld preparation, bevels, or groove.
Tekla Structures displays the angle between the weld type symbol
and the fill type contour symbol.
Contour The fill type contour of a weld can be:
• None
• Flush
• Convex
• Concave
Finish Tekla Structures displays the finish symbol above the weld type
symbol in drawings. The options are:
• G (Grind)
• M (Machine)
• C (Chip)

• (Flush finished weld)

• (Smooth blended weld face)
Length The length of a regular weld depends on the length of the
connection between the welded parts. You can set the exact length
of a polygon weld by, for example, defining the start and end points
of the weld.
Pitch The center-to-center spacing of welds for non-continuous welds.
Pitch is shown in the weld mark if the value is greater than 0.0.
To create a non-continuous weld, define the center-to-center
spacing and the pitch of the welds. Tekla Structures calculates the
distance between the welds as the pitch minus the length of the
weld.
By default, Tekla Structures uses the – character to separate weld
length and pitch, e.g. 50–100. To change the separator to @, for
example, set the advanced option
XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR to @.
Effective throat The weld size used in weld strength calculation.
Root opening The space between the welded parts.
Reference text Additional information to appear in the weld symbol. For example,
information about the weld specification or process.
Edge/Around Indicates whether only one edge or the entire perimeter of a face
should be welded.
A circle in the weld symbol in drawings indicates the Around
option has been used.

380 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
Workshop/Site Indicates where the weld should be made.
Stitch weld Set this option to Yes to create a staggered, intermittent weld.
Stitch welds are s are staggered on both sides of the welded part.
Tekla Structures shows the weld type symbols as staggered in weld
symbols.
If you set this option to No, a non- staggered intermittent weld is
created. To show the pitch in a weld mark, set Pitch to a value
greater than 0.0.
Placing Search margin is the farthest distance Tekla Structures uses when
searching for an empty space for the weld mark.
Minimal distance is the closest distance Tekla Structures uses to
search for an empty space for a weld mark.
Direction is the side on which Tekla Structures places weld marks
(relative to the related object).
Placing is the method used to place welds marks:
• Free lets Tekla Structures decide the location and direction of
the dimension based on the Direction settings.
• Fixed allows you to place the weld at any point.

Level mark properties

Use the options on the Level Mark Properties dialog box to view and modify the level mark
contents.

Option Description
Prefix Displays text before the mark.
Prefix for positive level + displays a + character in front of the value.
Visibility of numeric value Defines if the numeric values are visible or
hidden.
Postfix Displays text after the mark.
Precision Defines the precision of the level mark
dimension.
Format Defines the format of the level mark
dimension.
Use grouping Defines whether to use different grouping
options to represent the level mark
dimensions.
Units Defines the units used in level mark
dimensions. The available values are
automatic, mm, cm, m, foot - inch and
inch.

See also Selecting the dimension format, precision and units (p. 256)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 381

Drawing settings
7.5 Mark elements
The elements and options selected on the mark properties Content tab define the contents of
the marks in drawings.

Common elements in marks

Here is a list of elements that are available for most of the marks.

Element Description
User-defined Available for building object marks.
attributes
Adds a user-defined attribute to the mark. You can also use
template fields for user-defined attributes.
In marks, you cannot use template attributes such as
MODEL_TOTAL that refer to the whole model. Marks only check
the information from the object in the drawing and not from the
whole model.
Text Opens a dialog box where you can enter text in the mark. The
maximum number of characters is 255.
Symbol Opens a dialog box where you can change the symbol file in use
and select a symbol from the Tekla Structures symbol file to add
to the mark.
<> Adds spaces between mark elements.
<--’ Adds a line feed between the elements to create multi-row marks.
The default space between the lines depends on the text height
and can be changed with the advanced option
XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR.

382 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Element Description
<-- Adds a backspace between the desired elements to remove the
default space between them. The default space between the
elements depends on the text height and can be changed with the
advanced option XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR.
Template Available for building object marks.
Adds in the mark a custom graphical template created with
Template Editor. Opens a dialog box where you can select the
template.

Part mark elements

The following is a list of the elements specific to part marks and neighbor part marks. Some of
the available elements are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks,
and listed separately.
You can define part mark options independently for main and secondary parts and for sub-
assembly main and secondary parts.

Element Description
Assembly position Adds the prefix and position number of the assembly.
Part position Adds the prefix and position number of the part.
Profile Adds the profile name of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Material Adds the material of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Name Adds the name of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Class Adds the class of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Finish Adds the finish of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Size Adds the size of the part or the assembly or cast unit main part.
Length Adds the length of the part or assembly, or of the cast unit main
part.
Camber Adds the camber of the part or the assembly or cast unit main part
(if this user-defined part attribute is set).
Fittings (NS/FS) Displays the near side/far side marks in the part mark. (only
available in front views).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 383

Drawing settings
Element Description
Face direction Displays main compass direction (North, East, South, West) of the
face, where the mark is added. The direction can only be shown if
• the face is vertical
• the direction is the same for all assemblies with the same
assembly position number
In other cases, the element produces no text to mark.
Furthermore, face direction is not shown for columns in general
arrangement drawings, if you have set Mark always to center of
column in GA drawings to Yes in Tools > Options > Options...
> Orientation marks.
Gage of outstanding Adds the hole gage.
leg
You can control the format of this option with the advance option
XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING.
Center-to-center Adds center-to-center distance in the mark.
distance
You can control the format of this option with the advanced
options
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING
and
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING.

Bolt mark elements

Here is a list of the elements specific to part marks and neighbor part marks. Some of the
available elements are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks, and
listed separately.
You can define bolt mark options independently for site and shop bolts.

Element Description
Bolt length Adds the length of the bolt.
Bolt diameter Adds the bolt diameter.
Hole diameter Adds the hole diameter.
Material Adds the bolt material grade.
Standard Adds the bolt standard.
Short name Adds the bolt’s short name. This can be the commercial name of a
specific bolt, for example.

384 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Element Description
Full name Adds the complete name of the bolt. This name is visible in the
dialog box list.
Assembly type Adds the bolt’s assembly type.
Number of bolts Adds the quantity of bolts.
Slot length (x, y) Adds the slot’s length in the x or y direction.
Slot height Adds the slot’s height.
Size Adds the hole size.
Countersunk Adds countersink in the countersunk bolt marks.
Gage of outstanding Adds hole gage.
leg
You can control the format of this element with the advanced
option XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING.
Center-to-center Adds center-to-center distance.
distance
You can control the format of this element with the advanced
options
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING
and
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING.

Reinforcement mark elements

Here is a list of the elements you can include in all reinforcement marks. Some of the available
elements are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks, and listed
separately.
You can define mark options separately for single reinforcing bars, bar groups, and
reinforcement meshes.

Element Description
Name Adds the name of the bar or mesh.
Grade Adds the material grade of the bar or mesh.
Diameter Adds the nominal diameter of the bar.
Class Adds the class of the bar or mesh.
Length Adds the total length of the bar.
Number Adds the quantity of the bars.
Position Adds the reinforcement position number.
Shape Adds the shape of the bar or mesh.
Weight Adds the weight of the bar or mesh.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 385

Drawing settings
Element Description
cc Adds the center-to-center spacing of the bars. The options are:
• cc adds the spacing value if spacing does not vary
• cc min adds the smallest spacing value of the bar group if
spacing varies
• cc max adds the largest spacing value of the bar group if
spacing varies
• cc exact lists all spacing values of the bar group
• cc target lists all reinforcing bar target spacing values
Pull-out picture Adds a pull-out picture of a bar to the mark.

Reinforcement mesh mark elements

The following elements are specific to the reinforcement mesh marks. Some of the available
elements are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks, and listed
separately.

Element Description
Size Adds the nominal diameters of the mesh bars, dimensions of the
mesh, and the spacings of the bars in the longitudinal and
crossing directions.
Mesh length Adds the length of the reinforcement mesh.
Mesh width Adds the width of the reinforcement mesh.
cc Use the same center-to-center options as for single bars. You
can define this element individually for the longitudinal and
crossing bars in the mesh.
Diameter longitudinal Adds the diameter or size of the longitudinal bars.
Diameter cross Adds the diameter or size of the crossing bars.

Elements in merged reinforcement marks

Merged marks can contain the following elements:

386 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Element Description
Block prefix Adds text or a value to the beginning of each repeated
block. Opens a dialog box where you can enter the
prefix.
You can use the following variables as block
prefixes:
%NUMBER% includes the number of marks merged to
the mark.
%NUMBER_IN_PLANE% includes the number of marks
merged in the plane of the drawing to the mark.
%NUMBER_OUT_OF_PLANE% includes the number of
marks merged in the depth direction of the drawing to
the mark.
Single mark content Adds the content of the single reinforcement mark
selected on the Content tab to the mark.
Distance between groups Adds the center-to-center distances between
reinforcing bars or bar groups included in a merged
mark.
Symbol separating blocks in Adds a symbol between the blocks in the merged
mark mark. Opens a dialog box where you can enter the
symbol.
The elements that appear before this element on the
mark content list generate a block.

Connection mark elements

This section describes the elements specific to connection marks. Some of the available
elements are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks, and listed
separately.

Element Description
Code Adds the connection code. This is a user-defined code you give
for the connection in the connection dialog box. The code can be
either a text string or a number.
Name Adds the connection name, for example, Tube_splice.
DSTV code Adds the DSTV code.
Connection number Adds the number of the connection.
Running number Adds the connection running number. All connections are
automatically numbered with a running number, for example, 85.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 387

Drawing settings
Element Description
Group Adds the connection group.
Connection error Adds the connection error. The numbers correspond to the
connection symbol colors:
• 1 = green
• 2 = yellow
• 3 = red symbol

Surface treatment mark elements

Here is a list of elements specific to surface treatment marks. Some of the available elements
are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks, and listed separately.

Element Description
Name Adds the name defined in the Name box in the Surface
treatment properties dialog box.
Material Adds the surface treatment material.
Class Adds the class of the surface treatment.
Code Adds the code of the surface treatment.
Surface treatment name Adds the name selected from the Surface treatment name
list in the Surface treatment properties dialog box.

Section and detail mark elements

Here is a list of elements specific to section and detail marks:

Element Description
Section name/Detail Adds the name of the section or the detail (A, B, C, and so on).
name
Source drawing name Adds the name of the drawing where the view is.
Source drawing name Adds the name of the drawing where the view is. This is shown
when moved only if the view is not in the same drawing as the section/detail
mark.

388 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks (p. 378)

View, section view and detail view label mark elements

Here is a list of the elements specific to view, section view and detail view label marks:

Element Description
View name/Section Adds the name of the view, section or the detail.
name/Detail name
Scale Adds the scale of the view.
Drawing name Adds the name of the current drawing.
Source drawing name Adds the name of the drawing where the view has originally been
created.
Source drawing name Adds the name of the drawing where the view has originally been
when moved created. This is shown only when the view has been moved from
its original drawing.

7.6 Part and neighbor part properties

This section provides more information about the properties related to part appearance and
contents.

See also Part and neighbor part content properties (p. 389)
Part and neighbor part fill properties (p. 391)
Building object appearance properties (p. 403)
Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance (p. 325)

Part and neighbor part content properties

Use the options on the Contents tab of the Part Properties or Neighbor Part Properties
dialog box to view and modify the part or neighbor part properties.
All part properties dialog boxes do not contain all of the settings listed below.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 389

Drawing settings
Option Description
Part representation Outline shows parts as solid objects.
Exact shows parts as solid objects. This choice also
draws the chamfers in the profile cross sections.
Symbol draws parts as lines.
Symbol with partial profile shows a partial profile of the
part. The length of the partial profile is fixed to 1000
mm.
Workshop form draws round tube profiles as wrap-
around templates.
Bounding box draws parts as boxes surrounding the
actual profiles.
Base box shows parts as boxes and uses the h and b
values from the profile catalog as box dimensions.
Symbol offset Defines the distance of the end points of reference lines
and center lines from the end points of the object.
Inner contours Shows the inner contours of a tube.
Hidden lines If the Hidden lines check box is selected, Tekla
Structures shows hidden lines in secondary and neighbor
parts.
If the Own hidden lines check box is selected, Tekla
Structures shows hidden lines in main parts.
Center line Select the Main part > Beam, Plate or Polygon check
box to show center lines in main parts.
Select the Secondary part > Beam, Plate or Polygon
check box to show center lines in secondary parts.
Reference lines Select the Main part > Beam, Plate or Polygon check
box to show reference lines in main parts.
Select the Secondary part > Beam, Plate or Polygon
check box to show reference lines in secondary parts.
Additional marks Select the following check boxes to show additional
marks in drawings:
• Orientation marks
• Connecting side marks
• Pop-marks
• Edge chamfers

390 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Part and neighbor part fill properties
Use the options on the Fill tab of the Part Properties or Neighbor Part Properties dialog box
to view and modify the part or neighbor part fill properties. The properties can be set separately
for part faces and sections.

Setting Description
Type Defines the fill type. Clicking the button next
to the list opens a preview of the hatch
patterns.
Automatic selects the fill type automatically
from the hatch pattern schema files.
None uses no fill.
Color Defines the color for the fill.
You can select a predefined color or use
Special color that is not converted to black
in printouts.
Background Defines the background color for the fill.
Background color selection is disabled for
hardware hatches.
Background color can be set for automatic
hatches, but is has effect only if automatic
hatch is not defined for the material in the
hatch pattern schema file.
Scale Automatic scales and rotates the fill
automatically.
Custom allows you to select scaling and
rotation manually.
Scaling in direction x and Scaling in
direction y define the scales in x and y
direction.
Keep ratio of x and y retains the relative
proportions in the hatch pattern.
Angle rotates the fill. Angle 0.0 is for
horizontal and 90.0 for vertical.

Part and shape hatch pattern properties

The hatch patterns for material types and names are defined in a hatch schema file (in a .htc
file). Different drawing types (general arrangement, assembly, single-part, and cast unit
drawings) have their own schema files. These hatch patterns are used when you set Type to
Automatic on the Fill page of the part or shape properties dialog box. The default schema files
are located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\system folder.
The name of the schema file Tekla Structures uses for each drawing type is defined on the
Hatching page of the Advance Options dialog box:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 391

Drawing settings
• set XS_DRAWING_GA_HATCH_SCHEMA=general.htc
• set XS_DRAWING_ASSEMBLY_HATCH_SCHEMA=assembly.htc
• set XS_DRAWING_SINGLE_PART_HATCH_SCHEMA=single.htc
• set XS_DRAWING_CAST_UNIT_HATCH_SCHEMA=cast_unit.htc
The syntax of the schema file is:
Material type, Material name, Hatch name, Scale, Color, Automatic
scaling and rotation
An example of the .htc file:

Option Description
Material type STEEL, CONCRETE, TIMBER, MISCELLANEOUS (case
sensitive)
Material name The material name defined for the part in the properties dialog
box in the model.

392 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
Hatch name To check the hatch pattern names and related hatch patterns
open the Part Properties dialog box, select a hatch pattern
from the Type list and click the ... button next to the list. Then
click a pattern to see its name in the Type list. Hatch names are
case sensitive.
Scale Scale is a numeric value that Tekla Structures uses to scale
hatches.
Color 0=black (default)
1=white
2=red
3=green
4=blue
5=cyan
6=yellow
7=magenta
120=Special (use this color for gray shade)
The hatch color defines the line width for the printer. If you do
not define a color for a hatch in the schema file, Tekla
Structures uses the default color black (0). To use the special
color that is printed as color or grayscale, depending on the
selected printer settings, set the color number in the .htc file
to 120.
Automatic scaling and Automatic scaling and rotation defines whether you want to
rotation use automatic scaling and rotation.
1=true
0=false (default)
No hatching If you do not want to use any hatch pattern for a material, leave
the hatch name field blank in the schema file.

See also Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes (p. 338)
Part and neighbor part fill properties (p. 391)

7.7 Bolt properties

This section provides more information about the properties related to bolt appearance and
contents.

Bolt content properties

Use the options on the Contents tab of the Bolt Properties dialog box to view and modify the
bolt content properties.
All bolt properties dialog boxes do not contain all of the settings listed below.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 393

Drawing settings
Option Description
Solid/symbol The options are Solid, Exact Solid, Symbol,
Symbol 2, Symbol 3, DIN symbol, and
User-defined symbol.
DIN symbol corresponds to German
standards (DIN).
User-defined symbol is a symbol that has
been created in Symbol Editor.
Symbol content Indicates whether to include the Hole and
Axis symbols in the drawing.
Visibility Visible shows bolt group holes in main parts
or secondary parts. Not visible hides them.
In assembly drawings you can also define
whether to show or hide bolt group holes in
sub-assemblies.

7.8 Surface treatment visibility and content proper-

ties
Use the options on the Contents tab of the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box to view
and modify the surface treatment properties.

Option Description
Visibility Visible shows the surface treatment.
Not visible does not show the surface treatment.
Representation Defines the appearance of the surface treatment.
The available options are Outline, Exact,
Workshop form, Symbol, Bounding box, and
Base box.
Show pattern Defines whether the hatch pattern is shown.
Hidden lines Defines whether hidden lines in secondary and
neighboring parts are shown.
Own hidden lines Defines whether hidden lines in main parts are
shown.

394 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Surface treatment hatch pattern properties
The properties of the hatch patterns to use for each surface treatment type are defined in the
surfacing.htc file, located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\system.

When you edit a schema file, you must restart Tekla Structures to apply
the changes.

The syntax of surfacing.htc file is:

Surfacing Type, Surfacing Code, Hatch name, Scale, [Color], [Automatic
Scaling and Rotation]
Example:
1,MF,ANSI31,0.71,SMF,ANSI32,0.71,WT,ANSI33,0.71,HT,ANSI34,0.71,LSB,AR-
SAND,0.72,SM1,CROSS,1.02,SM2,CHECKERED,1.03,TS3,FBBRICKC,1.04,FP,ANSI3
1,1.04,UP,ANSI32,1.0

Option Description
Surface treatment type • 1 = concrete finish
• 2 = special mix
• 3 = tile surface
• 4 = steel finish
Surface treatment code This is the abbreviation used in drawings and
reports, for example, MF for Magnesium Float.
The product_finishes.dat file, which is
also located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\
common\system, contains a full list of surface
treatment codes.
Hatch name You can check the hatch pattern names and related
hatch patterns for example by opening Part
Properties dialog box, selecting a hatch pattern
from the Type list and clicking the ... button next to
the list.
Scale Scale is a numeric value that Tekla Structures uses
to scale hatches.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 395

Drawing settings
Option Description
Color (optional) 0=black (default)
1=white
2=red
3=green
4=blue
5=cyan
6=yellow
7=magenta
120=Special (use this color for gray shade)
The hatch color defines the line width for the
printer. If you do not define a color for a hatch in
the surfacing.htc file, Tekla Structures uses
the color defined on the Appearance tab of the
surface treatment properties dialog box in the
drawing. The Visible lines color and type is used
for the front of the surface treatment, and the
Hidden lines for the back.
Automatic Scaling and 1=true
Rotation (optional)
0=false (default)

7.9 Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content

properties
Use the options on the Bar content and Mesh content tabs of the Reinforcement Properties
dialog box to view and modify the reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties.

Option Description
Visibility of all reinforcing bars Visible shows the bars or meshes.
Visibility of all meshes Not visible does not show the bars or meshes
Representation single line draws a single line with radiused bends.
double line draws an outline of the bar with
radiused bends.
double lines with filled ends draws an outline of
the bar with radiused bends and filled bar ends.
filled line draws a solid bar with radiused bends.
stick draws a single line without radiused bends.
outline shows the shape of the mesh using an
outline rectangle or polygon, and a diagonal line.
Applies only to reinforcement meshes.

396 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Option Description
Visibility of reinforcing bars in all shows all bars in a group or mesh.
group
first bar shows only the first bar in the group or
Visibility of longitudinal wires mesh.
Visibility of crossing bars last bar shows only the last bar in the group or
mesh.
first and last bar shows the first and last bar in the
group or mesh.
bar in the middle of group shows one bar in the
middle of the group or mesh.
two bars in the middle of group shows two bars in
the middle of the group or mesh.
customized indicates that you have specified the
location of the only visible reinforcing bar. Applies
only to bar groups and meshes.
Hide lines behind parts Hides the lines behind the part. This is useful, for
example, with lifting anchors where the reinforcing
bar is partly outside the part.
Hide lines behind other rebars Hides the lines behind other reinforcement bar
lines.
Symbol at straight end

Applies only to reinforcing bars.

Symbol at hooked end

Applies only to reinforcing bars.

Mesh symbol Defines the mesh symbol to be used. The mesh
symbol appears in the middle of the diagonal line.

Symbol 1

Symbol 2

Symbol 3
Mesh symbol size Defines the size of the mesh symbol.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 397

Drawing settings
In addition to the properties in the Reinforcement properties dialog
box, you can use some advanced options to modify the appearance of the
reinforcement:
• To increase the size of the bend and end symbols (in drawing units)
use the advanced options
XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE and
XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options... > Concrete Detailing.
• Use the advanced option XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS in
Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Concrete Detailing to
change the end symbols to a different direction.

7.10 Reinforcement settings for drawings

Tekla Structures uses the settings in the rebar_config.inp file in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder to
define the following reinforcement-related issues in drawings:
• Selected area-specific reinforcing bar bending schedule
• Rounding of bar dimensions
• Available symbols for meshes, strands, and unbonding
• Appearance of reinforcement pull-outs
The entries in the rebar_config.inp file are:

Entry Description
MergeOneFormat No longer used. Define these properties in the drawing
MergeTwoOrMoreFormat
properties.
s
MergeAndFormat
LeaderLinetype
DimensionMarkSpacing ="/"
Separator
Affects the separator in reinforcement marks.
ExactDimensionMarkSp =" + "
acingSeparator
Separator between different exact spacing values in
reinforcement marks.
ExactDimensionMarkPc ="*"
sSeparator
Separator between the number of bars and their exact spacing
value in reinforcement mark.
GroupBarMark No longer in use.

398 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Entry Description
MarkingDimAttributes No longer in use.
ScheduleCountry Defines which bending schedule is used. Affects bending
shapes in templates and reports. The available schedules are
FIN, SWE, UK, US.
When you number the model, the bending shape for the bar is
given according to this information. For example, in the
Default environment, the bending shapes are letters A, B, C,
and so on.
ScheduleDimensionRou Options:
ndingDirection
• "UP": rounds bar dimensions up
ScheduleTotalLengthR
oundingDirection
• "DOWN": rounds bar dimensions down
• "NEAREST": rounds bar dimensions either up or down
ScheduleDimensionRou Sets the rounding accuracy for bar dimensions. Default is
ndingAccuracy 1 mm.
Tekla Structures rounds individual bar dimensions up or down
according to the option you select for
ScheduleDimensionRoundingDirection.
ScheduleTotalLengthR Sets the rounding accuracy for the total bar length. Default is
oundingAccuracy 10 mm.
Tekla Structures rounds individual bar dimensions up or down
according to the option you select for
ScheduleTotalLengthRoundingDirection.
MeshSymbolFile Points to the mesh symbol file that contains the available mesh
symbols. Affects the available reinforcement mesh symbols in
drawings.
By default, points to the mesh.sym file in the ...\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\
symbols folder.
StrandSymbolFile Points to the strand symbol file that contains the available
strand symbols. Affects drawings.
By default, points to the strand.sym file in the
...\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\
symbols folder.
UnbondingSymbolFile Points to the unbonding symbol file that contains the available
unbonding symbols.
RebarMeshSize Template for rebar mesh size.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 399

Drawing settings
Entry Description
PullOutDimensionForm Defines the format for displaying the dimensions.
at
The format follows the dimension properties format.
Options:
• 0 = ###
• 1 = ###[.#]
• 2 = ###.#
• 3 = ###[.##]
• 4 = ###.##
• 5 = ###[.###]
• 6 = ###.###
• 7 = ### #/#
• 8 = ###/##.###
PullOutDimensionPrec Sets the level of precision.
ision
Options: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 16, and so on.
PullOutDimensionUnit Defines the units to use.
Options:
• 0 = auto
• 1 = mm
• 2 = cm
• 3=m
• 4 = inch
• 5 = foot and inch
PullOutColor Sets the color for the pull-outs in reinforcement marks.
Options:
• 1 = black
• 2 = red
• 3 = bright green
• 4 = blue
• 5 = cyan
• 6 = yellow
• 7 = magenta
• 8 = brown
• 9 = green
• 10 = dark blue
• 11 = forest green
• 12 = orange
• 13 = gray

400 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Entry Description
PullOutVisibleLineTy Sets the line type for reinforcing bar shape in pull-outs.
pe
Options:
1=

7=
PullOutRepresentatio Sets the representation type.
n
Options:
• 0 = single
• 1 = double
• 2 = filled
• 3 = stick
PullOutAngleColor Sets the color for the angle in pull-outs.
Options:
• 1 = black
• 2 = red
• 3 = green
• 4 = blue
• 5 = cyan
• 6 = yellow
• 7 = magenta
• 8 = brown
• 9 = green
• 10 = dark blue
• 11 = forest green
• 12 = orange
• 13 = gray

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 401

Drawing settings
Entry Description
PullOutAngleLineType Sets the line type for angle lines in pull-outs.
Options:
• 1=

• 2=

• 3=

• 4=

• 5=

• 6=

• 7=
PullOutShowDuplicate Defines whether duplicate dimensions are showed multiple
Dims times for one bar.
Options:
• 0 = duplicate dimensions are not shown (default)
• 1 = equal and parallel dimensions are shown, but similar
hook dimensions are not shown
• 2 = equal and parallel dimensions are not shown, but both
hook dimensions are shown
• 3 = all dimensions are shown
• 4 = hook dimensions are not shown
• 5 = hook dimensions, or equal and parallel dimensions
are not shown
PulloutShowUSHookDim Defines if the US/NA style of dimension will be shown for
s hooks over 90 degrees.
Options:
• 0 = shows European hook dimension (= leg length,
default)
• 1 = shows US hook dimension (= straight length) for
hooks >90 degrees
See the image below for the difference between the US/NA
(A) and European (B) hook dimension.

402 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Adding pull-out pictures in reinforcement marks (p. 310)

7.11 Placement properties for annotation objects

Use the settings in the Placing dialog boxes for annotation objects and dimensions to control
how the annotation objects are placed in a drawing.

Option Description
Search margin Defines the distance within which Tekla Structures
searches for a space to place a dimension, mark, weld
mark or another annotation object.
Minimal distance Defines the minimum distance of the mark, weld mark,
dimension or another annotation object from the part.
Quarter For marks and manually added annotation objects.
Defines the areas Tekla Structures searches for a space
to place the mark or annotation object.
Weld placement depends on the welding direction.
Welds can only be placed in certain sectors, so the
Quarter options are not available. This option is
available for manually added welds in the final drawing.
Placing free allows Tekla Structures to search for the first
suitable location for the mark, dimension, weld or
another annotation object. fixed allows you to place the
mark, dimension, weld or another annotation object in
any location.
When you use the option fixed, the annotation object
stays where it is even though you update the drawing,
whereas with free, Tekla Structures tries to find the
optimal place for the annotation object.
Direction Available only for manual dimensions.
Defines the side on which Tekla Structures places
dimensions (relative to the object being dimensioned).
This setting affects the Placing - free setting.

7.12 Building object appearance properties

Use the Appearance tab in the dialog boxes of building objects (parts, neighbor parts, bolts,
welds, surface treatments, reinforcement, meshes) to view and modify the settings affecting the
color and the type of the lines, and the text and line properties of the welds.
All building object property dialog boxes do not contain all of the settings listed below.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 403

Drawing settings
Option Description
Visible lines Sets the Color and Type of the visible lines.
Hidden lines, Center line Sets the Color and Type of the hidden lines.
Sets the Color of the center lines.
Reference lines Sets the Color and Type of the reference
lines.
Text: Color Sets the Color of the text.
Text: Height Sets the Height of the text.
Text: Font Sets the Font of the text. Click Select to
show more options.
Line: Type Sets the Type of the line.
Line: Color Sets the Color of the line.

7.13 Model weld visibility options

You can select which welds are visible in drawings. In assembly drawings, you can define the
visibility of welds in sub-assemblies.
Use options in the Welding Properties dialog box to set the visibility and contents of welds.

Option Description
Weld number Yes shows the weld number.
Tekla Structures assigns a number to each weld as the weld
is created. You can select whether to show or hide the weld
number.
Welds or Welds in sub- Not visible displays no welds in the drawing.
assemblies
Site weld visible displays only site welds in the drawing.
Workshop weld visible displays only workshop welds in
the drawing.
Both visible displays both site welds and workshop welds
in the drawing.
Weld size limit Enter a weld size to filter welds of that size out of the
drawing. This is useful when you only want to show non-
typical welds in a drawing.
To set whether the weld size is an exact or minimum value,
use the advanced option XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE.
To filter out a standard weld type, use the advanced option
XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE.

404 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE

7.14 Properties of additional drawing objects

Use the properties dialog boxes of different additional drawing objects (lines, rectangles,
polylines, polygons, arcs, circles) to view and modify the appearance of the objects. The
settings you have in the dialog box vary depending on the object type. Some objects do not
have all the settings listed below.

Setting Description
Line: Type

Line: Color Defines the color of the object lines.

Line: Bulge or Bulge for all lines. Values 0 - 1.The bulge factor defines the
curvature of the curved segments of objects
using the calculation:
Arc height = Line length * Bulge factor
Changing the bulge factor of a polyline or
polygon modifies all the segments of that
object.
Line: Radius Defines the radius of arcs and circles.
Arrow: Position

Arrow: Type

Arrow: Height

Arrow: Length

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 405

Drawing settings
Setting Description
Fill: Type Defines the fill type to be used in the object.
Clicking Select to shows the available hatch
types.
Fill: Color Defines the color of the fill.
Fill: Background Defines the background color for the fill.
Scaling in direction x Defines the fill scales in the x and y
direction.
Scaling in direction y
Keep ratio of x and y
Angle Rotates the fill. Angle 0.0 is for horizontal
and 90.0 for vertical.
Offset Moves the fill pattern inside the object to in
the x and y direction by the specified value.

7.15 DWG/DXF scaling options

Use one of these options to select the scaling of the DWG/DXF files.

Option Description
Scaling type X: Pick the left upper corner of the frame to insert the file. You
can only set the drawing scale in the x direction.
XY: Pick the left upper corner of the frame to insert the file.
You can set the drawing scale in both the x and y direction.
Scale to fit: Pick the left upper and bottom right corners of the
frame to size and create the frame. Tekla Structures scales the
file to fit the frame.
Best fit: Pick the left upper and bottom right corners of the
frame to size and create the frame. Tekla Structures scales the
file to fit, maintaining its original aspect ratio.
Scale in X Scales the file in the x direction. Enter a coefficient to indicate
the scale, for example, 1.0 for 100%, 1.5 for 150%, etc. The
scaling type must be set to X or XY.
Scale in Y Scales the file in the y direction. Enter a coefficient to indicate
the scale, for example, 1.0 for 100%, 1.5 for 150%, etc. The
scaling type must be set to XY.

See also Adding links to DWG and DXF files (p. 137)

406 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
7.16 Grid properties
Use the Grid Properties dialog box to view and modify the grid settings in drawings. The
advanced options XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH and
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR allow you to adjust the grid labels
further.

Option Description
Grids Visible shows the grids.
Not visible does not show the grids.
Visible in all views shows the grids in all drawing
views. This option is not available for general
arrangement drawings.
Only grid labels visible shows only the grid label
and a short section of the grid line. The length of
the displayed grid line depends on the value entered
in the Text placing box. On the drawing level Grid
Properties dialog boxes, this option is only
available for general arrangement drawings. On the
view and object level this option is available for all
types of drawings.
Text placing Sets the side to show the grid labels and the length
of the grid line extension (the distance between the
end of the grid line and the text).
Text: Color, Height, Font and Frame Defines the grid label text color, height, font and
frame.

7.17 Orientation settings

Use the Orientation marks page in the Options dialog box to define some orientation and
location settings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 407

Drawing settings
Setting Description
Project north Defines which direction is north in the
model. Enter the value in degrees counter-
clockwise from the global x axis.

Part viewing direction Defines which direction parts are viewed

from in drawings.
Beam skew limit Tekla Structures uses limit angles to
Column skew limit
determine whether a part is a beam or a
column when creating orientation marks.
Tekla Structures treats parts outside these
limits as braces.

Parts skewed more than 80° are columns.

Parts skewed less than 10° are beams.
Preferred location for mark Defines the location of part marks in
drawings, to the left or right end of the part.
Mark always to center of column This setting only affects columns.
Yes places part marks in the center of
columns in plan views. To indicate part
orientation, include compass direction (Face
direction) in the part mark instead.
No places part marks on the same flange in
general arrangement and assembly drawings.

408 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

Drawing settings
Index

# part marks ...........................................................128

predefined reinforcement dimensions .................109
reinforcement marks............................................128
2D...........................................................................21, 22 revision marks .....................................................137
3D................................................................................. 22 semi-automatic dimensions.................................115
drawing views......................................... 80, 85, 357 single-part views in assembly drawings ................89
isometric drawings ................................................ 32 surface treatment marks......................................128
rotation of views .................................................. 357 symbols ...............................................................156
3D views....................................................................... 32 symbols in marks.................................................304
texts.....................................................................133
weld marks ..........................................................151
a additional drawing objects .....................20, 79, 157, 405
advanced dimension properties..................................365
aligning
A1 ............................................................................... 213 drawing objects ...................................................167
A2 .......................................................................199, 213 drawing views............................................... 95, 228
A3 .............................................................. 199, 213, 216 aligning dimension texts .............................................261
printing ................................................................ 189 alternative scales........................................................223
A4 .............................................................. 199, 213, 216 anchor bolt plans ........................................... 27, 33, 357
printing ................................................................ 189 creating..................................................................63
absolute dimensions...........................................255, 361 dimensions ..........................................................275
appearance ......................................................... 256 included objects.....................................................64
orientation ........................................................... 256 including assemblies .............................................65
zero at start point ................................................ 256 including objects....................................................64
adding anchor bolts ..................................................................34
associative notes................................................. 129 angle...........................................................................405
automatic dimensions ......................................... 253 angle dimensions......................................... 63, 255, 361
bolt marks............................................................ 128 annotation objects 58, 79, 127, 133, 138, 151, 249, 251
closing dimensions.............................................. 122 associative.............................................................20
connection marks ................................................ 128 independent...........................................................20
dimension lines ................................................... 110 modifying .............................................................130
dimension points ................................................. 122 appearance
dimension points in a nchor bolt plans ................ 126 of bolts.................................................................332
dimension tags .................................................... 104 of building objects................................................403
dimensions ............................................................ 99 of dimension texts ...............................................255
drawing views........................................................ 81 of dimensions ......................................................255
dual dimensions .................................................. 107 of frames .............................................................312
foldmarks............................................................. 196 of leader lines ......................................................312
frames ................................................................. 196 of mark text..........................................................312
hyperlinks ............................................................ 136 of marks...................................................... 311, 376
level marks .......................................................... 128 of meshes............................................................336
links to DWG/DXF files........................................ 137 of neighbor parts .................................................325
links to other drawings ........................................ 135 of parts ................................................................325
links to text files................................................... 135 of reference models.............................................342
manual dimensions ............................................... 99

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 409

of reinforcement...................................................336 bar class......................................................................385
of surface treatment.............................................335 bar diameter................................................................385
arcs .................................................................... 157, 405 bar length ....................................................................385
dividing ................................................................166 bar marks ....................................................................386
arranging bar name.....................................................................385
drawing objects....................................................160 bar quantity .................................................................385
drawing views ........................................................96 bar shape ....................................................................385
arrows .........................................................................131 bar weight ...................................................................385
in additional drawing objects ...............................405 base points......................................................... 133, 313
in dimensions.......................................................255 beams
assemblies in cast unit drawings ..............................................44
in anchor bolt plans ...............................................65 view direction in drawings....................................235
assembly drawings .......................................................40 block prefix..................................................................386
column view direction ..........................................235 bolt diameter ...............................................................384
creating........................................................... 61, 66 bolt length ...................................................................384
dimensioning .......................................................370 bolt marks
example .................................................................40 elements ..................................................... 308, 384
freezing................................................................185 modifying .............................................................130
including single-part drawings .............................230 bolt plans.......................................................................63
nested assemblies.................................................42 bolt standard ...............................................................384
rails ........................................................................41 bolt’s full name ............................................................384
single-part views....................................................89 bolt’s short name.........................................................384
stairs ......................................................................40 bolts
view direction of beams and bracings .................235 appearance..........................................................332
assembly position .......................................................383 bolt symbols.........................................................333
assembly type.............................................................384 combining dimensions .........................................299
associative annotation objects........................... 127, 151 contents ...............................................................332
associative notes .................................................129 dimensioning............................................... 290, 371
level marks ..........................................................128 examples .............................................................333
modifying .............................................................130 in drawings...........................................................332
part marks............................................................128 properties.................................................... 393, 403
updating...............................................................130 bottom drawing views .......................................... 85, 357
associative notes ..........................................................20 bottom views ...............................................................225
adding..................................................................129 boundaries
in edge chamfers .................................................145 in drawings.............................................................93
associativity ..................................................................23 bracings
refreshing...............................................................60 view direction in drawings....................................235
associativity symbol building objects ...............................20, 22, 79, 138, 357
ghost associativity symbol .....................................23 modifying .............................................................139
switching on/off......................................................23 properties.............................................................403
automatic bulge ...........................................................................405
dimensions ................................................. 253, 254 by print area ................................................................199
marks.......................................................... 302, 303
autoscale ....................................................................223
autoscaling......................................................... 222, 224 c
autosizing........................................................... 222, 224
calculated drawing sizes .............................................213
b calculated sizes...........................................................216
camber ........................................................................383
cast unit definition method
back drawing views.............................................. 85, 357 By cast unit ID................................................. 61, 66
back views ..................................................................225 By cast unit position........................................ 61, 66

410 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

cast unit drawing dimension lines....................................................120
freezing ............................................................... 185 dimensions .................................116, 296, 299, 366
cast unit drawings......................................................... 44 section views .......................................................243
creating ...........................................................61, 66 compass direction.......................................................327
dimensioning ....................................................... 370 connecting
precast beams....................................................... 44 dimension lines....................................................121
precast column...................................................... 45 side marks ...........................................................329
precast stairs......................................................... 46 connection marks
cc........................................................................385, 386 modifying .............................................................130
center lines ................................................................. 115 connections
line type............................................................... 139 DSTV code ..........................................................387
center of gravity error.....................................................................387
dimensioning ....................................................... 113 group ...................................................................387
center-to-center distance........................... 290, 383, 384 marks...................................................................387
chamfer marks name ...................................................................387
adding ................................................................. 145 number ................................................................387
chamfers running number ...................................................387
in drawings ........................ 143, 144, 145, 146, 169 contents
change symbols ......................................................... 131 of bolts.................................................................332
colors................................................................... 132 of drawing parts...................................................325
removing ............................................................. 131 of drawings ............................................................19
showing in printed drawings................................ 132 of marks...............................................................382
changing of surface treatment ............................................335
drawing revisions ................................................ 187 coordinate systems
check dimensions...............................................285, 365 changing..............................................................233
checking fixed.....................................................................233
dimension point validity ....................................... 127 horizontal brace.......................................... 231, 233
circles .................................................................157, 405 local ............................................................ 231, 233
class ........................................................................... 383 model.......................................................... 231, 233
cloning oriented ...................................................... 231, 233
checking cloned drawings ..................................... 59 user coordinate system (UCS) ............................103
cloned objects ....................................................... 58 vertical brace .............................................. 231, 233
cloning templates ............................................50, 54 copying
dimensions ............................................................ 57 drawing objects ...................................................170
drawings..........................................................53, 55 drawing views........................................................89
cloning templates ...............................................350, 353 drawings ..............................................................354
closing with offset ............................................................170
drawings.............................................................. 182 countersunk ................................................................384
closing dimensions ..................................................... 295 cover-up areas............................................................141
adding ................................................................. 122 cover-up lines .............................................................141
clouds .................................................................131, 157 creating
COG, see center of gravity......................................... 113 anchor bolt plans ...................................................63
colors cut lines ...............................................................173
changing pen number ......................................... 179 drawings ......27, 49, 54, 58, 60, 61, 62, 65, 66, 69
color table............................................................ 199 drawings using menu commands..........................66
in drawings .................................160, 175, 176, 178 drawings using pop-up-menu commands..............66
in printing............................................................. 199 drawings using toolbar commands........................66
pen numbers ....................................................... 179 empty drawings .....................................................60
special colors ...................................................... 178 empty general arrangemet drawings.....................66
columns fillet ......................................................................168
in assembly drawings.......................................... 235 general arrangement drawings..............................60
in cast unit drawings.............................................. 45 moment connection symbols...............................171
combining revisions ..............................................................187

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 411

round chamfer in drawing ....................................169 dimension point validity........................................127
straight chamfer in drawing .................................169 removing ..............................................................122
curved section views.....................................................84 dimension tags.............................................99, 126, 365
customizing automatic tagging ................................................279
line types .............................................................345 content .................................................................104
print file names ....................................................191 filtering content ....................................................106
cut lines in dimensions.......................................................104
creating................................................................173 including part count..............................................109
deleting ................................................................174 removing default content .....................................104
managing.............................................................173 removing tag content ...........................................109
updating...............................................................173 rotating.................................................................104
cutting lines dimensions.......................................................20, 58, 98
in section marks...................................................248 absolute ...................................................... 256, 361
adding ....................................................................99

d adding dimension tags.........................................104

adjusting appearance ..........................................255
anchor bolt plans .................................................275
deck plans.....................................................................30 angle ....................................................................361
deformed parts angle dimensions.................................................256
undeforming.........................................................240 appearance................................................. 126, 364
deleting automatic .................................................... 253, 254
cut lines ...............................................................174 automatic tagging ................................................279
drawing revisions.................................................188 bolt dimensioning.................................................290
drawings ..............................................................186 bolts .....................................................................371
moment connection symbols ...............................172 center of gravity ...................................................113
depth check dimensions ................................................285
of the section view ...............................................244 cloning ...................................................................57
detail boundary .............................................................98 closing......................................................... 295, 366
detail marks ..................................................................81 combining .................................. 116, 296, 299, 366
detail name ..........................................................388 contents .................................................................99
elements ..............................................................388 coordinate system................................................103
modifying ...............................................................98 creating ................................................................278
source drawing name ..........................................388 creation method ...................................................357
detail symbols ...............................................................98 dimension format .................................................363
detail views .......................................................... 80, 246 dimension lines ...................................109, 110, 120
creating..................................................................81 dimension marks........................................... 99, 109
marks.....................................................................98 dimension point validity........................................127
moving to another drawing ....................................90 dimension points......................................... 122, 126
name....................................................................389 dimension tags.............................................. 99, 109
start letter or number .............................................83 dual dimensions...................................................107
view label mark elements ....................................389 editing ..................................................................119
view labels ...................................................... 81, 98 elements ................................................................99
detailed object level settings........................24, 209, 357 elevations.............................................................281
dim_operation.ail ........................................................281 enlarging ..............................................................259
dim_planes_table.txt...................................................284 exaggerating ........................................................259
dimension lines ...........................................................110 examples 100, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 275, 287,
combining ............................................................120 290, 295, 296, 299, 300, 301, 302
linking ..................................................................121 extension lines ............................................ 257, 361
unlinking ..............................................................121 flipping outside dimensions..................................124
dimension marks.........................................................126 formats.................................................................361
dimension points forward offset .............................................. 300, 366
adding......................................................... 122, 126 general arrangement drawings ................... 262, 374
grid dimensions....................................................263

412 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

grouping .....................................257, 279, 361, 372 of section views ...................................................244
in general arrangement drawings........................ 115 distance between groups............................................386
in reinforcement .................................................. 109 distances
integer values...................................................... 256 recognizable ........................................................300
level..................................................................... 361 dividing
limiting outside dimensions ................................. 266 arcs......................................................................166
marks ................................................. 126, 278, 365 lines .....................................................................166
maximum leader line length ................................ 264 dragging
minimizing views ................................................. 366 drawing objects ...................................................158
modifying............................................................. 126 drawing filters .............................................. 64, 209, 210
object groups....................................................... 262 drawing levels
object groups in dimensioning............................. 262 drawing level .............................................. 206, 209
overall dimensions .............................................. 263 object level ......................................... 208, 209, 212
part dimensions.................................. 267, 287, 374 view level.................................................... 207, 212
parts partly outside the view................................ 265 Drawing List..................................................................71
placing................................................ 249, 252, 361 cloning drawings....................................................55
plate side marks ..........................................125, 260 contents.......................................................... 72, 75
plates................................................................... 282 filtering...................................................................75
position dimensions.....................................279, 290 opening..................................................................72
position properties............................................... 368 sorting....................................................................75
positioning ...................................................267, 374 status flags ............................................................73
precision.............................................................. 361 what is displayed ...................................................72
preferred dim side ............................................... 301 drawing objects.................................................. 127, 158
prefix of radial dimensions .................................. 261 additional drawing objects .....................................20
profiles................................................................. 284 aligning ................................................................167
properties ........................................... 361, 365, 370 annotation objects .................................................20
recognizable distance ......................................... 366 arranging .............................................................160
recreating ............................................................ 108 associativity ...........................................................23
reinforcement ..................................... 110, 302, 373 building objects......................................................20
relative................................................................. 361 dragging ..............................................................158
selecting format................................................... 256 loading object properties .....................................208
selecting precision............................................... 256 modifying properties ............................................208
selecting units ..................................................... 256 moving.................................................................158
semi-automatic.................................................... 115 object level settings ............................ 209, 210, 212
setting line and arrow type .................................. 255 reshaping.............................................................158
setting start point................................................. 123 resizing ................................................................158
setting text appearance....................................... 255 drawing properties ............................................. 203, 212
settings................................................................ 278 applying object level settings on drawing level....209
sloped.................................................................. 261 drawing property files ..........................................348
spiral stirrup reinforcement groups...................... 111 in an existing drawing..........................................207
straight ................................................................ 361 modifying before creating drawings.....................206
straight dimensions ............................................. 256 modifying properties of several drawings ............207
sub-assemblies ................................................... 373 drawing property files .................................................351
tags .............................................................302, 365 drawing property levels
tags, see dimension tags .................................... 126 drawing level .......................................................210
type .............................................................255, 366 drawing sheets ...........................................................213
types.................................................................... 361 drawing size................................................................224
unfolded parts ..................................................... 280 calculated sizes ...................................................216
units..................................................................... 361 fixed sizes............................................................216
updating format ................................................... 308 drawing tools ..............................................................167
US absolute......................................................... 361 drawing view filters .....................................................104
direction drawing view labels
direction marks.................................................... 245 section views .........................................................97

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 413

drawing views ...............................................................80 top views................................................................85
3D ........................................................................357 unfolding polybeams............................................239
3D views ................................................................85 view label marks ..................................................246
adding....................................................................81 view label symbols...............................................357
adding view labels ...............................................246 viewing direction ..................................................235
aligning ..................................................................95 drawings........................................................................58
applying object level settings...............................212 adding texts .........................................................133
arranging ........................................................ 90, 96 adjusting dimension appearance .........................255
automatic .............................................................225 anchor bolt plans ............................................ 33, 63
back .....................................................................357 assembly drawing ..................................................40
back views .............................................................85 autoscaling...........................................................224
bottom..................................................................357 autosizing.............................................................224
bottom views..........................................................85 basic principles ......................................................21
boundaries.............................................................93 before creating.......................................................48
coordinate system ...............................................357 cast unit drawings ..................................................44
copying ..................................................................89 changing color .....................................................176
creating......................... 81, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 225 checking cloned drawings......................................59
deformed parts ....................................................240 checking if parts have drawings.............................76
detail views ............................................................81 cloning ......................................................53, 54, 55
direction ...................................................... 244, 245 closing..................................................................182
direction marks ....................................................357 colors .......................................................... 160, 175
displaying view names.........................................247 contents .................................................................19
end.......................................................................357 creating ........27, 49, 54, 58, 60, 61, 62, 65, 66, 69
extrema..................................................................93 creating general arrangement drawings ................66
fitting ......................................................................92 deleting ................................................................186
front .....................................................................357 dimensions...........................................................253
front views .............................................................85 drawing filters.......................................................210
key plans .............................................................220 Drawing List ...........................................................72
linking ....................................................................92 drawing objects......................................................20
main view names.................................................247 drawing size................................................ 222, 223
modifying ........................................................ 92, 96 drawing templates......................................... 58, 201
moving ...................................................................94 drawing view scale...................................... 222, 223
moving to another drawing ....................................90 editing ....................................................................79
neighbor part visibility ..........................................236 filters ....................................................................210
of entire model view...............................................86 foldmarks .............................................................195
of reinforcement meshes .......................................88 frames......................................................... 195, 196
of selected area in drawing....................................87 freezing ................................................................184
of selected area in model ......................................87 general arrangement drawings ..............................27
openings and recesses........................................242 grid lines ..............................................................174
part orientation.....................................................231 grids ............................................................ 174, 323
projection type .....................................................226 hiding and showing objects..................................160
properties.............................................................225 hyperlinks.............................................................136
resizing ..................................................................92 issuing..................................................................186
rotating...................................................................96 layouts ......................................... 19, 213, 215, 221
scale ........................................................... 223, 357 links to other drawings .........................................135
section .................................................................357 locking..................................................................184
section views ..........................................83, 84, 243 main features .........................................................17
settings ................................................................357 managing .............................................................183
shortening parts...................................................237 margins ................................................................217
showing openings and recesses .........................241 master drawings ..................................................348
single-part views....................................................89 modifying properties ...........................206, 207, 208
size ......................................................................223 multidrawings.........................................................47
top........................................................................357 multiple drawing sheets of the same part ..............69

414 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

object properties.................................................. 210
opening ................................................................. 77 e
preview images ................................................... 200
printing .............................. 188, 190, 191, 192, 194 edge chamfers................................................... 129, 330
properties ........................................... 206, 207, 212 adding chamfer marks.........................................145
protection ....................................................249, 251 in drawings .................................143, 144, 145, 146
recreating ............................................................ 347 editing
reference models ................................................ 342 dimensions ..........................................................119
removing ............................................................. 350 drawings ................................................................79
renaming ............................................................... 79 elements
revisions .............................................................. 186 in bolt marks ............................................... 308, 384
rotating parts ....................................................... 233 in connection marks ............................................387
rule sets................................................................. 62 in detail view label marks.....................................389
saved settings .................................................60, 61 in dimension marks ...............................................99
saving.................................................................. 181 in dimension tags ..................................................99
screen layout......................................................... 18 in marks...............................................................382
searching............................................................... 76 in merged reinforcement marks...........................386
selecting ................................................................ 76 in part marks........................................................383
settings.......................................203, 209, 212, 357 in reinforcement marks........................................385
single-part drawings .............................................. 34 in reinforcement mesh marks ..............................386
spaces between views ........................................ 217 in section view label marks..................................389
status flags ............................................................ 73 in surface treatment marks..................................388
status information.................................................. 74 in view label marks ..............................................389
table layouts ....................................... 216, 217, 218 elevation views .............................................................80
tables................................................................... 215 elevations
text files ............................................................... 135 datum point..........................................................357
three levels of modifying ....................................... 24 dimensioning .......................................................281
titles....................................................................... 80 embeds.........................................................................35
types...................................................................... 27 end views........................................................... 225, 357
unlocking ............................................................. 184 aligning with main view........................................228
updating ............................................... 22, 183, 348 view direction marks............................................245
user-defined attributes ........................................ 344 enlarged views
views .............................................................19, 225 adding dimension points......................................126
weld marks ..................................................147, 151 enlarging
wizards .................................................................. 62 dimensions ..........................................................259
drivers erection elevation drawings ..........................................31
printer drivers ...................................................... 197 erection elevation drawings, see general arrangement
dual dimensions drawings ................................................................27
adding automatically ........................................... 254 exaggerating dimensions............................................259
adding manually .................................................. 107 examples
DWG and DXF files applying drawing settings ....................................210
adding in a drawing table layout.......................... 220 bolts in drawings..................................................333
in drawings .......................................................... 137 cloning drawings....................................................55
scaling options .................................................... 406 dimensions in drawings ....100, 116, 122, 263, 264,
DWG/DXF files .......................................................20, 58 265, 266, 267, 275, 287, 290, 295, 296, 299,
300, 301, 302
edge chamfers in drawings .................................146
hatch patterns......................................................341
part representation in drawings ...........................330
welds in drawings ....................................... 148, 152
extension lines
of dimensions ......................................................257

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 415

f g
face direction .............................................327, 383, 407 GA drawings, see general arrangement drawings 27, 115
features gage of outstanding leg..............................290, 383, 384
in drawings ............................................................17 general arrangement drawings .....................................27
file names 3D views ................................................................32
in printing .............................................................191 anchor bolt plans ...................................................33
fill, see hatch patterns.................................................338 combining dimensions .........................................116
fillet creating ..................................................................60
creating................................................................168 creating using menu, toolbar or pop-up menu com-
fills...............................................................................338 mands.............................................................66
filtering deck plans..............................................................30
dimension tag content .........................................106 dimensions.................................................. 262, 374
drawing filters ......................................................210 erection elevation drawings ...................................31
Drawing List contents ............................................75 foundation plans ....................................................28
using drawing filters in anchor bolt plans...............64 framing plans .........................................................29
finding freezing ................................................................185
drawings ................................................................71 isometric drawings .................................................32
parts with drawings................................................76 plans .........................................................29, 30, 32
finish ...........................................................................383 semi-automatic dimensions .................................115
fitting drawing views......................................................92 slab plans...............................................................28
fittings (NS/FS) ...........................................................383 ghost outlines..............................................................160
fixed ..................................................................... 99, 151 graphical drawing objects .............................................58
fixed drawing sizes .....................................................213 grid dimensions.................................................. 263, 374
fixed sizes ...................................................................216 grid labels....................................................................175
flags grid lines
in drawings ............................................................73 hiding ...................................................................175
flipping outside dimensions.........................................124 in drawings...........................................................174
folders grids
in Master Drawing Catalog ......................... 354, 355 hiding ...................................................................175
folding printed drawings..............................................195 in drawings..........................................174, 323, 324
foldmarks ........................................................... 195, 196 moving grid labels................................................175
format properties.............................................................407
dimensions ..........................................................308 grouped dimensions
forward offset ..................................................... 300, 366 tagging .................................................................279
foundation plans ...........................................................63 grouping
frames................................................................ 195, 196 dimensions.................................................. 279, 372
around marks.......................................................312 identical objects ...................................................279
framing plans ................................................................29 large dimension values ........................................257
free................................................................................99
freezing
and associativity ..................................................185 h
and cloning ..........................................................185
assembly drawings ..............................................185 handle points in leader lines .......................................166
cast unit drawings................................................185 handles
drawings ..............................................................184 in drawing objects ................................................158
effect on drawings ...............................................185 hatch patterns .............................................................338
general arrangement drawings............................185 examples .............................................................341
single part drawings.............................................185 insulation..............................................................341
front drawing views ......................................85, 235, 357 neighbor parts............................................. 338, 391
front views...................................................................225 on surface treatment............................................340

416 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

parts ............................................................338, 391 adding..................................................................220
schema files ................................................338, 391 adjusting drawing views ......................................220
shapes................................................................. 338 knock-off dimensions......................................... 285, 365
surface treatment ................................................ 395
hidden lines ................................................................ 139
reference models ................................................ 342 l
hidden parts
listing ................................................................... 163 labels
showing frames and leader lines......................... 314 drawing view labels .............................................246
hiding grid labels ............................................................175
drawing objects ................................................... 160 landscape ...................................................................189
grid lines.............................................................. 175 layers
grids .................................................................... 175 reinforcing bars....................................................142
parts in drawings ................................................. 163 layouts ................................................................. 19, 213
reinforcing bar lines............................................. 336 adding key plans .................................................220
highlighting creating................................................................215
in drawings .......................................................... 131 selecting ..............................................................221
parts with drawings ............................................... 76 table layouts ........................................................214
hole diameter.............................................................. 384 leader lines .................................................................316
hole size ..................................................................... 384 base point location ..............................................133
hyperlinks ...............................................................20, 58 for reinforcing bar group marks ...........................317
adding ................................................................. 136 handle points .......................................................166
modifying............................................................. 138 maximum leader line length.................................264
modifying .............................................................166
i part marks ...........................................................312
types........................................................... 316, 378
length..........................................................................383
identical objects lengthening parts ........................................................237
grouping dimensions ........................................... 279 lenthening
images shortened parts ...................................................239
in templates......................................................... 345 level dimensions .........................................................361
preview images ................................................... 200 level marks ...................................................................58
independent annotation objects ................................. 133 adding..................................................................128
DWG and DXF files............................................. 137 properties ............................................................381
hyperlinks ............................................................ 136 levels
links ..................................................................... 135 drawing level .........................................................24
modifying............................................................. 138 object level ............................................................24
revision marks ..................................................... 137 three levels of modifying drawings ........................24
text ...................................................................... 135 view level...............................................................24
texts..................................................................... 133 limiting outside dimensions.........................................266
insulation line weights.................................................................199
hatch patterns ..................................................... 341 lines ................................................................... 157, 405
integrated drawings ...................................................... 22 customized line types ..........................................345
internal bolt dimensions.............................................. 290 dividing ................................................................166
issuing extending.............................................................163
drawings.............................................................. 186 in dimensions ......................................................255
shortening............................................................163

k trimming...............................................................163
linking
dimension lines....................................................121
key plan views .............................................................. 80 drawing views........................................................92
key plans .................................................................... 219 links ..............................................................................20

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 417

modifying .............................................................138 positioning............................................................378
to DWG and DXF files .........................................138 properties.................................................... 303, 376
to other drawings .................................................135 reinforcement marks .................. 321, 379, 385, 386
listing hidden parts......................................................163 revision marks......................................................137
location section marks.......................................................388
of beam marks.....................................................315 section view label marks......................................389
of bracing marks ..................................................315 settings ................................................................302
of column marks ..................................................315 showing frames and leader lines .........................314
of end views.........................................................228 surface treatment marks ......................................388
of marks...................................................... 315, 326 text appearance ...................................................312
of section views ...................................................228 updating ...............................................................130
locking user-defined attributes .........................................307
drawings ..............................................................184 using templates........................................... 305, 307
view label marks ..................................................389

m visibility ................................................................311
weld marks................................. 148, 151, 380, 404
Master Drawing Catalog ..............................49, 348, 351
main views ...................................................80, 225, 246 adding master drawings.............................. 348, 349
managing cloning templates........................................ 350, 353
cut lines ...............................................................173 copying drawings .................................................354
drawings ..............................................................183 managing folders .................................................354
master drawings ..................................................348 master drawing properties ...................................351
moment connection symbols ...............................171 preview images........................................... 200, 201
manual dimensions.............................................. 99, 100 removing drawings...................................... 350, 355
margins .......................................................................217 rule set properties ................................................351
MarkDimensionFormat ...............................................308 searching ...............................................................52
marks ................................................................... 20, 357 wizard files ...........................................................352
adding..................................................................303 master drawings..........................................................348
adding symbols....................................................304 adding ......................................................... 348, 349
adding templates ........................................ 304, 307 cloning templates.......................................... 50, 350
appearance................................................. 311, 376 properties.............................................................351
automatic .................................................... 302, 303 removing ..............................................................350
bolt marks ................................................... 308, 384 rule sets ........................................................ 51, 349
colors ...................................................................311 saved settings........................................................50
connection marks ................................................387 searching ...............................................................52
contents ...............................................................382 types ......................................................................50
detail marks .........................................................388 wizards...................................................................52
detail view label marks ........................................389 material .............................................................. 383, 384
direction marks ....................................................245 material grade .............................................................385
element unit settings............................................318 maximum leader line length ............................... 264, 374
elements .............................................312, 382, 383 maximum number of outside dimensions ...................266
frames......................................................... 311, 312 maximum position dimensions....................................279
in dimensions.......................................................365 merging
in view labels .......................................................246 marks ..................................................132, 319, 321
leader line types ..................................................316 part marks............................................................319
level marks ................................................. 128, 381 reinforcement marks ..........132, 133, 321, 322, 379
location ...............................................315, 316, 326 weld marks.................................................. 132, 153
merged reinforcement marks...............................386 mesh
merging...............................................132, 319, 321 creating a drawing view .........................................88
part marks............................................................128 in drawings...........................................................336
placing .................................................................249 properties.............................................................396
plate side marks ..................................................260 setting contents and appearance in drawings .....336
mesh class ..................................................................385

418 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

mesh diameter............................................................ 386 neighbor parts.............................................................325
mesh length................................................................ 386 content properties................................................389
mesh name................................................................. 385 fill .........................................................................391
mesh shape................................................................ 385 hatch patterns......................................................391
mesh size ................................................................... 386 in drawing views ..................................................236
mesh weight ............................................................... 385 in drawings ..........................................................325
mesh width ................................................................. 386 view extension.....................................................357
meshes nested assemblies
properties ............................................................ 403 drawings ................................................................42
minimizing views ........................................................ 366 north marks.................................................................328
minimum position dimensions .................................... 279 notes
model objects ............................................................... 22 associative notes.................................................129
modifying number of bars ...........................................................385
annotation object properties................................ 130 number of bolts...........................................................384
building objects ................................................... 139 numbering.....................................................................48
detail properties..................................................... 98
dimension properties........................................... 126
drawing grids....................................................... 324 o
Drawing List contents............................................ 75
drawing view properties ........................................ 96 object groups ..............................................................349
drawings................................................................ 24 in dimensioning .......................................... 262, 374
grid line properties............................................... 174 object level settings .................... 24, 209, 210, 212, 357
grid properties ..................................................... 174 object property files ....................................................212
independent annotation objects .......................... 138 objects
leader line shape................................................. 166 additional drawing objects ...................................157
section properties.................................................. 97 associative annotation objects ............................127
symbol properties................................................ 157 building objects....................................................138
wizard files .......................................................... 352 cloned objects .......................................................58
moment connection symbols drawing objects .................................... 20, 158, 208
creating ............................................................... 171 independent annotation objects ..........................133
deleting................................................................ 172 offset...........................................................................405
managing ............................................................ 171 forward offset.............................................. 300, 366
updating .............................................................. 172 opening
moving Drawing List...........................................................72
drawing views........................................................ 94 drawings ......................................................... 71, 77
drawing views to another drawing......................... 90 openings and recesses
end of dimension line .......................................... 120 showing ...............................................................241
objects in drawings.............................................. 158 showing in views .................................................357
multidrawings ............................................................... 47 showing symbols .................................................242
creating ................................................................. 67 orientation
creating empty multidrawings................................ 67 of marks...............................................................407
creating of selected parts ...................................... 68 of parts ............................................... 231, 326, 407
of selected drawings multidrawings ...................... 68 orientation marks ............................................... 326, 328
multiple drawing sheets of the same part..................... 69 orientation symbols.....................................................328
overall dimensions......................................................263
n
p
name .......................................................................... 383
named size ................................................................. 199 paper size ...................................................................199
names part marks
drawings................................................................ 79 adding..................................................................128

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 419

compass direction................................................327 plate side marks................................................. 260, 365
elements ..............................................................383 showing................................................................125
leader lines ................................................. 133, 312 plates ............................................................................36
merging................................................................319 dimensioning........................................................282
modifying .............................................................130 plot files, see print files................................................191
showing frames and leader lines .........................314 plotting, see printing...................................188, 190, 191
updating...............................................................130 polygons............................................................. 157, 405
using templates .......................................... 305, 307 polylines ............................................................. 157, 405
part position ................................................................383 portrait.........................................................................189
parts position dimensions ....................................................290
additional markings in drawings ..........................139 maximum .............................................................279
color.....................................................................139 minimum ..............................................................279
compass direction................................................327 positioning properties
connecting side marks.........................................329 section marks.......................................................378
content properties................................................389 view label marks ..................................................378
developed parts in drawings................................240 precision for dimensions .............................................256
dimensions .........................................267, 287, 374 preferred dim side .......................................................301
fill .........................................................................391 preferred scale ............................................................223
fill options.............................................................139 preventing
fills .......................................................................338 automatic drawing updates..................................348
hatch patterns............................................. 338, 391 preview images .................................................. 200, 201
in drawings ..........................................................325 creating ................................................................200
lengthening ..........................................................236 in Master Drawing Catalog ......................... 200, 201
lengthening in model ...........................................237 viewing.................................................................201
lengthening shortened parts ................................239 print area.....................................................................199
line types .............................................................139 print files......................................................................191
neighbor parts......................................................389 printer catalog .................................................... 197, 198
orientation...........................................231, 326, 328 printer drivers ..............................................................197
properties............................................330, 389, 403 printer instances
representation......................................................330 Abode postscript printer instances.......................198
representation in drawings ..................................139 adding ......................................................... 197, 198
settings ................................................................330 print-to-file instances............................................197
shortening............................................................236 setting up .............................................................197
shortening in drawings.........................................237 printers ........................................................................197
shortening view by view.......................................140 printing ........................................................................191
patterns adding printer instances.............................. 197, 198
hatch patterns......................................................338 colors ...................................................................199
PDF files drawings ..............................................................188
creating................................................................192 hints and tips........................................................200
pen numbers...................................................... 179, 199 in landscape.........................................................189
changing ..............................................................179 in portrait..............................................................189
pictures line weights ..........................................................199
pull-out pictures ...................................................310 multiple drawings .................................................190
placement settings.....................................249, 251, 252 on A3 ...................................................................189
placing on A4 ...................................................................189
annotation objects ..............................249, 251, 403 paper size ............................................................199
dimensions .........................................249, 251, 252 pen numbers........................................................199
fixed .............................................................. 99, 151 print area..............................................................199
free ........................................................................99 printer instances ..................................................197
marks.......................................................... 249, 251 settings ................................................................193
views....................................................................253 single drawings ....................................................188
welds .......................................................... 249, 251 to file ...................................................190, 191, 197
plan drawings......................................................... 29, 30 to multiple sheets.................................................194

420 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

to paper printer.................................................... 197 dimension marks .................................................109
to PDF .........................................................192, 198 dimension tags ....................................................109
profile.......................................................................... 383 dimensions ................................................. 302, 373
profiles hiding lines in drawings .......................................336
dimensions .......................................................... 284 in drawings ..........................................................336
project setup properties ................................................... 396, 403
updating project information................................ 204 reinforcing bar layer information..........................142
projection type ............................................................ 226 representation options.........................................337
properties setting contents and appearance in drawings .....336
associative annotation objects ............................ 130 reinforcement marks
bolts..................................................................... 393 adding pull-out pictures .......................................310
drawing properties......................206, 207, 208, 212 elements..................................................... 385, 386
grids .................................................................... 407 leader line base points ........................................313
marks .................................................................. 376 leader line types ..................................................316
meshes................................................................ 396 location ................................................................316
parts .................................................................... 389 merging .............................................. 133, 321, 322
project properties ................................................ 204 merging properties of marks................................379
reinforcement ...................................................... 396 modifying .............................................................130
surface treatment ................................................ 394 splitting ................................................................133
symbol properties................................................ 157 reinforcement mesh....................................................336
protected areas ..................................................249, 251 creating a drawing view.........................................88
pull-out picture............................................................ 385 properties ............................................................396
pull-out pictures setting appearance and contents in drawings .....336
in reinforcement marks........................................ 310 reinforcement position ................................................385
reinforcement settings for drawings............................398

r reinforcing bar group marks

leader line types ..................................................317
location ................................................................317
radial dimensions reinforcing bars
changing the prefix.............................................. 261 dimension lines....................................................110
rails............................................................................... 41 hiding lines in drawings .......................................336
rebar_config.inp.......................................................... 398 in drawings ......................................... 141, 142, 336
RebarClassificator ...................................................... 142 layer information..................................................142
RebarLayeringMarker................................................. 142 properties ............................................................396
re-checking dimension points..................................... 127 relative dimensions............................................ 255, 361
recognizable distances............................................... 300 removing
recreating change symbols ..................................................131
dimensions .......................................................... 108 dimension points .................................................122
drawings.............................................................. 347 dimension tag content .........................................106
rectangles...........................................................157, 405 drawings ..............................................................355
reference dimensions, see check dimensions............ 285 renaming
reference lines....................................................115, 139 drawings ................................................................79
reference models.......................................................... 20 representation
hidden lines ......................................................... 342 of parts in drawings .............................................330
in drawings .......................................................... 342 representation options
reflected views............................................................ 357 for reinforcement .................................................337
refreshing resetting
associativity........................................................... 60 user coordinate system .......................................181
reinforcement reshaping
adding dimensions .............................................. 109 drawing objects ...................................................158
closed dimensions............................................... 302 resizing
dimension lines ................................................... 109 drawing objects ...................................................158
drawing view boundaries.......................................93

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 421

drawing views ........................................................92 cutting line..............................................................83
revising drawings, see revisions .................................186 depth....................................................................244
revision marks..............................................58, 137, 138 direction ...............................................................244
arrows..................................................................137 label mark elements.............................................389
placing .................................................................137 modifying ...............................................................97
revisions......................................................................186 moving to another drawing ....................................90
changing ..............................................................187 name....................................................................389
creating................................................................187 properties.............................................................360
deleting ................................................................188 section marks.......................................................247
rotating view direction marks ............................................245
drawing views ........................................................96 selecting
parts in drawing views .........................................233 drawings ................................................................76
rule sets .................................................. 50, 51, 62, 352 semi-automatic dimensions ........................................115
in Master Drawing Catalog ..................................349 settings
modifying .............................................................351 additional drawing objects ...................................405
rules bolt content properties .........................................393
dimensioning rules...............................................262 bolt dimensioning properties................................371
bolt mark elements ..............................................384

s bolt properties ......................................................393

building object appearance properties.................403
common elements in marks.................................382
saved settings..................................................50, 60, 61 connection mark elements...................................387
in Master Drawing Catalog ..................................348 dimension appearance properties .......................364
modifying .............................................................351 dimension format properties ................................363
saving dimension grouping properties ............................372
drawings ..............................................................181 dimension mark properties ..................................365
scale ...........................................................................223 dimension properties ..........................361, 365, 366
scales dimension tag properties .....................................365
in tables ...............................................................218 drawing view properties .......................................357
of drawing views ......................................... 222, 223 drawings ..............................................................357
schema files....................................................... 338, 391 DWG/DXF scaling options ...................................406
screen layout grid and overall dimensioning properties .............374
in drawings ............................................................18 grid properties......................................................407
screenshots leader line types...................................................378
preview images....................................................200 level mark properties ...........................................381
searching mark appearance properties................................376
drawings ................................................................76 mark contents ......................................................382
master drawings ....................................................52 mark properties....................................................376
section marks....................................................... 83, 247 marks ...................................................................302
elements ..............................................................388 merged reinforcement marks...............................386
modifying ...............................................................97 orientation settings...............................................407
positioning properties ..........................................378 part and neighbor part content properties............389
section name .......................................................388 part and neighbor part fill properties ....................391
setting the cutting line..........................................248 part and neighbour part properties ......................389
source drawing name ..........................................388 part and shape hatch pattern properties..............391
section view labels........................................................83 part dimensioning properties ...................... 370, 374
modifying ...............................................................97 part mark elements ..............................................383
section views ...................................... 80, 225, 246, 357 placement properties ...........................................403
aligning with main view........................................228 position dimensioning properties .........................368
combining ............................................................243 positioning properties...........................................378
creating........................................................... 83, 84 print settings ........................................................193
cut box ...................................................................83 reinforcement and mesh visibility and content
properties......................................................396

422 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

reinforcement dimensioning properties ............... 373 slab plans .....................................................................28
reinforcement mark elements.............................. 385 sloped dimensions......................................................261
reinforcement mark merging properties .............. 379 slot height ...................................................................384
reinforcement mesh mark elements.................... 386 slot length ...................................................................384
reinforcement settings for drawings .................... 398 sorting
saved settings .................................................60, 61 Drawing List...........................................................75
section and detail mark elements........................ 388 spaces in drawing views.............................................217
section view properties........................................ 360 special color................................................................391
settings affecting the recreation of drawings....... 347 special colors..............................................................178
sub-assembly dimensioning properties............... 373 specified size ..............................................................223
surface treatment hatch pattern properties ......... 395 spiral stirrup reinforcement groups
surface treatment mark elements........................ 388 dimensioning .......................................................111
surface treatment visibility and content properties.... splitting
394 arcs......................................................................165
view, section view and detail view label marks ... 389 circles ..................................................................165
weld mark properties........................................... 380 lines .....................................................................165
weld visibility options........................................... 404 polylines ..............................................................165
shapes..................................................................20, 157 stairs .............................................................................40
arcs ..................................................................... 157 in cast unit drawings..............................................46
circles .................................................................. 157 start point
clouds.................................................................. 157 for dimensions .....................................................123
creating ............................................................... 157 status flags ...................................................................73
fills ....................................................................... 338 in Drawing List.......................................................74
hatch patterns ..................................................... 338 straight dimensions............................................ 255, 361
lines..................................................................... 157 sub-assemblies
polygons.............................................................. 157 dimensioning .......................................................373
polylines .............................................................. 157 superscript
rectangles............................................................ 157 adding in texts, dimensions and marks ...............134
short dimensions ........................................................ 252 surface treatment
shortening................................................................... 357 class ....................................................................388
parts in drawing views......................................... 237 code.....................................................................388
view by view ........................................................ 140 hatch patterns............................................. 340, 395
shortening and lengthening parts ............................... 236 in drawings ..........................................................335
shortening parts in drawings ...................................... 237 marks...................................................................388
showing material................................................................388
drawing objects ................................................... 160 name ...................................................................388
plate side marks .................................................. 125 properties ................................................... 394, 403
reference models in drawings ............................. 342 surface treatment marks
reinforcing bars in drawings ................................ 141 modifying .............................................................130
single mark content .................................................... 386 surfacing.htc ...............................................................395
single part drawings switches
freezing ............................................................... 185 for print file names...............................................191
single-part drawing views ............................................. 89 switching on/off
single-part drawings ..................................................... 34 associativity symbol...............................................23
anchor bolts........................................................... 34 Symbol Editor .............................................................154
creating ...........................................................61, 66 symbol separating blocks in mark ..............................386
dimensioning ....................................................... 370 symbols ......................................................... 20, 58, 382
embeds ................................................................. 35 adding in drawings ..............................................156
example................................................................. 36 associativity ...........................................................23
plates..................................................................... 36 bolt symbols ........................................................333
single-part views........................................................... 80 change symbols ..................................................131
size ............................................................................. 383 changing symbol file............................................156
skew limits .................................................................. 328 defining a firm folder............................................345

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 423

in drawings ..........................................................154 transparency
in marks ...............................................................304 of tables ...............................................................218
modifying .................................................... 138, 157 trimming
modifying symbol files .........................................155 lines in drawings ..................................................163
selecting files .......................................................155 types
symbol files.........................................154, 155, 156 dimension types...................................................255
viewing symbol files.............................................155 dimensions...........................................................361
SymEd, see Symbol Editor .........................................154 drawing types.........................................................27
of leader lines ......................................................378

t of master drawings ................................................50

table layouts................................................................213
u
adding a DWG/DXF file .......................................220
adding tables .......................................................217 UCS, see user coordinate system ..............................180
creating................................................................216 UDAs, see user-defined attributes ..............................382
replacing tables ...................................................218 undeformed.................................................................357
setting table scale................................................218 undeformed parts........................................................240
setting table transparency ...................................218 unfolded ......................................................................357
setting the location of tables ................................218 unfolding ............................................................ 239, 280
tables ................................................................. 213, 215 unfreezing drawings........................................... 184, 185
adding in table layout...........................................217 units
modifying .............................................................221 in mark elements .................................................318
replacing ..............................................................218 of dimensions.......................................................256
table layouts ............................................... 214, 218 unlinking
tags.............................................................................279 dimension lines ....................................................121
in dimensions.......................................................302 unlocking
tags, see dimension tags ............ 99, 104, 106, 109, 126 drawings ..............................................................184
template attributes updating
adding in marks ...................................................307 cut lines................................................................173
Template Editor ................................................. 305, 307 drawings ...............................................22, 183, 348
templates ....................................................................382 moment connection symbols ...............................172
cloning templates...................................................54 part marks............................................................130
in marks ..............................................304, 305, 307 weld marks...........................................................130
modifying tables...................................................221 user coordinate system...............................................180
table layouts ........................................................214 creating dimensions.............................................103
tables ...................................................................215 resetting ...............................................................181
template library ......................................................58 setting ..................................................................181
text toggling between two systems.............................181
in marks ...............................................................312 user-defined attributes ................................................382
modifying .............................................................138 adding in marks ...................................................307
text files.................................................................. 20, 58 in drawings...........................................................344
adding in drawings...............................................135 using superscript.........................................................134
texts ...............................................................20, 58, 382

tips
in drawings ..........................................................133
v
printing drawings .................................................200
titles validity
in drawings ............................................................80 of dimension points..............................................127
toggling between user coordinate systems.................181 value fields
top drawing views ................................................ 85, 357 in templates ................................................ 305, 307
top views.....................................................................225 view filters .......................................................... 209, 357

424 TEKLA STRUCTURES 17

view label marks of surface treatment ............................................335
positioning properties .......................................... 378 of weld marks ......................................................404
view labels
mark elements..................................................... 389
marks .................................................................. 246 w
name ................................................................... 389
view names ................................................................ 247 weld marks ........................................................ 148, 380
viewing direction adding..................................................................151
beams and bracings............................................ 235 examples .............................................................152
columns in drawings............................................ 235 merging ...............................................................153
views moddifying model weld properties.......................147
aligning..........................................................95, 228 modifying .............................................................130
arranging drawing views ....................................... 96 updating...............................................................130
assembly drawings.............................................. 230 visibility ................................................................404
cloning dimensions................................................ 57 weld numbers
drawing name...................................................... 389 showing ...............................................................404
drawing views...................................................... 225 weld symbols ..............................................................147
fitting drawing views .............................................. 92 welds ..........................................................................151
fixed..................................................................... 253 concepts ..............................................................147
frames ................................................................... 94 examples .............................................................148
free ...................................................................... 253 in drawings ..........................................................147
in drawings ................................ 19, 80, 81, 92, 225 mark properties ...................................................380
key plan view....................................................... 219 modifying .............................................................147
label mark elements ............................................ 389 modifying in drawings..........................................130
linking drawing views ............................................ 92 placing .................................................................249
moving drawing views ........................................... 94 properties ............................................................403
name ................................................................... 389 weld marks ..........................................................152
resizing drawing views .......................................... 92 welds in drawings ................................................148
rotating drawing views........................................... 96 wizard files..................................................................352
scale.................................................................... 389 wizards ............................................................ 50, 52, 62
source drawing name.......................................... 389 work point ...................................................................285
views along grid lines ................................................... 80 workshop drawings
visibility assembly drawings................................................40
of marks .............................................................. 311 single-part drawings ..............................................34
of reference models ............................................ 342

TEKLA STRUCTURES 17 425

Tekla - Full Detailing-Basic Training Modeling
92% (37)
Tekla - Full Detailing-Basic Training Modeling
1,362 pages
Tekla Structures Custom Components PDF
100% (1)
Tekla Structures Custom Components PDF
172 pages
7 - Introduce Tekla Open API PDF
100% (2)
7 - Introduce Tekla Open API PDF
34 pages
Tekla Structures Detailing Manual
100% (9)
Tekla Structures Detailing Manual
189 pages
Manual Tekla 18
100% (3)
Manual Tekla 18
143 pages
Tekla Structures - Templates and Reports Guide
100% (1)
Tekla Structures - Templates and Reports Guide
31 pages
Modelling Bridging Using Tekla Structures: Table of Contents
No ratings yet
Modelling Bridging Using Tekla Structures: Table of Contents
14 pages
Customizing Advance Steel For Local Markets PDF
No ratings yet
Customizing Advance Steel For Local Markets PDF
104 pages
BS 743 Specification For Materials For Damp-Proof Courses
50% (2)
BS 743 Specification For Materials For Damp-Proof Courses
12 pages
TeklaStructure 17.0 Modeling
100% (1)
TeklaStructure 17.0 Modeling
188 pages
Tekla Structure System - Tutorial
100% (4)
Tekla Structure System - Tutorial
500 pages
Tekla 20 Structure Modeling Tutorial
100% (2)
Tekla 20 Structure Modeling Tutorial
232 pages
Tekla v15. Drawing PDF
No ratings yet
Tekla v15. Drawing PDF
436 pages
Tekla Structure System Tutorial
No ratings yet
Tekla Structure System Tutorial
500 pages
Tekla Structures - Advanced Options Reference - 2
100% (1)
Tekla Structures - Advanced Options Reference - 2
422 pages
Basics of Tekla Structures 2017
No ratings yet
Basics of Tekla Structures 2017
206 pages
Examples
100% (1)
Examples
32 pages
Tekla Structures For Bridge
100% (1)
Tekla Structures For Bridge
21 pages
Tekla Handbook LT
100% (9)
Tekla Handbook LT
414 pages
Tekla Structure Analysis & Design Link With Analysis Software
No ratings yet
Tekla Structure Analysis & Design Link With Analysis Software
6 pages
TEKLA - Guide Line - Use
100% (3)
TEKLA - Guide Line - Use
130 pages
Advanced Steel: Exploration and Results
100% (1)
Advanced Steel: Exploration and Results
13 pages
Tekla Structures
100% (4)
Tekla Structures
2 pages
K.Suresh - Structural Detailer CV
No ratings yet
K.Suresh - Structural Detailer CV
5 pages
Teklastructures PDF
100% (3)
Teklastructures PDF
42 pages
Tekla Steel Modeling Tips
100% (1)
Tekla Steel Modeling Tips
29 pages
Complete Steel Detailing Manual by Expert AISC Steel Detailers
No ratings yet
Complete Steel Detailing Manual by Expert AISC Steel Detailers
2 pages
Tekla Handbook LT PDF
No ratings yet
Tekla Handbook LT PDF
414 pages
Tekla Structures v20 Basic Training Manual Steel - New
100% (2)
Tekla Structures v20 Basic Training Manual Steel - New
341 pages
Tekla Steel Detailing Basic Training Modelling
100% (1)
Tekla Steel Detailing Basic Training Modelling
174 pages
TSD 2016 Fundamental Training Manual PDF
No ratings yet
TSD 2016 Fundamental Training Manual PDF
257 pages
Tekla Structures: Drawing Manual
No ratings yet
Tekla Structures: Drawing Manual
243 pages
Tekla - Advanced Functions
100% (4)
Tekla - Advanced Functions
90 pages
Modeling 161 Enu
No ratings yet
Modeling 161 Enu
268 pages
Tekla Tutorial
No ratings yet
Tekla Tutorial
200 pages
Basics of Tekla Structures
No ratings yet
Basics of Tekla Structures
86 pages
System 160 Enu
No ratings yet
System 160 Enu
269 pages
Modeling 160 Enu
No ratings yet
Modeling 160 Enu
260 pages
Release Notes 170 Enu
No ratings yet
Release Notes 170 Enu
68 pages
Basics 160 Enu PDF
No ratings yet
Basics 160 Enu PDF
83 pages
Release Notes 170 Enu Tekla
No ratings yet
Release Notes 170 Enu Tekla
83 pages
Analysis Guide 170 Enu
No ratings yet
Analysis Guide 170 Enu
86 pages
Manual Tekla18
No ratings yet
Manual Tekla18
90 pages
Drawing Guide 180 Enu
No ratings yet
Drawing Guide 180 Enu
454 pages
Modeling Guide 181 Enu
No ratings yet
Modeling Guide 181 Enu
375 pages
Tekla 18 Lessions
No ratings yet
Tekla 18 Lessions
97 pages
Tekla Structures: Task Manager User Guide
100% (1)
Tekla Structures: Task Manager User Guide
61 pages
Tekla - System Manual - Ingles PDF
No ratings yet
Tekla - System Manual - Ingles PDF
274 pages
Tekla Structures: Templates and Reports Guide
No ratings yet
Tekla Structures: Templates and Reports Guide
30 pages
Project Collaboration 181 Enu
No ratings yet
Project Collaboration 181 Enu
29 pages
Tekla 15 - Detailing Manual
No ratings yet
Tekla 15 - Detailing Manual
188 pages
Custom Components 180 Enu
100% (1)
Custom Components 180 Enu
93 pages
Modelowanie TS18
No ratings yet
Modelowanie TS18
327 pages
Tekla 15 - Training - Template Editor
100% (2)
Tekla 15 - Training - Template Editor
53 pages
Analysis Guide 180 Enu
No ratings yet
Analysis Guide 180 Enu
92 pages
ReleaseNotes 160 SR1 Enu PDF
No ratings yet
ReleaseNotes 160 SR1 Enu PDF
18 pages
Tekla Structures - Custom Components
No ratings yet
Tekla Structures - Custom Components
172 pages
Heaven Sent Me
From Everand
Heaven Sent Me
Mary Jinkens
No ratings yet
Schaum's Outline of Mathematica, 2ed
From Everand
Schaum's Outline of Mathematica, 2ed
Eugene Don
3.5/5 (3)
Byte by Byte
From Everand
Byte by Byte
Manuel Oliveira
No ratings yet
Absolute Beginner's Python Programming: The Illustrated Guide to Learning Computer Programming
From Everand
Absolute Beginner's Python Programming: The Illustrated Guide to Learning Computer Programming
Kevin Wilson
1/5 (1)
Doka Formwork
No ratings yet
Doka Formwork
124 pages
Acrow Props
No ratings yet
Acrow Props
1 page
Tekla - Document
No ratings yet
Tekla - Document
2,005 pages
Teslascada: User Manual
No ratings yet
Teslascada: User Manual
73 pages
Apnt 1160
No ratings yet
Apnt 1160
17 pages
Using A Renesas Code Generation Tool For RL78 Devices - LabProcedures
No ratings yet
Using A Renesas Code Generation Tool For RL78 Devices - LabProcedures
20 pages
Oracle Esbc-Release-Notes 9.2
No ratings yet
Oracle Esbc-Release-Notes 9.2
55 pages
5PB E300 ISG C60 Integrated Fiery Xerox 45155260-1
No ratings yet
5PB E300 ISG C60 Integrated Fiery Xerox 45155260-1
103 pages
Memory and Storage Devices
No ratings yet
Memory and Storage Devices
41 pages
2503.20377v1
No ratings yet
2503.20377v1
14 pages
Faxitron-Tech-Manual Zotano
No ratings yet
Faxitron-Tech-Manual Zotano
82 pages
Lab 2 Map Scale and Zoom Tips
No ratings yet
Lab 2 Map Scale and Zoom Tips
10 pages
(Solved) RDP Authentication Error Function Requested Is Not Supported
No ratings yet
(Solved) RDP Authentication Error Function Requested Is Not Supported
4 pages
Lab 02b
No ratings yet
Lab 02b
8 pages
Preparation Microsoft Office Specialist Word 2016: Rakhmadi Irfansyah Putra
No ratings yet
Preparation Microsoft Office Specialist Word 2016: Rakhmadi Irfansyah Putra
27 pages
Major Project Report Formatc - 2023-24 - BCA 30032024
No ratings yet
Major Project Report Formatc - 2023-24 - BCA 30032024
56 pages
Grade VII-ICT SA2 Final Paper Ict Practical Exam
No ratings yet
Grade VII-ICT SA2 Final Paper Ict Practical Exam
7 pages
A Young, Blind Whiz On Computers
100% (1)
A Young, Blind Whiz On Computers
2 pages
2019 Resume Templates Free
100% (1)
2019 Resume Templates Free
8 pages
GPT-4 Architecture, Infrastructure, Training Dataset, Costs, Vision, MoE
No ratings yet
GPT-4 Architecture, Infrastructure, Training Dataset, Costs, Vision, MoE
4 pages
Comp1:Office Productivity Application Software: Talisay City College
No ratings yet
Comp1:Office Productivity Application Software: Talisay City College
9 pages
A Presentation On 3d Holographic Technology
100% (1)
A Presentation On 3d Holographic Technology
12 pages
CBRC Free LET Review For All - GEN. ED. (ICT)
100% (2)
CBRC Free LET Review For All - GEN. ED. (ICT)
7 pages
Swe 6
No ratings yet
Swe 6
39 pages
Rockwell Automation Programming Help
No ratings yet
Rockwell Automation Programming Help
10 pages
Personal Cloud Storage Using Raspberry Pi: Fairuz Rauf Maalik Ithing Zuraidy Adnan
No ratings yet
Personal Cloud Storage Using Raspberry Pi: Fairuz Rauf Maalik Ithing Zuraidy Adnan
4 pages
Ez FX Tools
No ratings yet
Ez FX Tools
2 pages
Computer 9 - Z1 N3 Module Week 5
No ratings yet
Computer 9 - Z1 N3 Module Week 5
2 pages
Unit I Digital
No ratings yet
Unit I Digital
29 pages
pyside6[801-809]
No ratings yet
pyside6[801-809]
9 pages
Mr. Fourcan Karim Mazumder Faculty Dept. of Computer Science and Engineering
No ratings yet
Mr. Fourcan Karim Mazumder Faculty Dept. of Computer Science and Engineering
12 pages
Nano 8050
No ratings yet
Nano 8050
1 page
Python Scripts
No ratings yet
Python Scripts
5 pages